THE SANDS OF TIME

THE SANDS OF TIME

-HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFELLOW,
A Psalm of Life
"The dead do not need to rise."
"They are a part of the earth now and the earth can never
be conquered for the earth endures forever, it will outlive
all systems of tyranny. Those who have entered it honorably,
and no men entered earth more honorably than those who died
in Spain, have already achieved immortality."
—ERNEST HEMINGWAY
AUTHOR'S NOTE
This is a work of fiction. And yet…
The romantic land of flamenco and Don Quixote and
exotic-looking senoritas with tortoiseshell combs in their
hair is also the land of Torquemada, the Spanish Inquisition,
and one of the bloodiest civil wars in history. More than
half a million people lost their lives in the battles for
power between the Republicans and the rebel Nationalists in
Spain. In 1936, between February and June, 269 political
murders were committed, and the Nationalists executed
Republicans at the rate of a thousand a month, with no
mourning permitted. One hundred sixty churches were burned to
the ground, and nuns were removed forcibly from convents, "as
though," wrote Due de Saint-Simon of an earlier conflict
between the Spanish government and the Church, "they were
whores in a bawdy house."
Newspaper offices were sacked and strikes and riots were
endemic throughout the land. The Civil War ended in a victory
for the Nationalists under Franco, and following his death,
Spain became a monarchy.
The Civil War, which lasted from 1936 to 1939, may be
officially over, but the two Spains that fought it have never
been reconciled. Today another war continues to rage in
Spain, the guerrilla war fought by the Basques to regain the
autonomy they had won under the Republic and lost under the
Franco regime. The war is being fought with bombs, bank
robberies to finance the bombs, assassinations, and riots.
When a member of ETA, a Basque guerrilla underground
group, died in a Madrid hospital after being tortured by the
police, the nationwide riots that followed led to the
resignation of the director general of Spain's police force,
five security chiefs, and two hundred senior police officers.
In 1986, in Barcelona, the Basques publicly burned the
Spanish flag, and in Pamplona thousands fled in fear, when
Basque Nationalists clashed with police in a series of
mutinies that eventually spread across Spain and threatened
the stability of the government. The paramilitary police
retaliated by going on a rampage, firing at random at homes
and shops of the Basques. The terrorism that goes on is more
violent than ever.
This is a work of fiction. And yet…
CHAPTER ONE
Pamplona, Spain
If the plan goes wrong, we will all die. He went over it
again in his mind for the last time, probing, testing,
searching for flaws. He could find none. The plan was daring,
and it called for careful, split-second timing. If it worked,
it would be a spectacular feat, worthy of the great El Cid.
If it failed…
Well, the time for worrying is past, Jaime Miró thought
philosophically. It's time for action.
Jaime Miró was a legend, a hero to the Basque people and
anathema to the Spanish government. He was six feet tall,
with a strong, intelligent face, a muscular body, and
brooding dark eyes. Witnesses tended to describe him as
taller than he was, darker than he was, fiercer than he was.
He was a complex man, a realist who understood the enormous
odds against him, a romantic ready to die for what he
believed in.
Pamplona was a town gone mad. It was the final morning of
the running of the bulls, the Fiesta de San Fermin, the
annual celebration held from July 7 to July 14. Thirty
thousand visitors had swarmed into the city from all over the
world. Some had come merely to watch the dangerous
bull-running spectacle, others to prove their manhood by
taking part in it, running in front of the charging beasts.
All the hotel rooms had long since been reserved, and
university students from Navarre had bedded down in doorways,
bank lobbies, automobiles, the public square, and even the
streets and sidewalks of the town.
The tourists packed the cafes and hotels, watching the
noisy, colorful parades of papier-mache gigantes, and
listening to the music of the marching bands. Members of the
parade wore violet cloaks, with hoods of either green,
garnet, or gold. Flowing through the streets, the processions
looked like rivers of rainbows. Exploding firecrackers
running along the poles and wires of the tramways added to
the noise and general confusion.
The crowd had come to attend the evening bullfights, but
the most spectacular event was the encierro—the early-morning
running of the bulls that would fight later in the day.
The previous night, at ten minutes before midnight in the
darkened streets of the lower part of town, the bulls had
been driven from the corrales de gas, the reception pens, to
run across the river over a bridge to the corral at the
bottom of Calle Santo Domingo, where they were kept for the
night. On this morning they would be turned loose to run
along the narrow Calle Santo Domingo, penned in the street by
wooden barricades at each corner. When they reached the end
of the street they would run into the corrals at the Plaza de
Hemingway, where they would be held until the afternoon
bullfight.
From midnight until six A.M. , the visitors stayed awake,
drinking and singing and making love, too excited to sleep.
Those who would be participating in the running of the bulls
wore the red scarves of San Fermin around their throats.
At a quarter to six in the morning, bands started to
circulate through the streets, playing the stirring music of
Navarre. At seven o'clock sharp, a rocket flew into the air
to signal that the gates of the corral had been opened. The
crowd was filled with feverish anticipation. Moments later a
second rocket went up to warn the town that the bulls were
running.
What followed was an unforgettable spectacle. First came
the sound. It started as a faint, distant ripple on the wind,
almost imperceptible, and then it grew louder and louder
until it became an explosion of pounding hooves, and suddenly
bursting into view appeared six oxen and six enormous bulls.
Each weighing fifteen hundred pounds, they charged down the
Calle Santo Domingo like deadly express trains. Inside the
wooden barricades that had been placed at each intersecting
street corner were hundreds of eager, nervous young men who
intended to prove their bravery by facing the maddened
animals.
The bulls raced down from the far end of the street, past
the Calle Estrafeta and the Calle de Javier, past farmacias
and clothing stores and fruit markets, toward the Plaza de
Hemingway, and there were cries of "Ole" from the frenzied
crowd. As the animals charged nearer, there was a mad
scramble to escape the sharp horns and lethal hooves. The
sudden reality of approaching death made some of the
participants ran for the safety of doorways and fire escapes.
These men were taunted by shouts of "Cobardon!"—coward. The
few who stumbled and fell in the path of the bulls were
quickly hauled to safety.
A small boy and his grandfather were standing behind the
barricades, both breathless with the excitement of the
spectacle taking place only a few feet from them.
"Look at them!" the old man exclaimed. "Magnifico!"
The little boy shuddered. "Tengo miedo, Abuelo. I'm
afraid."
The old man put his arm around the boy. "Si, Manolo. It is
frightening. But wonderful, too. I once ran with the bulls.
There's nothing like it. You test yourself against death, and
it makes you feel like a man."
As a rule, it took two minutes for the animals to gallop
the nine hundred yards along the Calle Santo Domingo to the
arena, and the moment the bulls were safely in the corral, a
third rocket was sent into the air. On this day, the third
rocket did not go off, for an incident occurred that had
never before happened in Pamplona's four-hundred-year history
of the running of the bulls.
As the animals raced down the narrow street, half a dozen
men dressed in the colorful costumes of the feria shifted the
wooden barricades, and the bulls found themselves forced off
the restricted street and turned loose into the heart of the
city. What had a moment before been a happy celebration
instantly turned into a nightmare. The frenzied beasts
charged into the stunned onlookers. The young boy and his
grandfather were among the first to die, knocked down and
trampled by the charging bulls. Vicious horns sliced into a
baby carriage, killing an infant and sending its mother down
to the ground to be crushed. Death was in the air everywhere.
The animals crashed into helpless bystanders, knocking down
women and children, plunging their long, deadly horns into
pedestrians, food stands, statues, sweeping aside everything
unlucky enough to be in their path. People screamed in
terror, desperately fighting to get out of the way of the
lethal behemoths.
A bright red truck suddenly appeared in the path of the
bulls, and they turned and charged toward it, down the Calle
de Estrella, the street that led to the cárcel—Pamplona's
prison
.
The cárcel is a forbidding-looking two-story stone
building with heavily barred windows. There are turrets at
each of its four corners, and the red-and-yellow Spanish flag
flies over its door. A stone gate leads to a small courtyard.
The second floor of the building consists of a row of cells
that holds prisoners condemned to die.
Inside the prison, a heavy set guard in the uniform of the
Policiía Armada was leading a priest garbed in plain black
robes along the second-floor corridor. The policeman carried
a submachine gun.
Noting the questioning look in the priest's eye at the
sight of the weapon, the guard said, "One can't be too
careful here, Father. We have the scum of the earth on this
floor."
The guard directed the priest to walk through a metal
detector very much like those used at airports.
"I'm sorry, Father, but the rules—"
"Of course, my son."
As the priest passed through the security portal, a
shrieking siren cut through the corridor. The guard
instinctively tightened his grip on his weapon.
The priest turned and smiled back at the guard.
"My mistake," he said as he removed a heavy metal cross
that hung from his neck on a silver chain and handed it to
the guard. This time as he passed through, the machine was
silent. The guard handed the cross back to the priest and the
two continued their journey deeper into the bowels of the
prison.
The stench in the corridor near the cells was
overpowering.
The guard was in a philosophical mood. "You know, you're
wasting your time here, Father. These animals have no souls
to save."
"Still, we must try, my son."
The guard shook his head. "I tell you, the gates of hell
are waiting to welcome both of them."
The priest looked at the guard in surprise. "Both of them?
I was told there were three who needed confession."
The guard shrugged."We saved you some time. Zamora died in
the infirmary this morning. Heart attack."
The men had reached the two farthest cells.
"Here we are, Father."
The guard unlocked a door and stepped cautiously back as
the priest entered the cell. The guard then locked the door
and stood in the corridor, alert for any sign of trouble.
The priest went to the figure lying on the dirty prison
cot. "Your name, my son?"
"Ricardo Mellado."
The priest stared down at him. It was difficult to tell
what the man looked like. His face was swollen and raw. His
eyes were almost shut. Through thick lips the prisoner said,
"I'm glad you were able to come, Father."
The priest replied, "Your salvation is the Church's duty,
my son."
"They are going to hang me this morning?"
The priest patted his shoulder gently. "You have been
sentenced to die by the garrote."
Ricardo Mellado stared up at him. "No!"
"I'm sorry. The orders were given by the prime minister
himself."
The priest then placed his hand on the prisoner's head and
intoned: "Dime tus pecados …"
Ricardo Mellado said, "I have sinned greatly in thought,
word, and deed, and I repent all my sins with all my heart."
"Ruego a nuestro Padre celestial par la salvation de tu
alma. En el nombre del Padre, del Hijo y del Espiritu Santo
…"
The guard listening outside the cell thought to himself:
What a stupid waste of time. God will spit in that one's eye.
The priest was finished. "Adios, my son. May God receive
your soul in peace."
The priest moved over to the cell door and the guard
unlocked it, then stepped back, keeping his gun aimed at the
prisoner. When the door was locked again, the guard moved to
the adjoining cell and opened the door.
"He's all yours, Father."
The priest stepped into the second cell. The man inside
had also been badly beaten. The priest looked at him a long
moment. "What is your name, my son?"
"Felix Carpio." He was a husky, bearded man with a fresh,
livid scar on his cheek that the beard failed to conceal.
"I'm not afraid to die, Father."
"That is well, my son. In the end none of us is spared."
As the priest listened to Carpio's confession, waves of
distant sound, at first muffled, then growing louder, began
to reverberate through the building. It was the thunder of
pounding hooves and the screams of the running mob. The guard
listened, startled. The sounds were rapidly moving closer.
"You'd better hurry, Father. Something peculiar is
happening outside."
"I'm finished."
The guard quickly unlocked the cell door. The priest
stepped out into the corridor and the guard locked the door
behind him. There was the sound of a loud crash from the
front of the prison. The guard turned to peer out the narrow,
barred window.
"What the hell was that noise?"
The priest said, "It sounds as though someone wishes an
audience with us. May I borrow that?"
"Borrow what?"
"Your weapon, por favor."
As the priest spoke, he stepped close to the guard. He
silently removed the top of the large cross that hung around
his neck, revealing a long, wicked-looking stiletto. In one
lightning move he plunged the knife into the guard's chest.
"You see, my son," he said as he pulled the submachine gun
from the dying guard's hands, "God and I decided that you no
longer have need of this weapon. In Nomine Pater," Jaime Miró
said, piously crossing himself.
The guard slumped to the cement floor. Jaime Miró took the
keys from the body and swiftly opened the two cell doors. The
sounds from the street were getting louder.
"Let's move," Jaime commanded.
Ricardo Mellado picked up the machine gun. "You make a
damned good priest. You almost convinced me." He tried to
smile with his swollen mouth.
"They really worked you two over, didn't they? Don't
worry. They'll pay for it."
Jaime put his arms around the two men and helped them down
the corridor.
"What happened to Zamora?"
"The guards beat him to death. We could hear his screams.
They took him off to the infirmary and said he died of a
heart attack."
Ahead of them was a locked iron door.
"Wait here," Jaime said.
He approached the door and said to the guard on the other
side, "I'm finished here."
The guard unlocked the door. "You'd better hurry, Father.
There's some kind of disturbance going on out—" He never
finished his sentence. As Jaime's knife went into him, blood
welled out of the guard's mouth.
Jaime motioned to the two men. "Come on."
Felix Carpio picked up the guard's gun, and they started
downstairs. The scene outside was chaos. The police were
running around frantically, trying to see what was happening
and deal with the crowds of screaming people in the courtyard
who were scrambling to escape the maddened bulls. One of the
bulls had charged into the front of the building, smashing
the stone entrance. Another was tearing into the body of a
uniformed guard on the ground.
The red truck was in the courtyard, its motor running. In
the confusion, the three men went almost unnoticed, and those
who did see them escaping were too busy saving themselves to
do anything about it. Without a word, Jaime and his men
jumped into the back of the truck and it sped off, scattering
frantic pedestrians through the crowded streets.
The Guardia Civil, the paramilitary rural police, decked
out in green uniforms and black patent-leather hats, were
trying in vain to control the hysterical mob. The Policía
Armada, stationed in provincial capitals, were also helpless
in the face of the mad spectacle. People were struggling to
flee in every direction, desperately trying to avoid the
enraged bulls. The danger lay less with the bulls and more
with the people themselves as they trampled one another in
their eagerness to escape. Old men and women were knocked
down under the feet of the running mob.
Jaime stared in dismay at the stunning spectacle. "It
wasn't planned for it to happen this way!" he exclaimed. He
stared helplessly at the carnage that was being wreaked, but
there was nothing he could do to stop it. He closed his eyes
to shut out the sight.
The truck reached the outskirts of Pamplona and headed
south, leaving behind the noise and confusion of the rioting.
"Where are we going, Jaime?" Ricardo Mellado asked.
"There's a safe house outside Torre. We'll stay there
until dark and then move on."
Felix Carpio was wincing with pain.
Jaime Miró watched him, his face filled with compassion.
"We'll be there soon, my friend," he said gently.
He was unable to get the terrible scene at Pamplona out of
his mind.
Thirty minutes later they approached the little village of
Torre, and skirted it to drive to an isolated house in the
mountains above the village. Jaime helped the two men out of
the back of the red truck.
"You'll be picked up at midnight," the driver said.
"Have them bring a doctor," Jaime replied. "And get rid of
the truck."
The three of them entered the house. It was a farmhouse,
simple and comfortable, with a fireplace in the living room
and a beamed ceiling. There was a note on the table. Jaime
Miró read it and smiled at the welcoming phrase: "Mi casa es
su casa." On the bar were bottles of wine. Jaime poured
drinks.
Ricardo Mellado said, "There are no words to thank you, my
friend. Here's to you."
Jaime raised his glass. "Here's to freedom."
There was the sudden chirp of a canary in a cage. Jaime
walked over to it and watched its wild fluttering for a
moment. Then he opened the cage, gently lifted the bird out,
and carried it to an open window.
"Fly away, pajarito," he said softly. "All living
creatures should be free."
CHAPTER TWO
Madrid
Prime Minister Leopoldo Martinez was in a rage. He was a
small, bespectacled man, and his whole body shook as he
talked."Jaime Miró must be stopped," he cried. His voice was
high and shrill. "Do you understand me?" He glared at the
half dozen men gathered in the room. "We're looking for one
terrorist, and the whole army and police force are unable to
find him."
The meeting was taking place at Moncloa Palace, where the
prime minister lived and worked, five kilometers from the
center of Madrid, on the Carretera de Galicia, a highway with
no identifying signs. The building itself was green brick,
with wrought-iron balconies, green window shades, and guard
towers at each corner.
It was a hot, dry day, and through the windows, as far as
the eye could see, columns of heat waves rose like battalions
of ghostly soldiers.
"Yesterday Miró turned Pamplona into a battleground."
Martinez slammed a fist down on his desk. "He murdered two
prison guards and smuggled two of his terrorists out of
prison. Many innocent people were killed by the bulls he let
loose."
For a moment no one said anything.
When the prime minister had taken office, he had declared
smugly, "My first act will be to put a stop to these
separatist groups. Madrid is the great unifier. It transforms
Andalusians, Basques, Catalans, and Galicians into
Spaniards."
He had been unduly optimistic. The fiercely independent
Basques had other ideas, and the wave of bombings, bank
robberies, and demonstrations by terrorists of ETA, Euzkadita
Azkatasuna, had continued unabated.
The man at Martinez's right said quietly, "I'll find him."
The speaker was Colonel Ramón Acoca, head of the GOE, the
Grupo de Operaciones Especiales, formed to pursue Basque
terrorists. Acoca was in his middle sixties, a giant with a
scarred face and cold, obsidian eyes. He had been a young
officer under Francisco Franco during the Civil War, and he
was still fanatically devoted to Franco's philosophy: "We are
responsible only to God and to history."
Acoca was a brilliant officer, and he had been one of
Franco's most trusted aides. The colonel missed the
iron-fisted discipline, the swift punishment of those who
questioned or disobeyed the law. He had experienced the
turmoil of the Civil War, with its Nationalist alliance of
Monarchists, rebel generals, landowners, Church hierarchy,
and fascist Falangists on one side, and the Republican
government forces, including Socialists, Communists,
liberals, and Basque and Catalan separatists, on the other.
It had been a terrible time of destruction and killing, a
madness that had pulled in men and war material from a dozen
countries and left a horrifying death toll. And now the
Basques were fighting and killing again.
Colonel Acoca headed an efficient, ruthless cadre of
antiterrorists. His men worked underground, wore disguises,
and were neither publicized nor photographed for fear of
retaliation.
If anyone can stop Jaime Miró, Colonel Acoca can, the
prime minister thought. But there was a catch: Who's going to
be the one to stop Colonel Acoca?
Putting the colonel in charge had not been the prime
minister's idea. He had received a phone call in the middle
of the night on his private line. He had recognized the voice
immediately.
"We are greatly disturbed by the activities of Jaime Miró
and his terrorists. We suggest that you put Colonel Ramón
Acoca in charge of the GOE. Is that clear?"
"Yes, sir. It will be taken care of immediately."
The line went dead.
The voice belonged to a member of the OPUS MUNDO. The
organization was a secret cabal that included bankers,
lawyers, heads of powerful corporations, and government
ministers. It was rumored to have enormous funds at its
disposal, but where the money came from and how it was used
and manipulated was a mystery. It was not considered healthy
to ask too many questions about it.
The prime minister had placed Colonel Acoca in charge, as
he had been instructed, but the giant had turned out to be an
uncontrollable fanatic. His GOE had created a reign of
terror. The prime minister thought of the Basque rebels
Acoca's men had caught near Pamplona. They had been convicted
and sentenced to hang. It was Colonel Acoca who had insisted
that they be executed by the barbaric garrote, the iron
collar fitted with a spike that gradually tightened,
eventually cracking the vertebrae and severing the victim's
spinal cord.
Jaime Miró had become an obsession with Colonel Acoca.
"I want his head," Acoca said. "Cut off his head and the
Basque movement dies."
An exaggeration, the prime minister thought, although he
had to admit that there was a core of truth in it. Jaime Miró
was a charismatic leader, fanatical about his cause, and
therefore dangerous.
But in his own way, the prime minister thought, Colonel
Acoca is just as dangerous.
Primo Casado, the director general of security, was
speaking. "Your Excellency, no one could have foreseen what
happened in Pamplona. Jaime Miró is—"
"I know what he is," the prime minister snapped. "I want
to know where he is." He turned to Colonel Acoca.
"I'm on his trail," the colonel said. His voice chilled
the room. "I would like to remind Your Excellency that we are
not fighting just one man. We are fighting the Basque people.
They give Jaime Miró and his terrorists food and weapons and
shelter. The man is a hero to them. But do not worry. Soon he
will be a hanging hero. After I give him a fair trial, of
course."
Not we. I. The prime minister wondered whether the others
had noticed. Yes, he thought nervously, something will have
to be done about the colonel soon.
The prime minister got to his feet. "That will be all for
now, gentlemen."
The men rose to leave. All except Colonel Acoca.
Leopoldo Martinez began to pace. "Damn the Basques. Why
can't they be satisfied just to be Spaniards? What more do
they want?"
"They're greedy for power," Acoca said. "They want
autonomy, their own language and their flag—"
"No. Not as long as I hold this office. I'm not going to
permit them to tear pieces out of Spain. The government will
tell them what they can have and what they can't have.
They're nothing but rabble who…"
An aide came into the room. "Excuse me, Your Excellency,"
he said apologetically. "Bishop Ibanez has arrived."
"Send him in."
The colonel's eyes narrowed. "You can be sure the Church
is behind all this. It's time we taught them a lesson."
The Church is one of the great ironies of our history,
Colonel Acoca thought bitterly.
In the beginning of the Civil War, the Catholic Church had
been on the side of the Nationalist forces. The pope backed
Generalissimo Franco, and in so doing allowed him to proclaim
that he was fighting on the side of God. But when the Basque
churches and monasteries and priests were attacked, the
Church withdrew its support.
"You must give the Basques and the Catalans more freedom,"
the Church had demanded. "And you must stop executing Basque
priests."
Generalissimo Franco had been furious. How dare the Church
try to dictate to the government?
A war of attrition began. More churches and monasteries
were attacked by Franco's forces. Nuns and priests were
murdered. Bishops were placed under house arrest, and priests
all over Spain were fined for giving sermons that the
government considered seditious. It was only when the Church
threatened Franco with excommunication that he stopped his
attacks.
The goddamned Church! Acoca thought. With Franco dead it
was interfering again.
He turned to the prime minister. "It's time the bishop is
told who's running Spain."
Bishop Calvo Ibanez was a thin, frail-looking man with a
cloud of white hair swirling around his head. He peered at
the two men through his pince-nez spectacles.
"Buenas tardes."
Colonel Acoca felt the bile rise in his throat. The very
sight of clergymen made him ill. They were Judas goats
leading their stupid lambs to slaughter.
The bishop stood there, waiting for an invitation to sit
down. It did not come. Nor was he introduced to the colonel.
It was a deliberate slight.
The prime minister looked to the colonel for direction.
Acoca said curtly, "Some disturbing news has been brought
to our attention. Basque rebels are reported to be holding
meetings in Catholic monasteries. It has also been reported
that the Church is allowing monasteries and convents to store
arms for the rebels." There was steel in his voice. "When you
help the enemies of Spain, you become an enemy of Spain."
Bishop Ibanez stared at him for a moment, then turned to
Prime Minister Martinez. "Your Excellency, with due respect,
we are all children of Spain. The Basques are not your enemy.
All they ask is the freedom to—"
"They don't ask," Acoca roared. "They demand! They go
around the country pillaging, robbing banks, and killing
policemen, and you dare to say they are not our enemies?"
"I admit that there have been inexcusable excesses. But
sometimes in fighting for what one believes—"
"They don't believe in anything but themselves. They care
nothing about Spain. It is as one of our great writers said,
'No one in Spain is concerned about the common good. Each
group is concerned only with itself. The Church, the Basques,
the Catalans. Each one says fuck the others.' "
The bishop was aware that Colonel Acoca had misquoted
Ortega y Gasset. The full quote had included the army and the
government; but he wisely said nothing. He turned to the
prime minister again, hoping for a more rational discussion.
"Your Excellency, the Catholic Church—"
The prime minister felt that Acoca had pushed far enough.
"Don't misunderstand us, Bishop. In principle, of course,
this government is behind the Catholic Church one hundred
percent."
Colonel Acoca spoke up again. "But we cannot permit your
churches and monasteries and convents to be used against us.
If you continue to allow the Basques to store arms in them
and to hold meetings, you will have to suffer the
consequences."
"I am sure that the reports that you have received are
erroneous," the bishop said smoothly. "However, I shall
certainly investigate at once."
The prime minister murmured, "Thank you, Bishop. That will
be all."
Prime Minister Martinez and Colonel Acoca watched him
depart.
"What do you think?" Martinez asked.
"He knows what's going on."
The prime minister sighed. I have enough problems right
now without stirring up trouble with the Church.
"If the Church is for the Basques, then it is against us."
Colonel Acoca's voice hardened. "I would like your permission
to teach the bishop a lesson."
The prime minister was stopped by the look of fanaticism
in the man's eyes. He became cautious. "Have you really had
reports that the churches are aiding the rebels?"
"Of course, Your Excellency."
There was no way of determining if the man was telling the
truth. The prime minister knew how much Acoca hated the
Church. But it might be good to let the Church have a taste
of the whip, providing Colonel Acoca did not go too far.
Prime Minister Martinez stood there thoughtfully.
It was Acoca who broke the silence. "If the churches are
sheltering terrorists, then the churches must be punished."
Reluctantly, the prime minister nodded. "Where will you
start?"
"Jaime Miró and his men were seen in Ávila yesterday.
They are probably hiding at the convent there."
The prime minister made up his mind. "Search it," he said.
That decision set off a chain of events that rocked all of
Spain and shocked the world.
CHAPTER THREE
Ávila
The silence was like a gentle snowfall, soft and hushed,
as soothing as the whisper of a summer wind, as quiet as the
passage of stars. The Cistercian Convent of the Strict
Observance lay outside the walled town of Ávila, the highest
city in Spain, 112 kilometers northwest of Madrid. The
convent had been built for silence. The rules had been
adopted in 1601 and remained unchanged through the centuries:
liturgy, spiritual exercise, strict enclosure, penance, and
silence. Always the silence.
The convent was a simple four-sided group of rough stone
buildings around a cloister dominated by the church. Around
the central court the open arches allowed the light to pour
in on the broad flagstones of the floor where the nuns glided
noiselessly by. There were forty nuns at the convent, praying
in the church, and living in the cloister. The convent at
Ávila was one of seven left in Spain, a survivor out of
hundreds that had been destroyed by the Civil War in one of
the periodic anti-Church movements that took place in Spain
over the centuries.
The Cistercian Convent of the Strict Observance was
devoted solely to a life of prayer. It was a place without
seasons or time, and those who entered were forever removed
from the outside world. The Cistercian life was contemplative
and penitential; the divine office was recited daily and
enclosure was complete and permanent.
All the sisters dressed identically, and their clothes,
like everything else in the convent, were touched by the
symbolism of centuries. The capuche—the cloak and hood—
symbolized innocence and simplicity; the linen tunic, the
renouncement of the works of the world, and mortification;
the scapular—the small squares of woolen cloth worn over the
shoulders—the willingness to labor. A wimple—a covering of
linen laid in plaits over the head and around the chin, sides
of the face, and neck—completed the uniform.
Inside the walls of the convent was a system of internal
passageways and staircases linking the dining room, the
community room, the cells, and the chapel, and everywhere
there was an atmosphere of cold, clean spaciousness.
Thick-paned latticed windows overlooked a high-walled garden.
Every window was covered with iron bars and was above the
line of vision, so that there would be no outside
distractions. The refectory—the dining hall— was long and
austere, its windows shuttered and curtained. The candles in
the ancient candlesticks cast evocative shadows on the
ceilings and walls.
In four hundred years, nothing inside the walls of the
convent had changed, except the faces. The sisters had no
personal possessions, for they desired to be poor, emulating
the poverty of Christ. The church itself was bare of
ornaments, save for a priceless solid-gold cross that had
been a long-ago gift from a wealthy postulant. Because it was
so out of keeping with the austerity of the order, it was
kept hidden away in a cabinet in the refectory. A plain
wooden cross hung at the altar of the church.
The women who shared their lives with the Lord lived
together, worked together, ate together, and prayed together,
yet they never touched and never spoke. The only exceptions
permitted were when they heard mass or when the Reverend
Mother Prioress Betina addressed them in the privacy of her
office. Even then, an ancient sign language was used as much
as possible.
The Reverend Mother was a religeuse in her seventies, a
bright-faced robin of a woman, cheerful and energetic, who
gloried in the peace and joy of convent life, and of a life
devoted to God. Fiercely protective of her nuns, she felt
more pain when it was necessary to enforce discipline than
did the one being punished.
The nuns walked through the cloisters and corridors with
downcast eyes, hands folded in their sleeves at breast level,
passing and repassing their sisters without a word or sign of
recognition. The only voice of the convent was its bells—the
bells that Victor Hugo called "the opera of the steeples."
The sisters came from disparate backgrounds and from many
different countries. Their families were aristocrats,
farmers, soldiers… They had come to the convent as rich and
poor, educated and ignorant, miserable and exalted, but now
they were one in the eyes of God, united in their desire for
eternal marriage to Jesus.
The living conditions in the convent were Spartan. In
winter the cold was knifing, and a chill, pale light altered
in through leaded windows. The nuns slept fully dressed on
pallets of straw, covered with rough woolen sheets. Each had
her own tiny cell, furnished only with the pallet and a
straight-backed wooden chair. There was no wash-stand. A
small earthen jug and basin stood in a corner on the floor.
No nun was ever permitted to enter the cell of another,
except for the Reverend Mother Betina. There was no
recreation of any kind, only work and prayers. There were
work areas for knitting, book binding, weaving, and making
bread. There were eight hours of prayer each day: Matins,
Lauds, Prime, Terce, Sext, None, Vespers, and Compline.
Besides these there were other devotions: benedictions,
hymns, and litanies.
Matins were said when half the world was asleep and the
other half was absorbed in sin.
Lauds, the office of daybreak, followed Matins, and the
rising sun was hailed as the figure of Christ triumphant and
glorified.
Prime was the church's morning prayer, asking for the
blessings on the work of the day.
Terce was at nine o'clock in the morning, consecrated by
St. Augustine to the Holy Spirit.
Sext was at eleven-thirty A.M., evoked to quench the heat
of human passions.
None was silently recited at three o'clock in the
afternoon, the hour of Christ's death.
Vespers was the evening service of the church, as Lauds
was her daybreak prayer.
Compline was the completion of the Little Hours of the
day. A form of night prayers, a preparation for death as well
as sleep, ending the day on a note of loving submission:
Manus tuas, domine, commendo spiritum meum. Redemisti nos,
domine, deus, veritatis.
In some of the other orders, flagellation had been
stopped, but in the cloistered Cistercian convents and
monasteries it survived. At least once a week, and sometimes
every day, the nuns punished their bodies with the
Discipline, a twelve-inch-long whip of thin waxed cord with
six knotted tails that brought agonizing pain; it was used to
lash the back, legs, and buttocks. Bernard of Clairvaux, the
ascetic abbot of the Cistercians, had admonished: "The body
of Christ is crushed… our bodies must be conformed to the
likeness of our Lord's wounded body."
It was a life more austere than in any prison, yet the
inmates lived in an ecstasy such as they had never known in
the outside world. They had renounced physical love,
possessions, and freedom of choice, but in giving up those
things they had also renounced greed and competition, hatred
and envy, and all the pressures and temptations that lie
outside world imposed. Inside the convent reigned an
illpervading peace and the ineffable sense of joy at being
one with God. There was an indescribable serenity within the
walls of the convent and in the hearts of those who lived
there. If the convent was a prison, it was a prison a God's
Eden, with the knowledge of a happy eternity for those who
had freely chosen to be there and to remain here.
Sister Lucia was awakened by the tolling of the convent
bell. She opened her eyes, startled and disoriented for an
instant. The little cell she slept in was dismally black. The
sound of the bell told her that it was three A.M. , when the
office of vigils began, while the world outside was still in
darkness.
Shit! This routine is going to kill me, Sister Lucia
thought.
She lay back on her tiny, uncomfortable cot, desperate for
a cigarette. Reluctantly, she dragged herself out of bed. The
heavy habit she wore and slept in rubbed against her
sensitive skin like sandpaper. She thought of all the
beautiful designer gowns hanging in her apartment in Rome and
at her chalet in Gstaad.
From outside her cell Sister Lucia could hear the soft,
swishing movement of the nuns as they gathered in the
hallway. Carelessly, she made up her bed and stepped out into
the long hall, where the nuns were lining up, eyes downcast.
Slowly, they all began to move toward the chapel.
They look like a bunch of silly penguins, Sister Lucia
thought. It was beyond her comprehension why these women had
deliberately thrown away their lives, giving up sex, pretty
clothes, and gourmet food. Without those things, what reason
is there to go on living? And the goddamned rules!
When Sister Lucia had first entered the convent, the
Reverend Mother had said to her, "You must walk with your
head bowed. Keep your hands folded under your habit. Take
short steps. Walk slowly. You must never make eye contact
with any of the other sisters, or even glance at them. You
may not speak. Your ears are to hear only God's words."
"Yes, Reverend Mother."
For the next month Lucia took instruction.
"Those who come here come not to join others, but to dwell
alone with God. Solitude of spirit is essential to a union
with God. It is safeguarded by the rules of silence."
"Yes, Reverend Mother."
"You must always obey the silence of the eyes. Looking
into the eyes of others would distract you with useless
images."
"Yes, Reverend Mother."
"The first lesson you will learn here will be to rectify
the past, to purge out old habits and worldly inclinations,
to blot out every image of the past. You will do purifying
penance and mortification to strip yourself of self-will and
self-love. It is not enough for us to be sorry for our past
offenses. Once we discover the infinite beauty and holiness
of God, we want to make up not only for our own sins, but for
every sin that has ever been committed."
"Yes, Holy Mother."
"You must struggle with sensuality, what John of the Cross
called 'the night of the senses.' "
"Yes, Holy Mother."
"Each nun lives in silence and in solitude, as though she
were already in heaven. In this pure, precious silence for
which she hungers, she is able to listen to the infinite
silence and possess God."
At the end of the first month, Lucia took her initial
vows. On the day of the ceremony she had her hair shorn. It
was a traumatic experience. The Reverend Mother Prioress
performed the act herself. She summoned Lucia into her office
and motioned for her to sit down. She then stepped behind
her, and before Lucia knew what was happening, she heard the
snip of scissors and felt something tugging at her hair. She
started to protest, but she suddenly realized that what was
happening could only improve her disguise. I can always let
it grow back later, Lucia thought. Meanwhile, I'm going to
look like a plucked chicken.
When Lucia returned to the grim cubicle she had been
assigned, she thought: This place is a snake pit. The floor
consisted of bare boards. The pallet and the hard-backed
chair took up most of the room. She was desperate to get hold
of a newspaper. Fat chance, she thought. Here they had never
heard of newspapers, let alone radio or television. There
were no links to the outside world at all.
But what got on Lucia's nerves most was the unnatural
silence. The only communication was through hand signals, and
learning those drove her crazy. When she needed a broom, she
was taught to move her outstretched right hand from right to
left, as though sweeping. When the Reverend Mother was
displeased, she brought together the tips of her little
fingers three times in front of her body, the other fingers
pressing into her palms. When Lucia was slow in doing her
work, the Reverend Mother pressed the palm of her right hand
against her left shoulder. To reprimand Lucia, she scratched
her own cheek near her right ear with all the fingers of her
right hand in a downward motion.
For Christ's sake, Lucia thought, it looks like she's
scratching a flea bite.
They had reached the chapel. The nuns prayed silently, but
Sister Lucia's thoughts were on more important things than
God.
In another month or two, when the police stop looking for
me, I'll be out of this nuthouse.
After morning prayers, Sister Lucia marched with the
others to the dining room, surreptitiously breaking the rule,
as she did every day, by studying their faces. It was her
only entertainment. She found it incredible to think that
none of the sisters knew what the others looked like.
She was fascinated by the faces of the nuns. Some were
old, some were young, some pretty, some ugly. She could not
understand why they all seemed so happy. There were three
faces that Lucia found particularly interesting. One was
Sister Teresa, a woman who appeared to be in her sixties. She
was far from beautiful, and yet there was a spirituality
about her that gave her an almost unearthly loveliness. She
seemed always to be smiling inwardly, as though she carried
some wonderful secret within herself.
Another nun that Lucia found fascinating was Sister
Graciela. She was a stunningly beautiful woman in her early
thirties. She had olive skin, exquisite features, and eyes
that were luminous black pools.
She could have been a movie star, Lucia thought. What's
her story? Why would she bury herself in a joint like this?
The third nun that captured Lucia's interest was Sister
Megan. Blue eyes, blond eyebrows and lashes. She was in her
late twenties and had a fresh, open-faced look.
What is she doing here? What are any of these women doing
here? They're locked up behind these walls, given a tiny cell
to sleep in, rotten food, eight hours of prayers, hard work,
and too little sleep. They have to be pazzo— all of them.
She was better off than they were, because they were stuck
here for the rest of their lives while she would be out of
here in a month or two. Maybe three, Lucia thought. This is a
perfect hiding place. I'd be a fool to rush away. In a few
months, the police will stop looking for me. When I leave
here and get my money out of Switzerland, maybe I'll write a
book about this crazy place.
A few days earlier, Sister Lucia had been sent by the
Reverend Mother to the office to retrieve a paper, and while
there she had taken the opportunity to start looking through
the files. Unfortunately, she had been caught in the act of
snooping.
"You will do penance by using the Discipline," the Mother
Prioress Betina signaled her.
Sister Lucia bowed her head meekly and signaled, "Yes,
Holy Mother."
Lucia returned to her cell, and minutes later the nuns
walking through the corridor heard the awful sound of the
whip as it whistled through the air and fell again and again.
What they could not know was that Sister Lucia was whipping
the bed.
These fruitcakes may be into S and M, but not yours truly.
They were seated in the refectory, forty nuns at two long
tables. The Cistercian diet was strictly vegetarian. Because
the body craved meat, it was forbidden. Long before dawn, a
cup of tea or coffee and a few ounces of dry bread were
served. The principal meal was taken at eleven A.M., and
consisted of a thin soup, a few vegetables, and occasionally
a piece of fruit.
The Reverend Mother had instructed Lucia, "We are not here
to please our bodies, but to please God."
I wouldn't feed this breakfast to my cat, Sister Lucia
thought. I've been here two months, and I'll bet I've lost
ten pounds. It's God's version of a fat farm.
When breakfast was over, two nuns brought dishpans to each
end of the table and set them down. The sisters seated about
the table sent their plates to the sister who had the
dishpan. She washed each plate, dried it on a towel, and
returned it to its owner. The water got darker and greasier.
And they're going to live like this for the rest of their
lives, Sister Lucia thought disgustedly. Oh, well. I can't
complain. This sure as hell beats a life sentence in prison.
She would have given her immortal soul for a cigarette.
Five hundred yards down the road, Colonel Ramón Acoca and
two dozen carefully selected men from the GOE, the Grupo de
Operaciones Especiales, were preparing to attack the convent.
CHAPTER FOUR
Colonel Ramón Acoca had the instincts of a hunter. He
loved the chase, but it was the kill that gave him a deep,
visceral satisfaction. He had once confided to a friend, "I
have an orgasm when I kill. It doesn't matter whether it's a
deer or a rabbit or a man—there's something about taking a
life that makes you feel like God."
Acoca had been in military intelligence, and he had
quickly achieved a reputation for being brilliant. He was
fearless, ruthless, and intelligent, and the combination
brought him to the attention of one of General Franco's
aides.
Acoca had joined Franco's staff as a lieutenant, and in
less than three years had risen to the rank of colonel, an
almost unheard-of feat. He was put in charge of the
Falangists, the special group used to terrorize those who
opposed Franco.
It was during the war that Acoca had been sent for by a
member of the OPUS MUNDO.
"I want you to understand that we're speaking to you with
the permission of General Franco."
"Yes, sir."
"We've been watching you, Colonel. We are pleased with
what we see."
"Thank you, sir."
"From time to time we have certain assignments that
are—shall we say—very confidential. And very dangerous."
"I understand, sir."
"We have many enemies. People who don't understand the
importance of the work we're doing."
"Yes, sir."
"Sometimes they interfere with us. We can't permit that to
happen."
"No, sir."
"I believe we could use a man like you, Colonel. I think
we understand each other."
"Yes, sir. I'd be honored to be of service."
"We would like you to remain in the army. That will be
valuable to us. But from time to time, we will have you
assigned to these special projects."
"Thank you, sir."
"You are never to speak of this."
"No, sir."
The man behind the desk had made Acoca nervous. There was
something overpoweringly frightening about him.
In time, Colonel Acoca was called upon to handle half a
dozen assignments for the OPUS MUNDO. As he had been told,
they were all dangerous. And very confidential.
On one of the missions Acoca had met a lovely young girl
from a fine family. Until then, all of his women had been
whores or camp followers, and Acoca had treated them with
savage contempt. Some of them had genuinely fallen in love
with him, attracted by his strength, and he had reserved the
worst treatment for them.
But Susana Cerredilla had belonged to a different world.
Her father was a professor at Madrid University, and her
mother was a lawyer. When Susana was seventeen years old, she
had the body of a woman and the angelic face of a Madonna.
Ramón Acoca had never met anyone like this woman-child. Her
gentle vulnerability inspired in him a tenderness of which he
had not known he was capable. He fell madly in love with her,
and, for reasons which neither her parents nor Acoca
understood, she fell in love with him.
On their honeymoon, it was as though Acoca had never known
another woman. He had known lust, but the combination of love
and passion was something he had never previously
experienced.
Three months after they were married, Susana informed him
that she was pregnant. Acoca was wildly excited. To add to
their joy, he was assigned to the beautiful little village of
Castilblanco, in Basque country. It was in the fall of 1936,
when the fighting between the Republicans and Nationalists
was at its fiercest.
On a peaceful Sunday morning, Ramón Acoca and his bride
were having coffee in the village plaza when the square
suddenly filled with Basque demonstrators.
"I want you to go home," Acoca said. "There's going to be
trouble."
"But you—?"
"Please. I'll be all right."
The demonstrators were beginning to get out of hand.
With relief, Ramón Acoca watched his bride walk away from
the crowd toward a convent at the far end of the square. But
as she reached it, the door suddenly swung open and armed
Basques who had been hiding inside swarmed out with blazing
guns. Acoca watched helplessly as his wife went down in a
hail of bullets. It was on that day that he had sworn
vengeance on the Basques and the Church.
And now he was in Ávila, outside another convent. This
time they'll die.
Inside the convent, in the dark before dawn, Sister Teresa
held the Discipline tightly in her right hand and whipped it
hard across her body, feeling the knotted tails slashing into
her as she silently recited the miserere. She almost screamed
aloud, but noise was not permitted, so she kept the screams
inside her. Forgive me, Jesus, for my sins. Bear witness that
I punish myself, as You were punished, and I inflict wounds
upon myself, as wounds were inflicted upon You. Let me
suffer, as You suffered.
She was nearly fainting from the pain. Three more times
she flagellated herself, and then sank, agonized, upon her
cot. She had not drawn blood. That was forbidden. Wincing
against the agony that each movement brought, Sister Teresa
returned the whip to its black case and rested it in a
corner. It was always there, a constant reminder that the
slightest sin had to be paid for with pain.
Sister Teresa's transgression had happened that morning as
she rounded the corner of a corridor, eyes down, and bumped
into Sister Graciela. Startled, Sister Teresa had looked into
Sister Graciela's face. She then immediately reported her own
infraction, to which the Reverend Mother Betina frowned
disapprovingly and made the sign of discipline, moving her
right hand three times from shoulder to shoulder, her hand
closed as though holding a whip, the tip of her thumb held
against the inside of her forefinger.
Lying on her cot, Sister Teresa was unable to get out of
her mind the extraordinarily beautiful face of the young girl
she had gazed at. She knew that as long as she lived she
would never speak to her and would never even look at her
again, for the slightest sign of intimacy between nuns was
severely punished. In an atmosphere of rigid moral and
physical austerity, no relationships of any kind were allowed
to develop. If two sisters worked side by side and seemed to
enjoy each other's silent company, the Reverend Mother would
immediately have them separated. Nor were the sisters
permitted to sit next to the same person at the table twice
in a row. The Church delicately called the attraction of one
nun to another "a particular friendship," and the penalty was
swift and severe. Sister Teresa had served her punishment for
breaking the rule.
Now the tolling bell came to Sister Teresa as though from
a great distance. It was the voice of God, reproving her.
In the next cell, the sound of the bell rang through the
corridors of Sister Graciela's dreams, and the pealing was
mingled with the lubricious creak of bedsprings. The Moor was
moving toward her, naked, his manhood tumescent, his hands
reaching out to grab her. Sister Graciela opened her eyes,
instantly awake, her heart pounding frantically. She looked
around, terrified, but she was alone in her tiny cell and the
only sound was the reassuring tolling of the bell.
Sister Graciela knelt at the side of her cot. Jesus, thank
You for delivering me from the past. Thank You for the joy I
have in being here in Your light. Let me glory only in the
happiness of Your being. Help me, my Beloved, to be true to
the call You have given me. Help me to ease the sorrow of
Your sacred heart.
She rose and carefully made her bed, then joined the
procession of her sisters as they moved silently toward the
chapel for Matins. She could smell the familiar scent of
burning candies and feel the worn stones beneath her sandaled
feet.
In the beginning, when Sister Graciela had first entered
the convent, she had not understood it when the Mother
Prioress had told her that a nun was a woman who gave up
everything in order to possess everything. Sister Graciela
had been fourteen years old then. Now, seventeen years later,
it was clear to her. In contemplation she possessed
everything, for contemplation was the mind replying to the
soul. Her days were filled with a wonderful peace.
Thank You for letting me forget, Father. Thank You for
standing beside me. I couldn't face my terrible past without
You… Thank You… Thank You…
When the Matins were over, the nuns returned to their
cells to sleep until Lauds, the rising of the sun.
Outside, Colonel Ramón Acoca and his men moved swiftly in
the darkness. When they reached the convent, Acoca said,
"Jaime Miró and his men will be armed. Take no chances."
He looked at the front of the convent, and for an instant
he saw that other convent with Basque partisans rushing out
of it, and Susana going down in a hail of bullets.
"Don't bother taking Miró alive," he said.
Sister Megan was awakened by the silence. It was a
different silence, a moving silence, a hurried rush of air, a
whisper of bodies. There were sounds she had never heard in
her fifteen years in the convent. She was suddenly filled
with a premonition that something was terribly wrong.
She rose quietly in the darkness and opened the door to
her cell. Unbelievably, the long stone corridor was filled
with men. A giant with a scarred face was coming out of the
Reverend Mother's cell, pulling her by the arm. Megan stared
in shock. I'm having a nightmare, she thought. These men
can't be here.
"Where are you hiding him?" Colonel Acoca demanded.
The Reverend Mother Betina had a look of stunned horror on
her face. "Shh! This is God's temple. You are desecrating
it." Her voice was trembling. "You must leave at once."
The colonel's grip tightened on her arm and he shook her.
"I want Miró, Sister."
The nightmare was real.
Other cell doors were beginning to open, and nuns were
appearing, with looks of total confusion on their faces.
There had never been anything in their experience to prepare
them for this extraordinary happening.
Colonel Acoca pushed the Reverend Mother away and turned
to Patricko Arrieta, one of his key aides. "Search the place.
Top to bottom."
Acoca's men began to spread out, invading the chapel, the
refectory, and the cells, waking those nuns who were still
asleep and forcing them roughly to their feet through the
corridors and into the chapel. The nuns obeyed wordlessly,
keeping even now their vows of silence. The scene was like a
motion picture with the sound turned off.
Acoca's men were filled with a sense of vengeance. They
were all Falangists, and they remembered only too well how
the Church had turned against them during the Civil War and
supported the Loyalists against their beloved leader,
Generalissimo Franco. This was their chance to get back some
of their own. The nuns' strength and silence made the men
more furious than ever.
As Acoca passed one of the cells, a scream echoed from it.
He looked in and saw one of his men ripping the habit from a
nun. He moved on.
Sister Lucia was awakened by the sounds of men's voices
yelling. She sat up in a panic. The police have found me, was
her first thought. I've got to get the hell out of here.
There was no way out of the convent except through the front
door.
She hurriedly rose and peered out into the corridor. The
sight that met her eyes was astonishing. The corridor was
filled not with policemen but with men in civilian clothes
carrying weapons, smashing lamps and tables. There was
confusion everywhere as they raced around.
The Reverend Mother Betina was standing in the center of
the chaos, praying silently, watching them desecrate her
beloved convent. Sister Megan moved to her side, and Lucia
joined them.
"What the h—what's happening? Who are they?" Lucia asked.
They were the first words she had spoken aloud since entering
the convent.
The Reverend Mother put her right hand under her left
armpit three times, the sign for hide.
Lucia stared at her unbelievingly. "You can talk now.
Let's get out of here, for Christ's sake. And I mean for
Christ's sake."
Patricko Arrieta hurried up to Acoca. "We've searched
everywhere, Colonel. There's no sign of Jaime Miró or his
men."
"Search again," Acoca said stubbornly.
It was then that the Reverend Mother remembered the one
treasure the convent had. She hurried over to Sister Teresa
and whispered, "I have a task for you. Get the gold cross
from the refectory and take it to the convent at Mendavia.
You must get it away from here. Hurry!"
Sister Teresa was shaking so hard that her wimple
fluttered in waves. She stared at the Reverend Mother,
paralyzed. Sister Teresa had spent the last thirty years of
her life in the convent. The thought of leaving it was beyond
her imagination. She raised her hand and signed, I can't.
The Reverend Mother was frantic. "The cross must not fall
into the hands of these men of Satan. Now, do this for
Jesus."
A light came into Sister Teresa's eyes. She stood very
tall. She signed, For Jesus, then turned and hurried toward
the refectory.
Sister Graciela approached the group, staring in wonder at
the wild confusion around her.
The men were getting more and more violent, smashing
everything in sight. Colonel Acoca watched them approvingly.
Lucia turned to Megan and Graciela. "I don't know about
you two, but I'm getting the hell out of here. Are you
coming?"
They stared at her, too dazed to respond.
Sister Teresa was hurrying toward them, carrying something
wrapped in a piece of canvas. Some of the men were herding
more nuns into the refectory.
"Come on," Lucia said.
Sisters Teresa, Megan, and Graciela hesitated for a
moment, then followed Lucia toward the huge front door. As
they turned at the end of the long corridor, they could see
that it had been smashed in.
A man suddenly appeared in front of them. "Going
somewhere, ladies? Get back. My friends have plans for you."
Lucia said, "We have a gift for you." She picked up one of
the heavy metal candlesticks that lined the hallway tables
and smiled.
The man was looking at it, puzzled. "What can you do with
that?"
"This." Lucia swung the candelabrum against his head, and
he fell to the ground, unconscious.
The three nuns stared in horror.
"Move!" Lucia said.
A moment later Lucia, Megan, Graciela, and Teresa were
outside in the front courtyard, hurrying through the gate
into the starry night.
Lucia stopped. "I'm leaving you now. They're going to be
searching for you, so you'd better get away from here."
She turned and started toward the mountains that rose in
the distance, high above the convent. I'll hide out up there
until the search cools off and then I'll head for
Switzerland. Of all the rotten luck. Those bastards blew a
perfect cover.
As Lucia made her way toward higher ground, she glanced
down. From her vantage point she could see the three sisters.
Incredibly, they were still standing in front of the convent
gate, like three black-clad statues. For God's sake, she
thought. Get the hell out of there before they catch you.
Move!
They could not move. It was as though all their senses had
been paralyzed for so long that they were unable to take in
what was happening to them. The nuns stared down at their
feet. They were so dazed they could not think. They had been
cloistered for so long behind the gates of God, secluded from
the world, that now that they were outside the protective
walls, they were filled with feelings of confusion and panic.
They had no idea where to go or what to do. Inside, their
lives had been organized for them. They had been fed,
clothed, told what to do and when to do it. They had lived by
the Rule. Suddenly there was no Rule. What did God want from
them? What was His plan? They stood huddled together, afraid
to speak, afraid to look at one another.
Hesitantly, Sister Teresa pointed to the lights of Ávila
in the distance and signed, That way. Uncertainly, they began
to move toward the town.
Watching them from the hills above, Lucia thought: No, you
idiots. That's the first place they'll look for you. Well,
that's your problem. I have my own problems. She stood there
a moment, watching them walk toward their doom, going to
their slaughter. Shit.
Lucia scrambled down the hill, stumbling over the loose
scree, and ran after them, her cumbersome habit slowing her
down.
"Wait a minute," she called. "Stop!"
The sisters stopped and turned.
Lucia hurried up to them, out of breath. "You're going the
wrong way. The first place they'll search for you is in town.
You've got to hide out somewhere."
The three sisters stared at her in silence.
Lucia said impatiently, "The mountains. Get up to the
mountains. Follow me."
She turned and started back toward the mountains. The
others watched, and after a moment they began to trail after
her, one by one.
From time to time Lucia looked back to make sure they were
following. Why can't I mind my own business? she thought.
They're not my responsibility. It's more dangerous if we're
all together. She kept climbing, making sure they stayed in
sight.
The others were having a hard time of it, and every time
they slowed down, Lucia stopped to let them catch up with
her. I'll get rid of them in the morning.
"Let's move faster," Lucia called.
At the convent, the raid had come to an end. The dazed
nuns, their habits torn and blood-stained, were being rounded
up and put into unmarked, closed trucks.
"Take them back to my headquarters in Madrid," Colonel
Acoca ordered. "Keep them in isolation."
"What charge—?"
"Harboring terrorists."
"Yes, Colonel," Patricko Arrieta said. He hesitated. "Four
of the nuns are missing."
Colonel Acoca's eyes turned cold. "Find them."
Colonel Acoca flew back to Madrid to report to the prime
minister.
"Jaime Miró escaped before we reached the convent."
Prime Minister Martinez nodded. "Yes, I heard." And he
wondered whether Jaime Miró had ever been there to begin
with. There was no doubt about it. Colonel Acoca was getting
dangerously out of control. There had been angry protests
about the brutal attack on the convent. The prime minister
chose his words carefully. "The newspapers have been hounding
me about what happened."
"The newspapers are making a hero of this terrorist,"
Acoca said, stone-faced. "We must not let them pressure us."
"He's causing the government a great deal of
embarrassment, Colonel. And those four nuns—if they talk—"
"Don't worry. They can't get far. I'll catch them and I'll
find Miró."
The prime minister had already decided that he could not
afford to take any more chances. "Colonel, I want you to be
sure the thirty-six nuns you have are well treated, and I'm
ordering the army to join the search for Miró and the others.
You'll work with Colonel Sostelo."
There was a long, dangerous pause. "Which one of us will
be in charge of the operation?" Acoca's eyes were icy.
The prime minister swallowed. "You will be, of course."
Lucia and the three sisters traveled through the early
dawn, moving northeast into the mountains, heading away from
Ávila and the convent. The nuns, used to moving in silence,
made little noise. The only sounds were the rustle of their
robes, the clicking of their rosaries, an occasional snapping
twig, and their gasps for breath as they climbed higher and
higher.
They reached a plateau of the Guadarrama mountains and
walked along a rutted road bordered by stone walls. They
passed fields with sheep and goats. By sunrise they had
covered several miles and found themselves in a wooded area
outside the small village of Villacastin.
I'll leave them here, Lucia decided. Their God can take
care of them now. He sure took great care of me, she thought
bitterly. Switzerland is farther away than ever. I have no
money and no passport, and I'm dressed like an undertaker. By
now those men know we've escaped. They'll keep looking until
they find us. The sooner I get away by myself, the better.
But at that instant, something happened that made her
change her plans.
Sister Teresa was moving through the trees when she
stumbled and the package she had been so carefully guarding
fell to the ground. It spilled out of its canvas wrapping and
Lucia found herself staring at a large, exquisitely carved
gold cross glowing in the rays of the rising sun.
That's real gold, Lucia thought. Someone up there is
looking after me. That cross is manna. Sheer manna. It's my
ticket to Switzerland.
Lucia watched as Sister Teresa picked up the cross and
carefully put it back in its wrapping. She smiled to herself.
It was going to be easy to take it. These nuns would do
anything she told them.
The town of Ávila was in an uproar. News of the attack on
the convent had spread quickly, and Father Berrendo was
elected to confront Colonel Acoca. The priest was in his
seventies, with an outward frailty that belied his inner
strength. He was a warm and understanding shepherd to his
parishioners. But at the moment he was filled with a cold
fury.
Colonel Acoca kept him waiting for an hour, then allowed
the priest to be shown into his office.
Father Berrendo said without preamble, "You and your men
attacked a convent without provocation. It was an act of
madness."
"We were simply doing our duty," the colonel said curtly.
"The convent was sheltering Jaime Miró and his band of
murderers, so the sisters brought this on themselves. We're
holding them for questioning."
"Did you find Jaime Miró in the convent?" the priest
demanded angrily.
Colonel Acoca said smoothly, "No. He and his men escaped
before we got there. But we'll find them, and justice will be
done."
My justice, Colonel Acoca thought savagely.
CHAPTER FIVE
The nuns traveled slowly. Their garb was ill equipped for
the rugged terrain. Their sandals were too thin to protect
their feet against the stony ground, and their habits caught
on everything. Sister Teresa found she could not even say her
rosary. She needed both hands to keep the branches from
snapping in her face. In the light of day, freedom seemed
even more terrifying than before, God had cast the sisters
out of Eden into a strange, frightening world, and His
guidance which they had leaned on for so long was gone. They
found themselves in an uncharted country with no map and no
compass. The walls that had protected them from harm for so
long had vanished and they felt naked and exposed. Danger was
everywhere, and they no longer had a place of refuge. They
were aliens. The unaccustomed sights and sounds of the
country were dazzling. There were insects and bird songs and
hot, blue skies assaulting their senses. And there was
something else that was disturbing.
When they had first fled the convent, Teresa, Graciela,
and Megan had carefully avoided looking at one another,
instinctively keeping to the rules. But now, each found
herself avidly studying the faces of the others. Also, after
all the years of silence, they found it difficult to speak,
and when they did speak, their words were halting, as though
they were learning a strange new skill. Their voices sounded
strange in their ears. Only Lucia seemed uninhibited and sure
of herself, and the others automatically turned to her for
leadership.
"We might as well introduce ourselves," Lucia said. "I'm
Sister Lucia."
There was an awkward pause, and Graciela said shyly, "I'm
Sister Graciela."
The dark-haired, arrestingly beautiful one.
"I'm Sister Megan."
The young blonde with the striking blue eyes.
"I'm Sister Teresa."
The eldest of the group. Fifty? Sixty?
As they lay in the woods resting outside the village,
Lucia thought: They're like newborn birds fallen out of their
nests. They won't last five minutes on their own. Well, too
bad for them. I'll be on my way to Switzerland with the
cross.
Lucia walked to the edge of the clearing they were in and
peered through the trees toward the little village below. A
few people were walking along the street, but there was no
sign of the men who had raided the convent. Now, Lucia
thought. Here's my chance.
She turned to the others. "I'm going down to the village
to try to get us some food. You wait here." She nodded toward
Sister Teresa. "You come with me."
Sister Teresa was confused. For thirty years she had
obeyed only the orders of the Reverend Mother Betina, and now
suddenly this sister had taken charge. But what is happening
is God's will, Sister Teresa thought. He has appointed her to
help us, so she speaks with His voice. "I must get this cross
to the convent at Mendavia as soon as possible."
"Right. When we get down there, we'll ask for directions."
The two of them started down the hill toward the town,
Lucia keeping a careful lookout for trouble. There was none.
This is going to be easy, Lucia thought.
They reached the outskirts of the little town. A sign said
VILLACASTÍN. Ahead of them was the main street. To the left
was a small, deserted street.
Good, Lucia thought. There would be no one to witness what
was about to happen.
Lucia turned into the side street. "Let's go this way.
There's less chance of being seen."
Sister Teresa nodded and obediently followed. The question
now was how to get the cross away from her.
I could grab it and run, Lucia thought, but she'd probably
scream and attract a lot of attention. No, I'll have to make
sure she stays quiet.
A small limb of a tree had fallen to the ground in front
of her, and Lucia paused, then stooped to pick it up. It was
heavy. Perfect. She waited for Sister Teresa to catch up to
her.
"Sister Teresa…"
The nun turned to look at her, and as Lucia started to
raise the club, a male voice from out of nowhere said, "God
be with you, Sisters."
Lucia spun around, ready to run. A man was standing there,
dressed in the long brown robe and cowl of a friar. He was
tall and thin, with an aquiline face and the saintliest
expression Lucia had ever seen. His eyes seemed to glow with
a warm inner light, and his voice was soft and gentle.
"I'm Friar Miguel Carrillo."
Lucia's mind was racing. Her first plan had been
interrupted. But now, suddenly, she had a better one.
"Thank God you found us," Lucia said. This man was going
to be her escape. He would know the easiest way for her to
get out of Spain. "We come from the Cistercian convent near
Ávila," she explained. "Last night some men raided it. All
the nuns were taken. Four of us managed to escape."
When the friar replied, his voice was filled with anger.
"I come from the monastery at San Generro, where I have been
for the past twenty years. We were attacked the night before
last." He sighed. "I know that God has some plan for all His
children, but I must confess that at this moment I don't
understand what it might be."
"These men are searching for us," Lucia said. "It is
important that we get out of Spain as fast as possible. Do
you know how that can be done?"
Friar Carrillo smiled gently. "I think I can help you,
Sister. God has brought us together. Take me to the others."
Within a few minutes Lucia had brought the friar to the
group.
"This is Friar Carrillo," she said. "He's been in a
monastery for the last twenty years. He's come to help us."
Their reactions to the friar were mixed. Graciela dared
not look directly at him; Megan studied him with quick,
interested glances; and Sister Teresa regarded him as a
messenger sent by God who would lead them to the convent at
Mendavia.
Friar Carrillo said, "The men who attacked the convent
will undoubtedly keep searching for you. But they will be
looking for four nuns. The first thing you must do is change
your clothing."
Megan reminded him, "We have no clothes to change into."
Friar Carrillo gave her a beatific smile. "Our Lord has a
very large wardrobe. Do not worry, my child. He will provide.
Let us go back into town."
It was two o'clock in the afternoon, siesta time, and
Friar Carrillo and the four sisters walked down the main
street of the village, alert for any signs of their pursuers.
The shops were closed, but the restaurants and bars were open
and from them they could hear strange music issuing, hard,
dissonant, and raucous-sounding.
Friar Carrillo saw the look on Sister Teresa's face.
"That's rock and roll," he said. "Very popular with the young
these days."
A pair of young women standing in front of one of the bars
stared at the nuns as they passed. The nuns stared back,
wide-eyed, at the strange clothing the pair wore. One wore a
skirt so short it barely covered her thighs, and the other
wore a longer skirt that was split up to the sides of her
thighs. Both wore tight knitted bodices with no sleeves.
They might as well be naked, Sister Teresa thought,
horrified.
In the doorway stood a man who wore a turtleneck sweater,
a strange-looking jacket without a collar, and a jeweled
pendant.
Unfamiliar odors greeted the nuns as they passed a bodega.
Nicotine and whiskey.
Megan was staring at something across the street. She
stopped.
Friar Carrillo said, "What is it? What's the matter?" He
turned to look.
Megan was watching a woman carrying a baby. How many years
had it been since she had seen a baby, or even a small child?
Not since the orphanage, fourteen years ago. The sudden shock
made Megan realize how far her life had been removed from the
outside world.
Sister Teresa was staring at the baby too, but she was
thinking of something else. It's Monique's baby. The baby
across the street was screaming. It's screaming because I
deserted it. But no, that's impossible. That was thirty years
ago. Sister Teresa turned away, the baby's cries ringing in
her ears. They moved on.
They passed a motion-picture theater. The marquee read
Three Lovers, and the photographs displayed showed skimpily
clad women embracing a bare-chested man.
"Why, they're—they're almost naked!" Sister Teresa
exclaimed.
Friar Carrillo frowned. "Yes. It's disgraceful what the
cinema is permitted to show these days. That movie is pure
pornography. The most personal and private acts are there for
everyone to see. They turn God's children into animals."
They passed a hardware store, a hairdressing salon, a
flower shop, a candy store, all closed for the siesta, and at
each shop the sisters stopped and stared at the windows,
filled with once-familiar, faintly remembered artifacts.
When they came to a women's dress shop, Friar Carrillo
said, "Stop."
The shades were pulled down over the front windows and a
sign on the front door said CLOSED.
"Wait here for me, please."
The four women watched as he walked to the corner and
turned out of sight. They looked at one another blankly.
Where was he going, and what if he did not return?
A few minutes later, they heard the sound of the front
door of the shop opening, and Friar Carrillo stood in the
doorway, beaming. He motioned them inside. "Hurry."
When they were all in the store and the friar had locked
the door, Lucia asked, "How did you—?"
"God provides a back door as well as a front door," the
friar said gravely. But there was an impish edge to his voice
that made Megan smile.
The sisters looked around the shop in awe. The store was a
multicolored cornucopia of dresses and sweaters, bras and
stockings, high-heeled shoes and boleros. Objects they had
not seen in years. And the styles seemed so strange. There
were purses and scarves and compacts and blouses. It was all
too much to absorb. The women stood there, gaping.
"We must move quickly," Friar Carrillo warned them, "and
leave before siesta is over and the store reopens. Help
yourselves. Choose whatever fits you."
Lucia thought: Thank God I can finally dress like a woman
again. She walked over to a rack of dresses and began to sort
through them. She found a beige skirt and a tan silk blouse
to go with it. It's not Balenciaga, but it will do for now.
She picked out panties and a bra and a pair of soft boots,
then stepped behind a clothes rack, stripped, and in a matter
of minutes was dressed and ready to go.
The others were slowly selecting their outfits.
Graciela chose a white cotton dress that set off her black
hair and dark complexion, and a pair of sandals.
Megan chose a patterned blue cotton dress that fell below
the knees and low-heeled shoes.
Sister Teresa had the most difficult time choosing
something to wear. The array of choices was too dazzling.
There were silks and flannels and tweeds and leather. There
were cottons and twills and corduroys, and there were plaids
and checks and stripes of every color. And they all
seemed—skimpy was the word that came to Sister Teresa's mind.
For the past thirty years she had been decently covered by
the heavy robes of her calling. And now she was being asked
to shed them and put on these indecent creations. She finally
selected the longest skirt she could find, and a
long-sleeved, high-collared cotton blouse.
Friar Carrillo urged, "Hurry, Sisters. Get undressed and
change."
They looked at one another in embarrassment.
He smiled. "I'll wait in the office, of course."
He walked to the back of the store and entered the office.
The sisters began to undress, painfully self-conscious in
front of one another.
In the office, Friar Carrillo had pulled a chair up to the
transom and was looking out through it, watching the sisters
strip. He was thinking: Which one am I going to screw first!
Miguel Carrillo had begun his career as a thief when he
was only ten years old. He was born with curly blond hair and
an angelic face, which had proved to be of inestimable value
in his chosen profession. He started at the bottom, snatching
purses and shoplifting, and as he got older, his career
expanded and he began to roll drunks and prey on wealthy
women. Because of his enormous appeal, he was very
successful. He devised several original swindles, each more
ingenious than the last. Unfortunately, his latest swindle
had proved to be his undoing.
Posing as a friar from a distant monastery, Carrillo
traveled from church to church begging sanctuary for the
night. It was always granted, and in the morning when the
priest came to open the church doors, all the valuable
artifacts would be missing, along with the good friar.
Unfortunately, fate had double-crossed him. Two nights
earlier in Bejar, a small town near Ávila, the priest had
returned unexpectedly and Miguel Carrillo had been caught in
the act of pilfering the church treasury. The priest was a
beefy, heavyset man, and he had wrestled Carrillo to the
ground and announced that he was going to turn him over to
the police. A heavy silver chalice had fallen to the floor,
and Carrillo had picked it up and hit the priest with it.
Either the chalice was too heavy or the priest's skull was
too thin, but in any case the priest lay dead on the floor.
Miguel Carrillo had fled, panicky, anxious to put himself as
far away from the scene of the crime as possible. He had
passed through Ávila and heard the story of the attack on the
convent by Colonel Acoca and the secret GOE. It was fate that
Carrillo had chanced upon the four escaped nuns.
Now, eager with anticipation, he studied their naked
bodies and thought: There's another interesting possibility.
Since Colonel Acoca and his men are looking for the sisters,
there is probably a nice, fat reward on their heads. I'll lay
them first, and then turn them over to Acoca.
The women, except for Lucia, who was already dressed, were
totally naked. Carrillo watched as they awkwardly put on the
new underclothes. Then they finished dressing, clumsily
buttoning unaccustomed buttons and fastening zippers,
hurrying to get away before they were caught.
Time to get to work, Carrillo thought happily. He got down
from the chair and walked out into the store. He approached
the women, studied them approvingly, and said, "Excellent. No
one in the world would ever take you for nuns. I might
suggest scarves for your heads." He selected one for each of
them and watched them put them on.
Miguel Carrillo had made his decision. Graciela was going
to be the first. She was undoubtedly one of the most
beautiful women he had ever seen. And that body! How could
she have wasted it on God? I'll show her what to do with it.
He said to Lucia, Teresa, and Megan, "You must all be
hungry. I want you to go to the cafe we passed and wait for
us there. I'll go to the church and borrow some money from
the priest so we can eat." He turned to Graciela. "I want you
to come with me. Sister, to explain to the priest what
happened at the convent."
"I—very well."
Carrillo said to the others, "We'll be along in a little
while. I would suggest you use the back door."
He watched as Lucia, Teresa, and Megan left. When he heard
the door close behind them, he turned to Graciela.
She's fantastic, he thought. Maybe I'll keep her with me,
break her in to some cons. She could be a big help.
Graciela was watching him. "I'm ready."
"Not yet." Carrillo pretended to study her for a moment.
"No, I'm afraid it won't do. That dress is all wrong for you.
Take it off."
"But-—why?"
"It doesn't fit properly," Carrillo said glibly. "People
will notice, and you don't want to attract attention."
She hesitated, then moved behind a rack.
"Hurry, now. We have very little time."
Awkwardly, Graciela slipped the dress over her head. She
was in her panties and brassiere when Carrillo suddenly
appeared.
"Take everything off." His voice was husky.
Graciela stared at him. "What? No!" she cried. "I— I
can't. Please—I—"
Carrillo moved closer to her. "I'll help you, Sister."
His hands reached out and he ripped off her brassiere and
tore at her panties.
"No!" she screamed. "You mustn't! Stop it!"
Carrillo grinned. "Carita, we're just getting started.
You're going to love this."
His strong arms were around her. He forced her to the
floor and lifted his robe.
It was as though a curtain in Graciela's mind suddenly
descended. It was the Moor trying to thrust himself inside
her, tearing into the depths of her, and her mother's shrill
voice was screaming. And Graciela thought, terrified, No, not
again. No, please-not again…
She was struggling fiercely now, fighting Carrillo off,
trying to get up.
"Goddamn you," he cried.
He slammed his fist into her face, and Graciela fell back,
stunned and dizzy.
She found herself spinning back in time. Back . . Back .
CHAPTER SIX
Las Navas del Marques, Spain
She was five years old. Her earliest memories were of a
procession of naked strangers climbing in and out of her
mother's bed.
Her mother explained, "They are your uncles. You must show
them respect."
The men were gross and crude and lacked affection. They
stayed for a night, a week, a month, and then vanished. When
they left, Dolores Piñero would immediately look for a new
man.
In her youth, Dolores Piñero had been a beauty, and
Graciela had inherited her mother's looks. Even as a child,
Graciela was stunning to look at, with high cheekbones, an
olive complexion, shiny black hair, and thick, long
eyelashes. Her young body was nubile with promise.
With the passage of years, Dolores Piñero's body had
turned to fat and her wonderfully boned face had become
bruised with the bitter blows of time. Although she was no
longer beautiful, she was accessible, and she had the
reputation of being a passionate bed partner. Making love was
her one talent, and she employed it to try to please men into
bondage, hoping to keep them by buying their love with her
body. She made a meager living as a seamstress because she
was an indifferent one, and was hired only by the women of
the village who could not afford better.
Dolores Piñero despised her daughter, for she was a
constant reminder of the one man whom she had ever loved.
Graciela's father was a handsome young mechanic who had
proposed to the beautiful young Dolores, and she had eagerly
let him seduce her. But when she broke the news that she was
pregnant, he disappeared, leaving Dolores with the curse of
his seed.
Dolores had a vicious temper, and she took out her
vengeance on the child. Any time Graciela did something to
displease her, her mother would hit her and scream, "You're
as stupid as your father!"
There was no way for the child to escape the rain of blows
or the constant screaming. Graciela would wake up every
morning and pray: Please, God, don't let Mama beat me today.
Please, God, make Mama happy today. Please, God, let Mama say
she loves me today.
When she was not attacking Graciela, her mother ignored
her. Graciela prepared her own meals and took care of her
clothes. She made her lunch to take to school, and she would
say to her teacher, "My mother made me empañadas today. She
knows how much I like empañadas."
Or: "I tore my dress, but my mother sewed it up for me.
She loves doing things for me."
Or: "My mother and I are going to a movie tomorrow."
And it would break her teacher's heart. Las Navas del
Marques is a small village an hour from Ávila, and like all
villages everywhere, everyone knew everyone else's business.
The life-style of Dolores Piñero was a disgrace, and it
reflected on Graciela. Mothers refused to let their children
play with the little girl, lest their morals be contaminated.
Graciela went to the school on Plazoleta del Cristo, but she
had no friends and no playmates. She was one of the brightest
students in the school, but her grades were poor. It was
difficult for her to concentrate, for she was always tired.
Her teacher would admonish her, "You must get to bed
earlier, Graciela, so that you are rested enough to do your
work properly."
But her exhaustion had nothing to do with getting to bed
late. Graciela and her mother shared a small two-room casa.
The girl slept on a couch in a tiny room, with only a thin,
worn curtain separating it from the bedroom. How could
Graciela tell her teacher about the obscene sounds in the
night that awakened her and kept her awake as she listened to
her mother making love to whichever stranger happened to be
in her bed?
When Graciela brought home her report card, her mother
would scream, "These are the cursed grades I expected you to
get, and do you know why you got these terrible grades?
Because you're stupid. Stupid!"
And Graciela would believe it and try hard not to cry.
Afternoons when school was out, Graciela would wander
around by herself, walking through the narrow, winding
streets lined with acacia and sycamore trees, past the
whitewashed stone houses, where loving fathers lived with
their families. Graciela had many playmates, but they were
all in her mind. There were beautiful girls and handsome
boys, and they invited her to all their parties, where they
served wonderful cakes and ice cream. Her imaginary friends
were kind and loving, and they all thought she was very
smart. When her mother was not around, Graciela would carry
on long conversations with them.
Would you help me with my homework, Graciela? I don't know
how to do sums, and you're so good at them.
What shall we do tonight, Graciela? We could go to a
movie, or walk into town and have a Coca-Cola.
Will your mother let you come to dinner tonight, Graciela?
We're having paella.
No, I'm afraid not. Mother gets lonely if I'm not with
her. I'm all she has, you know.
On Sundays, Graciela rose early and dressed quietly,
careful not to awaken her mother and whichever uncle was in
her bed, and walked to the San Juan Bautista Church, where
Father Perez talked of the joys of life after death, a
fairy-tale life with Jesus; and Graciela could not wait to
die and meet Jesus.
Father Perez was an attractive priest in his early
forties. He had ministered to the rich and the poor, the sick
and the vital, since he had come to Las Navas del Marques
several years earlier, and there were no secrets in the
little village to which he was not privy. Father Perez knew
Graciela as a regular churchgoer, and he too was aware of the
stories of the constant stream of strangers who shared
Dolores Piñero's bed. It was not a fit home for a young girl,
but there was nothing anyone could do about it. It amazed the
priest that Graciela had turned out as well as she had. She
was kind and gentle and never complained or talked about her
home life.
Graciela would appear at church every Sunday morning
wearing a clean, neat outfit that he was sure she had washed
herself. Father Perez knew she was shunned by the other
children in town, and his heart went out to her. He made it a
point to spend a few moments with her after the service each
Sunday, and when he had time, he would take her to a little
cafe for a treat of helodo.
In the winter Graciela's life was a dreary landscape,
monotonous and gloomy. Las Navas del Marques was in a valley
surrounded by mountains, and because of that, the winters
were six months long. The summers were easier to bear, for
then the tourists arrived and filled the town with laughter
and dancing, and the streets came alive. The tourists would
gather at the Plaza de Manuel Delgado Barredo, with its
little bandstand built on stone, and listen to the orchestra
and watch the natives dance the sardana, the centuries-old
traditional folk dance, barefoot, their hands linked as they
moved gracefully around in a colorful circle. Graciela
watched the visitors as they sat at the sidewalk cafes
drinking aperitivos or shopping at the pescaderia— the fish
market—or the farmacia. At one o'clock in the afternoon the
bodega was always filled with tourists drinking chateo and
picking at tapas—seafood, olives, and chips.
The most exciting thing for Graciela was to watch the
paseo each evening. Boys and girls would walk up and down the
Plaza Mayor in segregated groups, the boys eyeing the girls,
while parents and grandparents and friends watched,
hawk-eyed, from sidewalk cafes. It was the traditional mating
ritual, observed for centuries. Graciela longed to join in
it, but her mother forbade her.
"Do you want to be a puta?" she would scream at Graciela.
"Stay away from boys. They want only one thing from you. I
know from experience," she added bitterly.
If the days were bearable, the nights were an agony.
Through the thin curtain that separated their beds, Graciela
could hear the sounds of savage moaning and writhings and
heavy breathing, and always the obscenities.
"Faster… harder!"
"Cogeme!"
"Mamame la verga!"
"Metelo en el culo!"
Before she was ten years old, Graciela had heard every
obscene word in the Spanish vocabulary. They were whispered
and shouted and shuddered and moaned. The cries of passion
repelled Graciela, and at the same time awakened strange
longings in her.
When Graciela was fourteen years old, the Moor moved in.
He was the biggest man Graciela had ever seen. His skin was
shiny black, and his head was shaved. He had enormous
shoulders, a barrel chest, and huge arms. The Moor had
arrived in the middle of the night when Graciela was asleep,
and she got her first sight of him in the morning when he
pushed the curtain aside and walked stark naked past
Graciela's bed to go outside to the outhouse. Graciela looked
at him and almost gasped aloud. He was enormous, in every
part. That will kill my mother, Graciela thought.
The Moor was staring at her. "Well, well. And who do we
have here?"
Dolores Piñero hurried out of her bed and moved to his
side. "My daughter," she said curtly.
A wave of embarrassment swept over Graciela as she saw her
mother's naked body next to the man.
The Moor smiled, showing beautiful white, even teeth.
"What's your name, guapa?"
Graciela was too shamed by his nakedness to speak.
"Her name's Graciela. She's retarded."
"She's beautiful. I'll bet you looked like that when you
were young."
"I'm still young," Dolores snapped. She turned to her
daughter. "Get dressed. You'll be late for school."
"Yes, Mama."
The Moor stood there, eyeing her.
The older woman took his arm and said cajolingly, "Come
back to bed, querido. We're not finished yet."
"Later," the Moor said. He was still looking at Graciela.
The Moor stayed. Every day when Graciela came home from
school she prayed that he would be gone. For reasons she did
not understand, he terrified her. He was always polite to her
and never made any advances, yet the mere thought of him sent
shivers through her body.
His treatment of her mother was something else. The Moor
stayed in the small house most of the day, drinking heavily.
He took whatever money Dolores earned. Sometimes at night in
the middle of lovemaking, Graciela would hear him beating her
mother, and in the morning Dolores would appear with a
blackened eye or split lip.
"Mama, why do you put up with him?" Graciela asked.
"You wouldn't understand," she said sullenly. "He's a real
man, not a midget like the others. He knows how to satisfy a
woman." She ran her hand through her hair coquettishly.
"Besides, he's madly in love with me."
Graciela did not believe it. She knew that the Moor was
using her mother, but she did not dare protest again. She was
too terrified of her mother's temper, for when Dolores Piñero
was really angry, a kind of insanity took possession of her.
She had once chased Graciela with a kitchen knife because the
girl had dared make a pot of tea for one of the "uncles."
Early one Sunday morning Graciela rose to get ready for
church. Her mother had left early to deliver some dresses. As
Graciela pulled off her nightgown, the curtain was pushed
aside and the Moor appeared. He was naked.
"Where's your mother, guapal?"
"Mama went out early. She had some errands to do."
The Moor was studying Graciela's nude body. "You really
are a beauty," he said softly.
Graciela felt her face flush. She knew what she should do.
She should cover her nakedness, put on her skirt and blouse
and leave. Instead, she stood there, unable to move. She
watched his manhood begin to swell and grow before her eyes.
She could hear the voices ringing in her ears:
"Faster… harder!"
She felt faint.
The Moor said huskily, "You're a child. Get your clothes
on and get out of here."
And Gracieia found herself moving. Moving toward him. She
reached up and slid her arms around his waist and felt his
male hardness against her body.
"No," she moaned. "I'm not a child."
The pain that followed was like nothing Gracieia had ever
known. It was excruciating, unbearable. It was wonderful,
exhilarating, beautiful. She held the Moor tightly in her
arms, screaming with ecstasy. He brought her to orgasm after
orgasm, and Gracieia thought: So this is what the mystery is
all about. And it was so wonderful to know finally the secret
of all creation, to be a part of life at last, to know what
joy was for now and forever.
"What the fuck are you doing?"
It was Dolores Piñero's voice screaming, and for an
instant everything stopped, frozen in time. She was standing
at the side of the bed, staring down at her daughter and the
Moor.
Gracieia looked up at her mother, too terrified to speak.
Dolores's eyes were filled with an insane rage.
"You bitch!" she yelled. "You rotten bitch."
" Mama—please—"
Dolores picked up a heavy iron ashtray at the bedside and
slammed it against her daughter's head.
That was the last thing Gracieia remembered.
She awoke in a large, white hospital ward with two dozen
beds in it, all of them occupied. Harried nurses scurried
back and forth, trying to attend to the needs of the
patients.
Graciela's head was racked with excruciating pain. Each
time she moved, rivers of fire flowed through her. She lay
there, listening to the cries and moans of the other
patients.
Late in the afternoon, a young intern stopped by the side
of her bed. He was in his early thirties, but he looked old
and tired.
"Well," he said, "you're finally awake."
"Where am I?" It hurt her to speak.
"You're in the charity ward of the Hospital Provincial in
Ávila. You were brought in yesterday. You were in terrible
shape. We had to stitch up your forehead." The intern went
on. "Our chief surgeon decided to sew you up himself. He said
you were too beautiful to have scars."
He's wrong, Graciela thought. I'll be scarred for the rest
of my life.
On the second day, Father Perez came to see Graciela. A
nurse moved a chair to the bedside. The priest looked at the
beautiful, pale young girl lying there and his heart melted.
The terrible thing that had happened to her was the scandal
of Las Navas del Marques, but there was nothing anyone could
do about it. Dolores Piñero had told the policía that her
daughter had injured her head in a fall.
Father Perez asked, "Are you feeling better, child?"
Graciela nodded, and the movement made her head pound.
"The policía have been asking questions. Is there anything
you would like me to tell them?"
There was a long silence. Finally she said, "It was an
accident."
He could not bear the look in her eyes. "I see."
What he had to say was painful beyond words. "Graciela, I
spoke with your mother…"
And Graciela knew. "I—I can't go home again, can I?"
"No, I'm afraid not. We'll talk about it." Father Perez
took Graciela's hand. "I'll come back to see you tomorrow."
"Thank you, Father."
When he left, Graciela lay there, and she prayed: Dear
God, please let me die. I don't want to live.
She had nowhere to go and no one to go to. Never again
would she see her home. She would never see her school again,
or the familiar faces of her teachers. There was nothing in
the world left for her.
A nurse stopped at her bedside. "You need anything?"
Graciela looked up at her in despair. What was there to
say?
The following day the intern appeared again.
"I have good news," he said awkwardly. "You're well enough
to leave now." That was a lie, but the rest of his speech was
true. "We need the bed."
She was free to go—but go where?
When Father Perez arrived an hour later, he was
accompanied by another priest.
"This is Father Berrendo, an old friend of mine."
Graciela glanced up at the frail-looking priest. "Father."
He was right, Father Berrendo thought. She is beautiful.
Father Perez had told him the story of what had happened
to Graciela. The priest had expected to see some visible
signs of the kind of environment the child had lived in, a
hardness, a defiance, or self-pity. There were none of those
things in the young girl's face.
"I'm sorry you've had such a bad time," Father Berrendo
told her. The sentence carried a deeper meaning.
Father Perez said, "Graciela, I must return to Las Navas
del Marques. I am leaving you in Father Berrendo's hands."
Graciela was filled with a sudden sense of panic. She felt
as though her last link with home was being cut. "Don't go,"
she pleaded.
Father Perez took her hand in his. "I know you feel
alone," he said warmly, "but you're not. Believe me, child,
you're not."
A nurse approached the bed carrying a bundle. She handed
it to Graciela. "Here are your clothes. I'm afraid you're
going to have to leave now."
An even greater panic seized her. "Now?"
The two priests exchanged a look.
"Why don't you get dressed and come with me?" Father
Berrendo suggested. "We can talk."
Fifteen minutes later Father Berrendo was helping Graciela
out of the hospital door into the warm sunlight. There was a
garden in front of the hospital with brightly colored
flowers, but Graciela was too dazed even to notice them.
When they were seated in his office, Father Berrendo said,
"Father Perez told me that you have no place to go."
Graciela nodded.
"No relatives?"
"Only—" It was difficult to say it. "Only—my mother."
"Father Perez said that you were a regular churchgoer in
your village."
A village she would never see again. "Yes."
Graciela thought of those Sunday mornings, and the beauty
of the church services, and how she had longed to be with
Jesus and escape from the pain of the life she lived.
"Graciela, have you ever thought of entering a convent?"
"No." She was startled by the idea.
"There is a convent here in Ávila—the Cistercian convent.
They would take care of you there."
"I—I don't know." The idea was frightening.
"It is not for everyone," Father Berrendo told her. "And I
must warn you, it is the strictest order of them all. Once
you walk through the gates and take the vows, you have made a
promise to God never to leave."
Graciela sat there staring out the window, her mind filled
with conflicting thoughts. The idea of shutting herself away
from the world was terrifying. It would be like going to
prison. But on the other hand, what did the world have to
offer her? Pain and despair beyond bearing. She had often
thought of suicide. This might offer a way out of her misery.
Father Berrendo said, "It's up to you, my child. If you
like, I will take you to meet the Reverend Mother Prioress."
Graciela nodded. "All right."
The Reverend Mother studied the face of the young girl
before her. Last night for the first time in many, many years
she had heard the voice. A young child will come to you.
Protect her. "How old are you, my dear?"
"Fourteen."
She's old enough. In the fourth century the pope decreed
that girls could be permitted to become nuns at the age of
twelve.
"I'm afraid," Graciela said to the Reverend Mother Betina.
I'm afraid. The words rang in Betina's mind: I'm afraid…
That had been so many long years ago. She was speaking to
her priest. "I don't know if I have a calling for this,
Father. I'm afraid."
"Betina, the first contact with God can be very
disturbing, and the decision to dedicate your life to Him is
a difficult one."
How did I find my calling! Betina wondered.
She had never been even faintly interested in religion. As
a young girl she had avoided church and Sunday School. In her
teens she was more interested in parties and clothes and
boys. If her friends in Madrid had been asked to select
possible candidates to become a nun, Betina would have been
at the bottom of the list. More accurately, she would not
even have been on their list. But when she was nineteen,
events started to happen that changed her life.
She was in her bed, asleep, when a voice said, "Betina,
get up and go outside."
She opened her eyes and sat up, frightened. She turned on
the bedside lamp and realized she was alone. What a strange
dream.
But the voice had been so real. She lay down again, but it
was impossible to go back to sleep.
"Betina, get up and go outside."
It's my subconscious, she thought. Why would I want to go
outside in the middle of the night?
She turned out the light and a moment later turned it on
again. This is crazy.
But she put on a robe and slippers and went downstairs.
The household was asleep.
She opened the kitchen door, and as she did a wave of fear
swept over her, because somehow she knew that she was
supposed to go out the back into the yard. She looked around
in the darkness, and her eye caught a glint of moonlight
shining on an old refrigerator that had been abandoned and
was used to store tools.
Betina suddenly knew why she was there. She walked over to
the refrigerator as though hypnotized, and opened it. Her
three-year-old brother was inside, unconscious.
That was the first incident. In time, Betina rationalized
it as a perfectly normal experience. I must have heard my
brother get up and go out into the yard, and I knew the
refrigerator was there, and I was worried about him, so I
went outside to check.
The next experience was not so easy to explain. It
happened a month later.
In her sleep, Betina heard a voice say, "You must put out
the fire."
She sat up, wide awake, her pulse racing. Again, it was
impossible to go back to sleep. She put on a robe and
slippers and went into the hallway. No smoke. No fire. She
opened her parents' bedroom door. Everything was normal
there. There was no fire in her brother's bedroom. She went
downstairs and looked through every room. There was no sign
of a fire.
I'm an idiot, Betina thought. It was only a dream.
She went back to bed just as the house was rocked by an
explosion. She and her family escaped, and the firemen
managed to put out the fire.
"It started in the basement," a fireman explained, "and a
boiler exploded."
The next incident happened three weeks later. This time it
was no dream.
Betina was on the patio reading when she saw a stranger
walking across the yard. He looked at her and in that instant
she felt a malevolence coming from him that was almost
palpable. He turned away and was gone.
Betina was unable to get him out of her mind.
Three days later, she was in an office building, waiting
for the elevator. The elevator door opened, and she was about
to step into it when she looked at the elevator operator. It
was the man she had seen in her garden. Betina backed away,
frightened. The elevator door closed and the elevator went
up. Moments later, it crashed, killing everyone in it.
The following Sunday, Betina went to church.
Dear Lord, I don't know what's going on here, and I'm
scared. Please guide me and tell me what you want me to do.
The answer came that night as Betina slept. The voice said
one word. Devotion.
She thought about it all night, and in the morning she
went to talk to the priest.
He listened intently to what she had to say.
"Ah. You are one of the fortunate ones. You have been
chosen."
"Chosen for what?"
"Are you willing to devote your life to God, my child?"
"I—I don't know. I'm afraid."
But in the end, she joined the convent.
I chose the right path, the Reverend Mother Betina
thought, because I have never known so much happiness…
And now here was this battered child saying, "I'm afraid."
The Reverend Mother took Graciela's hand. "Take your time,
Graciela. God won't go away. Think about it and come back and
we can discuss it."
But what was there to think about? I've nowhere else in
the world to go, Graciela thought. And the silence would be
welcome. I have heard too many terrible sounds. She looked at
the Reverend Mother and said, "I will welcome the silence."
That had been seventeen years earlier, and since then
Graciela had found peace for the first time. Her life was
dedicated to God. The past no longer belonged to her. She was
forgiven the horrors she had grown up with. She was Christ's
bride, and at the end of her life, she would join Him.
As the years passed in deep silence, despite the
occasional nightmares, the terrible sounds in her mind
gradually faded away.
Sister Graciela was assigned to work in the garden,
tending the tiny rainbows of God's miracle, never tiring of
their splendor. The walls of the convent rose high above her
on all sides like a stone mountain, but Graciela never felt
that they were shutting her in; they were shutting the
terrible world out, a world she never wanted to see again.
Life in the convent was serene and peaceful. But now,
suddenly, her terrible nightmares had turned into a reality.
Her world had been invaded by barbarians. They had forced her
out of her sanctuary, into the world she had renounced
forever. And her sins came flooding back, filling her with
horror. The Moor had returned. She could feel his hot breath
on her face. As she fought him, Graciela opened her eyes, and
it was the friar on top of her trying to penetrate her. He
was saying, "Stop fighting me, Sister. You're going to enjoy
this!"
"Mama," Graciela cried aloud. "Mama! Help me!"
CHAPTER SEVEN
Lucia Carmine felt wonderful as she walked down the street
with Megan and Teresa. It was marvelous to wear feminine
clothes again and hear the whisper of silk against her skin.
She glanced at the others. They were walking nervously,
unaccustomed to their new clothes, looking self-conscious and
embarrassed in their skirts and stockings. They look as
though they've been dropped from another planet. They sure as
hell don't belong on this one, Lucia thought. They might as
well be wearing signs that say CATCH ME.
Sister Teresa was the most uncomfortable of the three
women. Thirty years in the convent had deeply ingrained a
sense of modesty in her, and it was being violated by the
events that had been thrust upon her. This world to which she
had once belonged now seemed unreal. It was the convent that
was real, and she longed to hurry back to the sanctuary of
its protective walls.
Megan was aware that men were eyeing her as she walked
down the street, and she blushed. She had lived in a world of
women for so long that she had forgotten what it was like to
see a man, let alone have one smile at her. It was
embarrassing, indecent… exciting. The men aroused feelings in
Megan that had been long since buried. For the first time in
years, she was conscious of her femininity.
They were passing the bar they had gone by before and the
music was blaring out into the street. What had Friar
Carrillo called it? Rock and roll. Very popular with the
young. Something bothered her. And suddenly Megan realized
what it was. When they had passed the theater, the friar had
said: It's disgraceful what the cinema is permitted to show
these days. That movie is pure pornography. The most personal
and private acts are there for everyone to see.
Megan's heart began to beat faster. If Friar Carrillo had
been locked up in a monastery for the past twenty years, how
could he possibly have known about rock music or what was in
the movie? Something was terribly wrong.
She turned to Lucia and Teresa and said urgently, "We've
got to return to the store."
They watched as Megan turned and ran back, and they
quickly began to follow her.
Graciela was on the floor, desperately fighting to get
free, scratching and clawing at Carrillo.
"Goddamn you! Hold still!" He was getting winded. He heard
a sound and glanced up. He saw the heel of a shoe swinging
toward his head, and that was the last thing he remembered.
Megan picked up the trembling Graciela and held her in her
arms. "Shh. It's all right. He won't bother you anymore."
It was several minutes before Graciela could speak.
"He—he—it wasn't my fault this time," she said pleadingly.
Lucia and Teresa had come into the store. Lucia sized up
the situation at a glance.
"The bastard!"
She looked down at the unconscious, half-naked figure on
the floor. As the others watched, Lucia grabbed some belts
from a counter and tied Miguel Carrillo's hands tightly
behind his back. "Tie his feet," she told Megan.
Megan went to work.
Finally, Lucia stood up, satisfied. "There. When they open
up the store this afternoon, he can explain to them what he
was doing here." She looked at Graciela closely. "Are you all
right?"
"I—I—yes." She tried to smile.
"We'd better get out of here," Megan said. "Get dressed.
Quickly."
When they were ready to leave, Lucia said, "Wait a
minute."
She went over to the cash register and punched a key.
There were a few hundred peseta notes inside. She scooped
them up, picked up a purse from a counter, and put the money
inside. She saw the disapproving expression on Teresa's face.
Lucia said, "Look at it this way, Sister. If God didn't
want us to have this money, He wouldn't have put it there for
us."
They were seated in the cafe, having a conversation.
Sister Teresa was speaking. "We must get the cross to the
convent at Mendavia as quickly as possible. There will be
safety there for all of us."
Not for me, Lucia thought. My safety is that Swiss bank.
But first things first. I've got to get hold of that cross.
"The convent at Mendavia is north of here, right?"
"Yes."
"The men will be looking for us in every town. So we'll
sleep in the hills tonight."
Nobody will hear her even if she does scream.
A waitress brought menus to the table. The sisters
examined them, their expressions confused. Suddenly Lucia
understood. It had been so many years since they had been
given choices of any kind. At the convent they had
automatically eaten the simple food placed before them. Now
they were confronted with a vast array of unfamiliar
delicacies.
Sister Teresa was the first to speak. "I—I will have some
coffee and bread, please."
Sister Graciela said, "I, too."
Megan said, "We have a long, hard journey ahead of us. I
suggest that we order something more nourishing, like eggs."
Lucia looked at her with new eyes. She's the one to keep
an eye on, Lucia thought. Aloud she said, "Sister Megan is
right. Let me order for you, Sisters."
She ordered sliced oranges, tortillas de patatas, bacon,
hot rolls, jam, and coffee.
"We're in a hurry," she told the waitress.
Siesta ended at four-thirty, and the town would be waking
up. She wanted to be out of there before someone discovered
Miguel Carrillo in the dress shop.
When the food arrived, the sisters sat there staring at
it.
"Help yourselves," Lucia urged them.
They began to eat, gingerly at first, and then with gusto,
overcoming their feelings of guilt.
Sister Teresa was the only one having a problem. She took
one bite of food and said, "I—I can't. It's—it's
surrendering."
Megan said, "Sister, you want to get to the convent, don't
you? Then you have to eat to keep up your strength."
Sister Teresa said primly, "Very well. I'll eat. But I
promise you, I won't enjoy it."
It was all Lucia could do to keep a straight face. "Good,
Sister. Eat."
When they had finished, Lucia paid the check with some of
the money she had taken from the cash register and they
walked out into the hot sunshine. The streets were beginning
to come alive, and the stores were starting to open. By now
they have probably found Miguel Carrillo, Lucia thought.
Lucia and Teresa were impatient to get out of town, but
Graciela and Megan were walking slowly, fascinated by the
sights and sounds and smells of the town.
Not until they had reached the outskirts and were heading
toward the mountains did Lucia begin to relax. They moved
steadily north, climbing upward, making slow progress in the
hilly terrain. Lucia was tempted to ask Sister Teresa if she
would like her to carry the package, but she did not want to
say anything that might make the older woman suspicious.
When they reached a small glade in the highland,
surrounded by trees, Lucia said, "We can spend the night
here. In the morning we'll head for the convent at Mendavia."
The others nodded, believing her.
The sun moved slowly across the blue sky, and the glade
was silent, except for the soothing sounds of summer.
Finally, night fell.
One by one the women stretched out on the green grass.
Lucia lay there, breathing lightly, listening for a deeper
silence, waiting for the others to fall asleep so she could
make her move.
Sister Teresa was finding it difficult to sleep. It was a
strange experience lying out under the stars, surrounded by
her sisters. They had names now, and faces and voices, and
she was afraid that God was going to punish her for this
forbidden knowledge. She felt terribly lost.
Sister Megan too was having a difficult time getting to
sleep. She was filled with the excitement of the day's
events. How did I know that the friar was a fraud! she
wondered. And where did I get the courage to save Sister
Graciela? She smiled, unable to keep from being a tiny bit
pleased with herself, even though she knew such a feeling of
pride was a sin.
Graciela was asleep, emotionally drained by what she had
gone through. She tossed and turned, haunted by dreams of
being chased down dark, long, endless corridors.
Lucia Carmine lay still, waiting. She lay there for almost
two hours and then quietly sat up and moved through the
darkness toward Sister Teresa. She would take the package and
disappear.
As she neared Sister Teresa, Lucia saw that the nun was
awake on her knees, praying. Damn! She hurriedly retreated.
Lucia lay down again, forcing herself to be patient.
Sister Teresa could not pray all night. She had to get some
sleep.
Lucia planned her moves. The money taken from the cash
register would be enough for her to take a bus or a train to
Madrid. Once there, it would be simple to find a pawnbroker.
She saw herself walking in and handing him the golden cross.
The pawnbroker would suspect that it was stolen, but that
would not matter. He would have plenty of customers eager to
buy it.
I will give you one hundred thousand pesetas for it.
She would pick it up from the counter. I would rather sell
my body first.
One hundred and fifty thousand pesetas.
I would prefer to melt it down and let the gold run in the
gutter.
Two hundred thousand pesetas. That is my last offer.
You are robbing me blind, but I will accept it.
The pawnbroker would eagerly reach for it.
On one condition.
A condition?
Yes. I misplaced my passport. Do you know someone who can
arrange a passport for me? Her hands would still be on the
golden cross.
He would hesitate, then say, I happen to have a friend who
does things like that.
And the deal would be done. She would be on her way to
Switzerland and freedom. She remembered her father's words:
There is more money there than you could spend in ten
lifetimes.
Her eyes began to close. It had been a long day.
In her half-sleep, Lucia heard the sound of a church bell
from the distant village. It sent memories flooding through
her, of another place, another time…
CHAPTER EIGHT
Taormina, Sicily
She was awakened every morning by the distant sound of the
bells of the Church of San Domenico, high in the Peloritani
Mountains surrounding Taormina. She enjoyed waking up slowly,
languorously stretching like a cat. She kept her eyes closed,
knowing that there was something wonderful to remember. What
was it? The question teased at her mind, and she pushed it
back, not wanting to know just yet, wanting to savor the
surprise. And suddenly her mind was joyously flooded with it.
She was Lucia Maria Carmine, the daughter of Angelo Carmine,
and that was enough to make anyone in the world happy. They
lived in a large, storybook villa filled with more servants
than the fifteen-year-old Lucia could count. A bodyguard
drove her to school each morning in an armored limousine. She
grew up with the prettiest dresses and the most expensive
toys in all of Sicily, and was the envy of her schoolmates.
But it was her father around whom Lucia's life centered.
In her eyes, he was the most handsome man in the world. He
was short and heavy set, with a strong face and stormy brown
eyes that radiated power. He had two sons, Arnaldo and
Victor, but it was his daughter whom Angelo Carmine adored.
And Lucia worshiped him. In church when the priest spoke of
God, Lucia always thought of her father.
He would come to her bedside in the morning and say, "Time
to get up for school, faccia d'angelo." Angel face.
It was not true, of course. Lucia knew she was not really
beautiful. I'm attractive, she thought, studying herself
objectively in the mirror. Yes. Striking, rather than
beautiful. Her reflection showed a young girl with an oval
face, creamy skin, even, white teeth, a strong chin—too
strong? —voluptuous, full lips—too full?—and dark, knowing
eyes. But if her face fell just short of being beautiful, her
body more than made up for it. At fifteen, Lucia had the body
of a woman, with round, firm breasts, a narrow waist, and
hips that moved with sensuous promise.
"We' re going to have to marry you off early," her father
would tease her. "Soon you will drive the young men pazzo, my
little virgin."
"I want to marry someone like you, Papa, but there is no
one like you."
He laughed. "Never mind. We'll find you a prince. You were
born under a lucky star, and one day you will know what it is
like to have a man hold you in his arms and make love to
you."
Lucia blushed. "Yes, Papa."
It was true that no one had made love to her—not for the
past twelve hours. Benito Patas, one of her bodyguards,
always came to her bed when her father was out of town.
Having Benito make love to her in her house added to the
thrill because Lucia knew that her father would kill them
both if he ever discovered what was going on.
Benito was in his thirties, and it flattered him that the
beautiful young virgin daughter of the great Angelo Carmine
had chosen him to deflower her.
"Was it as you expected?" he had asked the first time he
bedded her.
"Oh, yes," Lucia breathed. "Better."
She thought: While he's not as good as Mario, Tony, or
Enrico, he's certainly better than Roberto and Leo. She could
not remember the names of all the others.
At thirteen, Lucia had felt that she had been a virgin
long enough. She had looked around and decided that the lucky
boy would be Paolo Costello, the son of Angelo Carmine's
doctor. Paolo was seventeen, tall and husky, and the star
soccer player at his school. Lucia had fallen madly in love
with Paolo the first time she had seen him. She managed to
run into him as often as possible. It never occurred to Paolo
that their constant meetings had been carefully contrived. He
regarded the attractive young daughter of Angelo Carmine as a
child. But on a hot summer day in August, Lucia decided she
could wait no longer. She telephoned Paolo.
"Paolo—this is Lucia Carmine. My father has something he
would like to discuss with you, and he wondered whether you
could meet him this afternoon at our pool house?"
Paolo was both surprised and flattered. He was in awe of
Angelo Carmine, but he had not known that the powerful
Mafioso was even aware of his existence. "I would be
delighted," Paolo said. "What time would he like me to be
there?"
"Three o'clock."
Siesta time, when the world would be asleep. The pool
house was isolated, at the far end of their widespread
property, and her father was out of town. There would be no
chance of their being interrupted.
Paolo arrived promptly at the appointed hour. The gate
leading to the garden was open, and he walked directly to the
pool house. He stopped at the closed door and knocked.
"Signore Carmine? Pronto … ?"
There was no response. Paolo checked his watch.
Cautiously, he opened the door and stepped inside. The room
was dark.
"Signore Carmine?"
A figure moved toward him. "Paolo…"
He recognized Lucia's voice. "Lucia, I'm looking for your
father. Is he here?"
She was closer to him now, close enough for Paolo to see
that she was stark naked.
"My God!" Paolo gasped. "What—?"
"I want you to make love to me."
"You're pazzo! You're only a child. I'm getting out of
here." He started toward the door.
"Go ahead. I'll tell my father you raped me."
"No, you wouldn't."
"Leave, and you'll find out."
He stopped. If Lucia carried out her threat, there was not
the slightest doubt in Paolo's mind as to what his fate would
be. Castration would be only the beginning.
He walked back to Lucia to reason with her. "Lucia, dear—"
"I like it when you call me dear."
"No—listen to me, Lucia. This is very serious. Your father
will kill me if you tell him I raped you."
"I know."
He made another stab at it. "My father would be disgraced.
My whole family would be disgraced."
"I know."
It was hopeless. "What do you want from me?"
"I want you to do it to me."
"No. It is impossible. If your father found out, he would
kill me."
"And if you leave here he will kill you. You don't have
much choice, do you?"
He stared at her, panicky. "Why me, Lucia?"
"Because I'm in love with you, Paolo!" She took his hands
and pressed them gently between her legs. "I'm a woman. Make
me feel like one."
In the dim light Paolo could see the twin mounds of her
breasts, her hard nipples, and the soft, dark hair between
her legs.
Jesus, Paolo thought. What can a man do?
She was leading him to a couch, helping him out of his
trousers and his shorts. She knelt and put his male hardness
in her mouth, sucked it gently, and Paolo thought: She's done
this before. And when he was on top of her, plunging deep
inside her, and she had her hands tightly wrapped around his
backside, her hips thrusting hungrily against his, Paolo
thought: My God, she's marvelous.
Lucia was in heaven. It was as though she had been born
for this. Instinctively she knew exactly what to do to please
him and to please herself. Her whole body was on fire. She
felt herself building to a climax, higher and higher, and
when it finally happened, she screamed aloud in sheer joy.
They both lay there, spent, breathing hard. Lucia finally
spoke. She said, "Same time tomorrow."
When Lucia was sixteen, Angelo Carmine decided that it was
time for his daughter to see something of the world. With
elderly Aunt Rosa as chaperone, Lucia spent her school
holidays in Capri and Ischia, Venice and Rome, and a dozen
other places.
"You must be cultured—not a peasant, like your Papa.
Travel will round out your education. In Capri Aunt Rosa will
take you to see the Carthusian Monastery of St. James and the
Villa of San Michele and the Palazzo a Mare…"
"Yes, Papa."
"In Venice there is St. Mark's Basilica, the Doges'
Palace, the church of San Giorgio, and the Accademia museum."
"Yes, Papa."
"Rome is the treasure house of the world. There you must
visit the Vatican City, and the Basilica of Santa Maria
Maggiore, and the Borghese Gallery, of course."
"Of course."
"And Milano! You must go to the Conservatorio for a
concert recital. I will arrange tickets for La Scala for you
and Aunt Rosa. In Florence you will see the Municipal Museum
of Art, the Uffizi Museum, and there are dozens of churches
and museums."
"Yes, Papa."
With very careful planning, Lucia managed to see none of
those places. Aunt Rosa insisted on taking a siesta every
afternoon and retiring early each evening.
"You must get your rest too, child."
"Certainly, Aunt Rosa."
And so, while Aunt Rosa slept, Lucia danced at the
Quisisana in Capri, rode in a carrozza with a beplumed and
behatted horse pulling it, joined a group of college boys at
the Marina Piccola, went on picnics at Bagni di Tiberio, and
took the funicolare up to Anacapri, where she joined a group
of French students for drinks at the Piazza Umberto I.
In Venice a handsome gondolier took her to a disco, and a
fisherman took her fishing at Chioggia. And Aunt Rosa slept.
In Rome Lucia drank wine from Apulia and discovered all
the offbeat fun restaurants like Marte and Ranieri and Giggi
Fazi.
Wherever she went, Lucia found hidden little bars and
nightclubs and romantic, good-looking men, and she thought:
Dear Papa was so right. Travel has rounded out my education.
In bed she learned to speak several different languages,
and she thought: This is so much more fun than my language
classes at school.
When Lucia returned home to Taormina, she confided to her
closest girlfriends: "I was naked in Naples, stoned in
Salerno, felt up in Florence, and laid in Lucca."
Sicily itself was a wonder to explore, an island of
Grecian temples, Roman and Byzantine amphitheaters, chapels,
Arab baths, and Swabian castles.
Lucia found Palermo raucous and lively, and she enjoyed
wandering around the Kalsa, the old Arab quarter, and
visiting the Opera dei Pupi, the puppet theater. But
Taormina, where she was born, was her favorite. It was a
picture postcard of a city on the Ionian Sea on a mountain
overlooking the world. It was a city of dress shops and
jewelry stores, bars and beautiful old squares, trattorias
and colorful hotels like the Excelsior Palace and the San
Domenico.
The winding road leading up from the seaport of Naxos is
steep and narrow and dangerous, and when Lucia Carmine was
given a car on her fifteenth birthday, she broke every
traffic law in the book but was never once stopped by the
carabinieri. After all, she was the daughter of Angelo
Carmine.
To those who were brave enough or stupid enough to
inquire, Angelo Carmine was in the real estate business. And
it was partially true, for the Carmine family owned the villa
at Taormina, a house on Lake Como at Cernobbio, a lodge at
Gstaad, an apartment in Rome, and a large farm outside Rome.
But it happened that Carmine was also in more colorful
businesses. He owned a dozen whorehouses, two gambling
casinos, six ships that brought in cocaine from his
plantations in Colombia, and an assortment of other very
lucrative enterprises, including loan-sharking. Angelo
Carmine was the capo of the Sicilian Mafiosi, so it was only
appropriate that he lived well. His life was an inspiration
to others, heartwarming proof that a poor Sicilian peasant
who was ambitious and worked hard could become rich and
successful.
Caimine had started out as an errand boy for the Mafiosi
when he was twelve. By fifteen he had become an enforcer for
the loan sharks, and at sixteen he killed his first man and
made his bones. Shortly after that, he married Lucia's
mother, Anna. In the years that followed, Carmine had climbed
the treacherous corporate ladder to the top, leaving a string
of dead enemies behind him. He had grown, but Anna had
remained the simple peasant girl he had married. She bore him
three fine children, but after that her contribution to
Angelo's life came to a halt. As though knowing she no longer
had a place in her family's life, she obligingly died and was
considerate enough to manage it with a minimum of fuss.
Arnaldo and Victor were in business with their father, and
from the time Lucia was a small girl, she eavesdropped on the
exciting conversations between her father and her brothers,
and listened to the tales of how they had outwitted or
overpowered their enemies. To Lucia, her father was a knight
in shining armor. She saw nothing wrong in what her father
and brothers were doing. On the contrary, they were helping
people. If people wanted to gamble, why let stupid laws stand
in their way? If men took pleasure in buying sex, why not
assist them? And how generous of her father and brothers to
loan money to people who were turned away by the hard-hearted
bankers. To Lucia, her father and brothers were model
citizens. The proof of it lay in her father's choice of
friends. Once a week Angelo Carmine gave an enormous dinner
party at the villa, and oh, the people who would be seated at
the Carmine table! The mayor would be there, and a few
aldermen, and judges, and seated next to them would be movie
stars and opera singers and often the chief of police and a
monsignor. Several times a year the governor himself would
appear.
Lucia lived an idyllic life, filled with parties,
beautiful clothes and jewels, cars and servants, and powerful
friends. And then one February, on her twenty-third birthday,
it all came to an abrupt end.
It began innocuously enough. Two men came to the villa to
see her father. One of the men was his friend the chief of
police, and the other was his lieutenant.
"Forgive me, Padrone," the police chief apologized, "but
this is a stupid formality which the commissioner is forcing
me to go through. A thousand pardons, Padrone, but if you
will be kind enough to accompany me to the police station, I
will see to it that you are home in time to enjoy your
daughter's birthday party."
"No problem," Carmine said genially. "A man must do his
duty." He grinned. "This new commissioner who's been
appointed by the president is—in the American phrase—'an
eager beaver,' eh?"
"I'm afraid that is so," the police chief sighed. "But
don't worry. You and I have seen these pains in the asses
come and go very quickly, eh, Padrone?"
They laughed and went to police headquarters.
Angelo Carmine was not at home for the party that day, or
the next. In fact, he never saw any of his homes again. The
state filed a one-hundred-count indictment against him that
included murder, drug trafficking, prostitution, arson, and
scores of other crimes. Bail was denied. A police dragnet
went out that swept up Carmine's crime organization. He had
counted on his powerful connections in Sicily to have the
charges against him dismissed, but instead he was taken to
Rome in the middle of the night and booked at the Regina
Coeli, the notorious Queen of Heaven prison. He was put in a
small cell that contained barred windows, a radiator, a cot,
and a toilet with no seat. It was outrageous! It was an
indignity beyond imagining.
In the beginning Carmine was sure that Tommaso Contorno,
his attorney, would have him released immediately.
When Contorno came to the visiting room of the prison,
Carmine stormed at him. "They've closed down my whorehouses
and drug operation and they know everything about my
money-laundering operation. Somebody is talking. Find out who
it is and bring me his tongue."
"Do not worry, Padrone," Contorno assured him. "We will
find him."
His optimism turned out to be unfounded. In order to
protect their witnesses, the state adamantly refused to
reveal their names until the trial began.
Two days before the trial, Angelo Carmine and the other
members of the Mafia were transferred to Rebibbia Prigione, a
maximum-security prison twelve miles outside Rome. A nearby
courtroom had been fortified like a bunker. One hundred sixty
accused Mafia members were brought in through an underground
tunnel wearing handcuffs and chains and put in thirty cages
made of steel and bullet-proof glass. Armed guards surrounded
the inside and outside of the courtroom and spectators were
searched before they were allowed to enter.
When Angelo Carmine was marched into the courtroom, his
heart leaped for joy, for the judge on the bench was Giovanni
Buscetta, a man who had been on the Carmine payroll for the
last fifteen years and who was a frequent guest at the
Carmine house. Carmine knew at last that justice was going to
be served.
The trial began. Angelo Carmine looked to omerta, the
Sicilian code of silence, to protect him. But to his
astonishment, the chief witness for the state turned out to
be none other than Benito Patas, the bodyguard. Patas had
been with the Carmine family so long and had been so trusted
that he had been allowed to be in the room at meetings where
confidential matters of business were discussed, and since
that business consisted of every illegal activity on the
police statutes, Patas had been privy to a great deal of
information. When the police apprehended Patas minutes after
he had cold-bloodedly murdered and mutilated the new
boyfriend of his mistress, they had threatened him with life
imprisonment, and Patas had reluctantly agreed to help the
police build their case against Carmine in exchange for a
lighter sentence. Now, to Angelo Carmine's horrified
disbelief, he sat in the courtroom and listened to Patas
reveal the innermost secrets of the Carmine fiefdom.
Lucia was also in the courtroom every day listening to the
man who had been her lover destroy her father and her
brothers.
Benito Patas's testimony opened the floodgates. Once the
commissioner's investigation began, dozens of victims came
forward to tell their stories of what Angelo Carmine and his
hoodlums had done to them. The Mafia had muscled into their
businesses, blackmailed them, forced them into prostitution,
murdered or crippled their loved ones, sold drugs to their
children. The list of horrors was endless.
Even more damaging was the testimony of the pentiti, the
repentant members of the Mafia who decided to talk.
Lucia was allowed to visit her father in prison.
He greeted her cheerfully. He hugged her and whispered,
"Do not worry, faccia d'angelo. Judge Giovanni Buscetta is my
secret ace in the hole. He knows all the tricks of the law.
He will use them to see that your brothers and I are
acquitted."
Angelo Carmine proved to be a poor prophet.
The public had been outraged by the excesses of the Mafia,
and when the trial finally ended, Judge Giovanni Buscetta, an
astute political animal, sentenced the other Mafia members to
long prison terms and Angelo Carmine and his two sons to the
maximum permitted by Italian law—life imprisonment, a
mandatory sentence of twenty-eight years.
For Angelo Carmine it was a death sentence.
All of Italy cheered. Justice had finally triumphed. But
to Lucia, it was a nightmare beyond imagining. The three men
she loved most in the world were being sent to hell.
Once again, Lucia was allowed to visit her father in his
cell. The overnight change in him was heartbreaking. In the
space of a few days, he had become an old man. His figure had
shrunk and his healthy, ruddy complexion had turned sallow.
"They have betrayed me," he moaned. "They have all
betrayed me. Judge Giovanni Buscetta—I owned him, Lucia! I
made him a wealthy man, and he did this terrible thing to me.
And Patas. I was like a father to him. What has the world
come to? Whatever happened to honor? They are Sicilians, like
me."
Lucia took her father's hand in hers and said in a low
voice, "I am Sicilian too, Papa. You shall have your
vengeance. I swear it to you, on my life."
"My life is over," her father told her. "But yours is
still ahead of you. I have a numbered account in Zurich. The
Bank Leu. There is more money there than you could spend in
ten lifetimes." He whispered a number in her ear. "Leave
cursed Italy. Take the money and enjoy yourself."
Lucia held him close. "Papa—"
"If you ever need a friend, you can trust Dominic Durell.
We are like brothers. He has a home in France at Beziers,
near the Spanish border."
"I'll remember."
"Promise me you'll leave Italy."
"Yes, Papa. But there is something I have to do first."
Having a burning desire for revenge was one thing;
figuring out a way to get it was another. She was alone, and
it was not going to be easy. Lucia thought of the Italian
expression Rubare il mestiere—You steal their profession. I
must think the way they do.
A few weeks after her father and brothers had started
serving their prison sentences, Lucia Carmine appeared at the
home of Judge Giovanni Buscetta. The judge himself opened the
door.
He stared at Lucia in surprise. He had seen her often when
he was a guest at the Carmine home, but they had never had
much to say to each other.
"Lucia Carmine! What are you doing here? You shouldn't
have—"
"I have come to thank you, Your Honor."
He studied her suspiciously. "Thank me for what?"
Lucia looked deep into his eyes. "For exposing my father
and brothers for what they were. I was an innocent, living in
that house of horrors. I had no idea what monsters—" She
broke down and began to sob.
The judge stood there uncertainly, then patted her
shoulder. "There, there. Come in and have some tea."
"Th—thank you."
When they were seated in the living room, Judge Buscetta
said, "I had no idea that you felt that way about your
father. I had the impression that you were very close."
"Only because I had no idea what he and my brothers were
really like. When I found out—" She shuddered. "You don't
know what it was like. I wanted to get away, but there was no
escape for me."
"I didn't understand." He patted her hand. "I'm afraid I
misjudged you, my dear."
"I was terrified of him." Her voice was filled with
passion.
Judge Buscetta noticed, not for the first time, what a
beautiful young woman Lucia was. She was wearing a simple
black dress that revealed the outlines of her lush body. He
looked at her rounded breasts and could not help observing
how grown up she had become.
It would be amusing, Buscetta thought, to sleep with the
daughter of Angelo Carmine. He's powerless to hurt me now.
The old bastard thought he owned me, but I was too smart for
him. Lucia is probably a virgin. I could teach her a few
things in bed.
An elderly housekeeper brought in a tray of tea and a
platter of cookies. She put them on a table. "Shall I pour?"
"Let me," Lucia said. Her voice was warm and filled with
promise.
Judge Buscetta smiled at Lucia. "You can go," he told the
housekeeper.
"Yes, sir."
The judge watched as Lucia walked over to the small table
where the tray had been set down and carefully poured out tea
for the judge and herself.
"I have a feeling you and I could become very good
friends, Lucia," Giovanni Buscetta said, probing.
Lucia gave him a seductive smile. "I would like that very
much, Your Honor."
"Please—Giovanni."
"Giovanni." Lucia handed him his cup. She raised her cup
in a toast. "To the death of villains."
Smiling, Buscetta lifted his cup. "To the death of
villains." He took a swallow and grimaced. The tea tasted
bitter.
"Is it too—?"
"No, no. It is fine, my dear."
Lucia raised her cup again. "To our friendship."
She took another sip, and he joined her.
"To—"
Buscetta never finished his toast. He was seized by a
sudden spasm, and he felt a red-hot poker stabbing at his
heart. He grabbed his chest. "Oh, my God! Call a doctor…"
Lucia sat there, calmly sipping her tea, watching the
judge stumble to his feet and fall to the floor. He lay
there, his body twitching, and then he was still.
"That's one, Papa," Lucia said.
Benito Patas was in his cell playing solitaire when the
jailer announced, "You have a conjugal visitor."
Benito beamed. He had been given special status as an
informer, with many privileges, and conjugal visits was one
of them. Patas had half a dozen girlfriends, and they
alternated their visits. He wondered which one had come
today.
He studied himself in the little mirror hanging on the
wall of his cell, put some pomade on his hair, slicked it
back, then followed the guard through the prison corridor to
the section where there were private rooms.
The guard motioned him inside. Patas strutted into the
room, filled with anticipation. He stopped and stared in
surprise.
"Lucia! My God, what the hell are you doing here? How did
you get in?"
Lucia said softly, "I told them we were engaged, Benito."
She was wearing a stunning red low-cut silk dress that
clung to the curves of her body.
Benito Patas backed away from her. "Get out."
"If you wish. But there is something you should hear
first. When I saw you get up on the stand and testify against
my father and brothers, I hated you. I wanted to kill you."
She moved closer to him. "But then I realized that what you
were doing was an act of bravery. You dared to stand up and
tell the truth. My father and my brothers were not evil men,
but they did evil things, and you were the only one strong
enough to stand up against them."
"Believe me, Lucia," he said, "the police forced me to—"
"You don't have to explain," she said softly. "Not to me.
Remember the first time we made love? I knew then that I was
in love with you and that I always would be."
"Lucia, I would never have done what I—"
"Caro, I want us to forget what happened. It's done.
What's important now is you and me."
She was close to him now, and he could smell her heady
perfume. His mind was in a state of confusion. "Do—do you
mean that?"
"More than I've ever meant anything in my life. That's why
I came here today, to prove it to you. To show you that I'm
yours. And not with just words."
Her fingers went to her shoulder straps, and an instant
later her dress shimmered to the floor. She was naked. "Do
you believe me now?"
By God, she was beautiful. "Yes, I believe you." His voice
was husky.
Lucia moved close to him, and her body brushed against
his. "Get undressed," she whispered. "Hurry!"
She watched Patas as he undressed. When he was naked, he
took her hand and led her to the little bed in the corner of
the room. He did not bother with foreplay. In a moment he was
on top of her, spreading her legs, plunging deep inside her,
an arrogant smile on his face.
"It's like old times," he said smugly. "You couldn't
forget me, could you?"
"No," Lucia whispered in his ear. "And do you know why I
couldn't forget you?"
"No, mi amore. Tell me."
"Because I'm Sicilian, like my father."
She reached behind her head and removed the long, ornate
pin that held her hair in place.
Benito Patas felt something stab him under his rib cage,
and the sudden pain made him open his mouth to scream, but
Lucia's mouth was on his, kissing him, and as Benito's body
bucked and writhed on top of her, Lucia had an orgasm.
A few minutes later she was clothed again, and the pin had
been replaced in her hair. Benito was under the blanket, his
eyes closed. Lucia knocked at the cell door and smiled at the
guard who opened it to let her out. "He's asleep," she
whispered.
The guard looked at the beautiful young woman and smiled.
"You probably wore him out."
"I hope so," Lucia said.
The sheer daring of the two murders took Italy by storm.
The beautiful young daughter of a Mafioso had avenged her
father and brothers, and the excitable Italian public cheered
her, rooting for her to escape. The police, quite naturally,
took a rather different point of view. Lucia Carmine had
murdered a respected judge and had then committed a second
murder within the very walls of a prison. In their eyes,
equal to her crimes was the fact that she had made fools of
them. The newspapers were having a wonderful time at their
expense.
"I want her neck," the police commissioner roared to his
deputy. "And I want it today."
The manhunt intensified, while the object of all this
attention was hiding in the home of Salvatore Giuseppe, one
of her father's men who had managed to escape the firestorm.
In the beginning, Lucia's only thought had been to avenge
the honor of her father and brothers. She had fully expected
to be caught and was prepared to sacrifice herself. When she
had managed to walk out of the prison and make her escape,
however, her thoughts changed from vengeance to survival. Now
that she had accomplished what she had set out to do, life
suddenly became precious again. I'm not going to let them
capture me, she vowed to herself. Never.
Salvatore Giuseppe and his wife had done what they could
to disguise Lucia. They had lightened her hair, stained her
teeth, and brought her glasses and some ill-fitting clothes.
Salvatore examined their handiwork critically. "It is not
bad," he said. "But it is not enough. We must get you out of
Italy. You have to go somewhere where your picture is not on
the front page of every newspaper. Somewhere where you can
hide out for a few months."
And Lucia remembered:
If you ever need a friend, you can trust Dominic Durell.
We are like brothers. He has a home in France at Beziers,
near the Spanish border.
"I know where I can go," Lucia said. "I'll need a
passport."
"I will arrange it."
Twenty-four hours later Lucia was looking at a passport in
the name of Lucia Roma, with a photograph taken in her new
persona.
"Where will you go?"
"My father has a friend in France who will help me."
Salvatore said, "If you wish me to accompany you to the
border—?"
Both of them knew how dangerous that could be.
"No, Salvatore," Lucia said. "You have done enough for me.
I must do this alone."
The following morning Salvatore Giuseppe rented a Fiat in
the name of Lucia Roma and handed her the keys.
"Be careful," he pleaded.
"Don't worry. I was born under a lucky star."
Had not her father told her so?
At the Italian-French border the cars waiting to get into
France were advancing slowly in a long line. As Lucia moved
closer to the immigration booth, she became more and more
nervous. They would be looking for her at all exit points. If
they caught her, she knew she would be sentenced to prison
for life. I'll kill myself first, Lucia thought.
She had reached the immigration officer.
"Passport, signorina."
Lucia handed him her black passport through the car
window. As the officer took it, he glanced at Lucia, and she
saw a puzzled look come into his eyes. He looked from the
passport to her face and back again, this time more
carefully. Lucia felt her body tense.
"You're Lucia Carmine," he said.
CHAPTER NINE
"No!" Lucia cried. The blood drained from her face. She
looked around for a way to escape. There was none. And
suddenly, to her disbelief, the guard was smiling. He leaned
toward her and whispered, "Your father was good to my family,
signorina. You may pass through. Good luck." Lucia felt dizzy
with relief. "Grazie." She stepped on the accelerator and
drove the twenty-five yards toward the French border. The
French immigration officer prided himself on being a
connoisseur of beautiful women, and the woman who pulled up
before him was certainly no beauty. She had mousy hair, thick
glasses, stained teeth, and was dowdily dressed.
Why can't Italian women look as beautiful as French women?
he thought disgustedly. He stamped Lucia's passport and waved
her through. She arrived in Beziers six hours later.
The phone was answered on the first ring, and a smooth
male voice said, "Hello."
"Dominic Durell, please."
"This is Dominic Durell. Who is this speaking?"
"Lucia Carmine. My father told me—"
"Lucia!" His voice was warm with welcome. "I was hoping to
hear from you."
"I need help."
"You can count on me."
Lucia's heart lightened. It was the first good news she
had heard in a long time, and she suddenly realized how
drained she felt.
"I need a place where I can hide out from the police."
"No problem. My wife and I have a perfect place for you to
use for as long as you like."
It was almost too good to be true.
"Thank you."
"Where are you, Lucia?"
"I'm—"
At that moment the blare of a police shortwave radio
crackled over the phone, and then was instantly shut off.
"Lucia—"
A loud alarm rang in her head.
"Lucia—where are you? I'll come and get you."
Why would he have a police radio in his house? And he had
answered the telephone on the first ring. Almost as though he
had been expecting her call.
"Lucia—can you hear me?"
She knew, with an absolute certainty, that the man on the
other end of the line was a policeman. So the dragnet was out
for her. This call was being traced.
"Lucia—"
She replaced the receiver and walked quickly away from the
telephone booth. I've got to get out of France, she thought.
She returned to her car and took a map from the glove
compartment. The Spanish border was only a few hours away.
She replaced the map and started off, heading southwest
toward San Sebastian.
It was at the Spanish border that things started to go
wrong.
"Passport, please."
Lucia handed the Spanish immigration officer her passport.
He gave it a cursory glance and started to hand it back, but
something made him hesitate. He took a closer look at Lucia,
and his expression changed.
"Just a moment, please. I will have to have this stamped
inside."
He recognized me, Lucia thought desperately. She watched
him walk into the little office kiosk and show the passport
to another officer. The two of them were talking excitedly.
She had to escape. She opened the door on the driver's side
and stepped out. A group of German tourists who had just
cleared customs was noisily boarding an excursion bus next to
Lucia's car. The sign on the front of the bus read MADRID.
"Achtung!" their guide was calling out. "Schnell."
Lucia glanced toward the hut. The guard who had taken her
passport was yelling into the telephone.
"All aboard, bitte."
Without a second thought, Lucia moved toward the laughing,
chattering tour group and stepped onto the bus, averting her
face from the guide. She took a seat in the rear of the bus,
keeping her head down. Move! she prayed. Now.
Through the window Lucia saw that another guard had joined
the first two and the three of them were examining her
passport. As though in answer to Lucia's prayer, the bus door
closed and the engine sprang to life. A moment later the bus
was rolling out of San Sebastian toward Madrid. What would
happen when the border guards found that she had left her
car? Their first thought would be that she had gone to the
ladies' room. They would wait and finally send someone in to
get her. Their next step would be to search the area to see
if she was hiding somewhere. By then dozens of cars and buses
would have passed through. The police would have no idea
where she had gone, or in which direction she was traveling.
The tour group on the bus was obviously having a happy
holiday. Why not? Lucia thought bitterly. They don't have the
police snapping at their heels. Was it worth risking the rest
of my life for? She thought about it, reliving the scenes
with Judge Buscetta and Benito in her mind.
I have a feeling you and I could become very good friends,
Lucia… To the death of villains.
And Benito Patas: It's like old times. You couldn't forget
me, could you?
And she had made the two traitors pay for their sins
against her family. Was it worth it? They were dead, but her
father and brothers would suffer for the rest of their lives.
Oh, yes, Lucia thought. It was worth it.
Someone on the bus started a German song, and the others
joined in:
"In München ist ein Hofbrau Haus, ein, zwei, sufa …"
I'll be safe with this group for a while, Lucia thought.
I'll decide what to do next when I get to Madrid.
She never reached Madrid.
At the walled city of Ávila, the tour bus made a scheduled
stop for refreshments and what the guide delicately referred
to as a comfort station.
"Alle raus vom bus," he called.
Lucia stayed in her seat, watching the passengers rise and
scramble for the front door of the bus. I'll be safer if I
stay here. But the guide noticed her.
"Out, fraulein," he said. "We have only fifteen minutes."
Lucia hesitated, then reluctantly rose and moved toward
the door.
As she passed the guide, he said, "Warten sie bitte! You
are not of this tour."
Lucia gave him a warm smile. "No," she said. "You see, my
car broke down in San Sebastian and it is very important that
I get to Madrid, so I—"
"Nein!" the guide bellowed. "This is not possible. This is
a private tour."
"I know," Lucia told him, "but you see, I need—"
"You must arrange this with the company headquarters in
Munich."
"I can't. I'm in a terrible hurry and—"
"Nein, nein. You will get me in trouble. Go away or I will
call the police."
"But—"
Nothing she said could sway him. Twenty minutes later
Lucia watched the bus pull away and roar down the highway
toward Madrid. She was stranded with no passport and almost
no money, and by now the police of half a dozen countries
would be looking for her to arrest her for murder.
She turned to examine her surroundings. The bus had
stopped in front of a circular building with a sign in front
that read ESTACFON DE AUTOBUSES.
I can get another bus here, Lucia thought.
She walked into the station. It was a large building with
marble walls, and scattered around the room were a dozen
ticket windows with a sign over each one: SEGOVIA…
MUÑOGALINDO… VALLADOLID… SALAMANCA…
MADRID. Stairs and an escalator led to the downstairs
level, where the buses departed from. There was a pasteleria,
where they sold doughnuts and candy and sandwiches wrapped in
wax paper, and Lucia suddenly realized that she was starved.
I'd better not buy anything, she thought, until I find out
how much a bus ticket costs.
As she started toward the window marked MADRID, two
uniformed policemen hurried into the station. One of them was
carrying a photograph. They moved from window to window
showing the picture to the clerks.
They're looking for me. That damned bus driver reported
me.
A family of newly arrived passengers was coming up the
escalator. As they moved toward the door, Lucia stepped up
beside them, mingling with them, and went outside.
She walked down the cobblestone streets of Ávila, trying
not to rush, afraid of drawing attention to herself. She
turned into the Calle de la Madre Soledad, with its granite
buildings and black wrought-iron balconies, and when she
reached the Plaza de la Santa, she sat down on a park bench
to try to figure out her next move. A hundred yards away,
several women and some couples were seated in the park,
enjoying the afternoon sunshine.
As Lucia sat there, a police car appeared. It pulled up at
the far end of the square and two policemen got out. They
moved over to one of the women seated alone and began
questioning her. Lucia's heart began to beat faster.
She forced herself to get to her feet slowly, her heart
pounding, and turned away from the policemen and kept
walking. The next street was called, unbelievably, "The
Street of Life and Death." I wonder if it's an omen.
There were lifelike stone lions in the plaza, with their
tongues out, and in Lucia's fevered imagination they seemed
to be snapping at her. Ahead of her was a large cathedral,
and on its fasade was a carved medallion of a young girl and
a grinning skull. The very air seemed to be filled with
death.
Lucia heard the sound of a church bell and looked up
through the open city gate. In the distance, high on a hill,
rose the walls of a convent. She stood there, staring at it.
"Why have you come to us, my daughter?" the Reverend
Mother Betina asked softly.
"I need a place of refuge."
"And you have decided to seek the refuge of God?"
Exactly. "Yes." Lucia began to improvise. "This is what I
have always wanted—to devote myself to the life of the
Spirit."
"In our souls it is what we all wish for, is it not,
daughter?"
Jesus, she's really falling for it, Lucia thought happily.
The Reverend Mother went on. "You must understand that the
Cistercian order is the strictest of all the orders, my
child. We are completely isolated from the outside world."
Her words were music to Lucia's ears.
"Those who enter these walls have vowed never to leave."
"I never want to leave," Lucia assured her. Not for the
next few months, anyway.
The Reverend Mother rose. "It is an important decision. I
suggest that you go and think about it carefully before you
make up your mind."
Lucia felt the situation slipping away from her, and she
began to panic. She had nowhere to go. Her only hope was to
stay behind these walls.
"I have thought about it," Lucia said quickly. "Believe
me, Reverend Mother, I've thought about nothing else. I want
to renounce the world." She looked the Mother Prioress in the
eye. "I want to be here more than I want to be anywhere else
in the world." Lucia's voice rang with truth.
The Reverend Mother was puzzled. There was something
unsettled and frantic about this woman that was disturbing.
And yet what better reason for anyone to come to this place
where her spirit would be calmed by meditation and prayer?
"Are you Catholic?"
"Yes."
The Reverend Mother picked up an old-fashioned quill pen.
"Tell me your name, child."
"My name is Lucia Car—Roma."
"Are your parents alive?"
"My father is."
"What does he do?"
"He was a businessman. He's retired." She thought of how
pale and wasted he had looked the last time she saw him, and
a pang went through her.
"Do you have any brothers or sisters?"
"Two brothers."
"And what do they do?"
Lucia decided she needed all the help she could get.
"They're priests."
"Lovely."
The catechism went on for three hours. At the end of that
time, the Reverend Mother Betina said, "I will find you a bed
for the night. In the morning you will begin instructions,
and when they are finished, if you still feel the same, you
may join the order. But I warn you, it is a very difficult
path you have chosen."
"Believe me," Lucia said earnestly, "I have no choice."
The night wind was soft and warm, whispering its way
across the wooded glade, and Lucia slept. She was at a party
in a beautiful villa, and her father and brothers were there.
Everyone was having a wonderful time, until a stranger walked
into the room and said, "Who the hell are these people?" Then
the lights went out and a bright flashlight shone in her face
and she came awake and sat up, the light blinding her.
There were half a dozen men surrounding the nuns in the
clearing. With the light in her eyes, Lucia could only dimly
make out their shapes.
"Who are you?" the man demanded again. His voice was deep
and rough.
Lucia was instantly awake, her mind alert. She was
trapped. But if these men were the police, they would have
known who the nuns were. And what were they doing in the
woods at night?
Lucia took a chance. "We are sisters from the convent
at
Avila," she said. "Some government men came and—"
"We heard about it," the man interrupted.
The other sisters were all sitting up now, awake and
terrified.
"Who—who are you?" Megan asked.
"My name is Jaime Miró."
There were six of them, dressed in rough trousers, leather
jackets, turtleneck sweaters, canvas rope-soled shoes, and
the traditional Basque berets. They were heavily armed, and
in the dim moonlight they had a demonic look about them. Two
of the men looked as though they had been badly beaten.
The man who called himself Jaime Miró was tall and lean,
with fierce black eyes. "They could have been followed here."
He turned to one of the members of his band. "Have a look
around."
"Si."
Lucia realized that it was a woman who had answered. She
watched her move silently into the trees.
"What are we going to do with them?" Ricardo Mellado
asked.
Jaime Miró said, "Nada. We leave them and move on."
One of the men protested, "Jaime—these are little sisters
of Jesus."
"Then let Jesus take care of them," Jaime Miró said
curtly. "We have work to do."
The nuns were all standing now, waiting. The men were
gathered around Jaime, arguing with him.
"We can't let them get caught. Acoca and his men are
searching for them."
"They're searching for us too, amigo."
"The sisters will never make it without our help."
Jaime Miró said firmly, "No. We're not risking our lives
for them. We have problems of our own."
Felix Carpio, one of his lieutenants, said, "We could
escort them part of the way, Jaime. Just until they get away
from here." He turned to the nuns. "Where are you sisters
headed?"
Teresa spoke up, the light of God in her eyes. "I have a
holy mission. There is a convent at Mendavia that will
shelter us."
Felix Carpio said to Jaime Miró, "We could escort them
there. Mendavia's on our way to San Sebastian."
Jaime turned on him, furious. "You damned fool! Why don't
you put up a signpost telling everyone where we're going?"
"I only meant—"
"Mierda!" His voice was filled with disgust. "Now we have
no choice. We'll have to take them with us. If Acoca finds
them, he'll make them talk. They're going to slow us down and
make it that much easier for Acoca and his butchers to track
us."
Lucia was only half listening. The gold cross lay within
tempting reach. But these damned men! You have lousy timing,
God, and a weird sense of humor.
"All right," Jaime Miró was saying. "We'll have to make
the best of it. We'll take them as far as the convent and
drop them, but we can't all travel together like some bloody
circus." He turned to the nuns. He could not keep the anger
out of his voice. "Do any of you even know where Mendavia
is?"
The sisters looked at one another.
Graciela said, "Not exactly."
"Then how the hell did you ever expect to get there?"
"God will lead us," Sister Teresa said firmly.
Another of the men, Rubio Arzano, grinned. "You're in
luck." He nodded toward Jaime. "He came down to guide you in
person, Sister."
Jaime silenced him with a look. "We'll split up. We'll
take three different routes."
He pulled a map out of a backpack and the men squatted
down on the ground, shining flashlights on the map.
"The convent at Mendavia is here, southeast of Logrono.
I'll head north through Valladolid, then up to Burgos." He
ran his fingers along the map and turned to Rubio, a tall,
pleasant-looking man. "You take the route to Olmedo up to
Penafiel and Aranda de Duero."
"Right, amigo."
Jaime Miró was concentrating on the map again. He looked
up at Ricardo Mellado, one of the men whose face was bruised.
"Ricardo, head for Segovia, then take the mountain route to
Cerezo de Abajo, then to Soria. We'll all meet at Logrono."
He put the map away. "Logrono is two hundred and ten
kilometers from here." He calculated silently. "We'll meet
there in seven days. Keep away from the main roads."
Felix asked, "Where in Logrono shall we meet?"
Ricardo said, "The Cirque Japon will be playing in Logrono
next week."
"Good. We'll meet there. The matinee performance."
Felix Carpio spoke up. "Who are the nuns going to travel
with?"
"We'll split them up."
It was time to put a stop to this, Lucia decided. "If the
soldiers are searching for you, senor, then we'd be safer
traveling on our own."
"But we wouldn't be, Sister," Jaime said. "You know too
much about our plans now."
"Besides," the man called Rubio added, "you wouldn't have
a chance. We know the country. We're Basques, and the people
up north are our friends. They'll help us and hide us from
the Nationalist soldiers. You'd never get to Mendavia by
yourselves."
I don't want to get to Mendavia, you idiot.
Jaime Miró was saying, grudgingly, "All right, then, let's
get moving. I want us far away from here by dawn."
Sister Megan stood quietly listening to the man who was
giving orders. He was rude and arrogant, but somehow he
seemed to radiate a reassuring sense of power.
Jaime looked over at Teresa and pointed to Tomás Sanjuro
and Rubio Arzano. "They will be responsible for you."
Sister Teresa said, "God is responsible for me."
"Sure," Jaime replied drily. "I suppose that's how you got
here in the first place."
Rubio walked over to Teresa. "Rubio Arzano at your
service, Sister. How are you called?"
"I am Sister Teresa."
Lucia spoke up quickly. "I will travel with Sister
Teresa." There was no way she was going to let them separate
her from the gold cross.
Jaime nodded. "All right." He pointed to Graciela.
"Ricardo, you'll take this one."
Ricardo Mellado nodded. "Bueno."
The woman whom Jaime had sent to reconnoiter had returned
to the group. "It's all clear," she said.
"Good." Jaime looked at Megan. "You come with us, Sister."
Megan nodded. Jaime Miró fascinated her. And there was
something intriguing about the woman. She was dark and
fierce-looking, with the hawklike features of a predator. Her
mouth was a red wound. There was something intensely sexual
about her.
The woman walked up to Megan. "I'm Amparo Jirón. Keep your
mouth shut, Sister, and there will be no trouble."
Jaime said to the others, "Let's get moving. Logrono in
seven days. Don't let the sisters out of your sight."
Sister Teresa and the man called Rubio Arzano had already
started to move down the path. Lucia hurried after them. She
had seen the map that Rubio Arzano had put in his backpack.
I'll take it, Lucia decided, when he's asleep.
Their flight across Spain began.
CHAPTER TEN
Miguel Carrillo was nervous. In fact, Miguel Carrillo was
very nervous. It had not been a wonderful day for him. What
had started so well in the morning, when he had encountered
the four nuns and convinced them that he was a friar, had
ended up with him being knocked unconscious, tied hand and
foot, and left on the floor of the dress shop.
It was the owner's wife who had discovered him. She was a
heavyset, elderly woman with a moustache and a foul temper.
She had looked down at him, trussed up on the floor, and
said, "Madre de Dios! Who are you? What are you doing here?"
Carrillo had turned on all his charm. "Thank heavens
you've come, senorita." He had never met anyone who was more
obviously a senora. "I've been trying to get out of these
straps so I could use your phone to call the police."
"You haven't answered my question."
He tried to struggle into a more comfortable position.
"The explanation is simple, senorita. I am Friar Gonzales. I
come from a monastery near Madrid. I was passing by your
beautiful store when I saw two young men breaking into it. I
felt it was my duty as a man of God to stop them. I followed
them inside hoping to persuade them of the errors of their
ways, but they overpowered me and tied me up. Now, if you
would be good enough to untie me—"
"Mierda!"
He stared at her. "I beg your pardon?"
"Who are you?"
"I told you, I'm—"
"What you are is the worst liar I've ever heard."
She walked over to the robes that the nuns had discarded.
"What are these?"
"Ah. Those, yes. The two young men were wearing them as
disguises, you see, and—"
"There are four outfits here. You said there were two
men."
"Right. The other two joined them later, and—"
She walked over to the phone.
"What are you doing?"
"Calling the police."
"That's not necessary, I assure you. As soon as you
release me, I'm going right, to the police station to make a
full report."
The woman looked down at him.
"Your robe is open, Friar."
The police were even less sympathetic than the woman had
been. Carrillo was being questioned by four members of the
Guardia Civil. Their green uniforms and eighteenth-century
black patent-leather hats were enough to inspire fear
throughout Spain, and they certainly worked their magic on
Carrillo.
"Are you aware that you answer to the exact description of
a man who murdered a priest up north?"
Carrillo sighed. "I am not surprised. I have a twin
brother, may heaven punish him. It is because of him that I
joined the monastery. Our poor mother—"
"Spare us."
A giant with a scarred face walked into the room.
"Good afternoon, Colonel Acoca."
"Is this the man?"
"Yes, Colonel. Because of the nuns' robes that we found
with him in the store, we thought you might be interested in
questioning him yourself."
Colonel Ramón Acoca walked up to the hapless Carrillo.
"Yes. I'm very interested."
Carrillo gave the colonel his most ingratiating smile.
"I'm glad you're here, Colonel. I'm on a mission for my
church, and it's very important that I get to Barcelona as
quickly as possible. As I tried to explain to these nice
gentlemen, I am a victim of circumstances simply because I
tried to be a good Samaritan."
Colonel Acoca nodded pleasantly. "Since you are in a
hurry, I will try not to waste your time."
Carrillo beamed at him. "Thank you, Colonel."
"I'm going to ask you a few simple questions. If you
answer truthfully, everything will be fine. If you lie to me,
it will be very painful for you." He slipped something into
his hand.
Carrillo said righteously, "Men of God do not lie."
"I'm very happy to hear that. Tell me about the four
nuns."
"I don't know anything about four nu—"
The fist that hit him in the mouth had brass knuckles on
it, and blood spurted across the room.
"My God! What are you doing?" Carrillo gasped.
Colonel Acoca repeated his question. "Tell me about the
four nuns."
"I don't—"
The fist slammed into Carrillo's mouth again, breaking
teeth.
Carrillo was choking on his blood. "Don't. I—"
"Tell me about the four nuns." Acoca's voice was soft and
reasonable.
"I—" He saw the fist being raised. "Yes! I—I—" The words
came tumbling out. "They were in Villacastin, running away
from their convent. Please don't hit me again."
"Go on."
"I—I told them I would help them. They needed to change
clothes."
"So you broke into the store…"
"No. I—yes. I—they stole some clothes and then they
knocked me out and left me."
"Did they say where they were headed?"
A peculiar sense of dignity suddenly took possession of
Carrillo. "No." His not mentioning Mendavia had nothing to do
with protecting the nuns. Carrillo did not give a damn about
them. It was because the colonel had ruined his face. It was
going to be very difficult to make a living after he was
released from prison.
Colonel Acoca turned to the members of the Guardia Civil.
"See what a little friendly persuasion can do? Send him to
Madrid and hold him for murder."
Lucia, Sister Teresa, Rubio Arzano, and Tomás Sanjuro
walked northwest, heading toward Olmedo, staying away from
the main roads and walking through fields of grain. They
passed flocks of sheep and goats, and the innocence of the
pastoral countryside was an ironic contrast to the grave
danger they were all in. They walked through the night, and
at dawn they headed for a secluded spot in the hills.
Rubio Arzano said, "The town of Olmedo is just ahead.
We'll stop here until nightfall. You both look as though you
could use some sleep."
Sister Teresa was physically exhausted. But something was
happening to her emotionally that was far more disturbing.
She felt she was losing touch with reality. It had begun with
the disappearance of her precious rosary. Had she lost it—or
had someone stolen it? She was not sure. It had been her
solace for more years than she could remember. How many
thousands of Hail Marys and how many Our Fathers and how many
Hail, Holy Queens? It had become a part of her, her security,
and now it was missing.
Had she lost it in the convent during the attack? And had
there really been an attack? It seemed so unreal now. She was
no longer sure what was real and what was imaginary. The baby
she had seen. Was it Monique's baby? Or was God playing
tricks on her? It was all so confusing. When she was young,
everything had been so simple. When she was young…
CHAPTER ELEVEN
Èze France
When she was only eight years old, most of the happiness
in Teresa De Fosse's life came from the church. It was like a
sacred flame drawing her to its warmth. She visited the
Chapelle des Penitents Blancs, and prayed at the cathedral in
Monaco and Notre Dame Bon Voyage in Cannes, but most
frequently she attended services at the church in Èze.
Teresa lived in a chateau on a mountain above the
medieval
village Eze near Monte Carlo, overlooking the Cote
d'Azur. The village was perched high on a rock and it seemed
to Teresa that she could look down upon the whole world.
There was a monastery at the top, with rows of houses
cascading down the side of the mountain to the blue
Mediterranean below. Monique, a year younger than Teresa, was
the beauty in the family. Even when she was a child, one
could see that she would grow up to be an exquisite woman.
She had fine-boned features, sparkling blue eyes, and an easy
self-assurance that suited her looks.
Teresa was the ugly duckling. The truth was that the De
Fosses were embarrassed by their elder daughter. If Teresa
had been conventionally ugly, they might have sent her to a
plastic surgeon and had her nose shortened, or her chin
brought forward, or her eyes fixed. But the problem was that
all of Teresa's features were just slightly askew. Everything
seemed out of place, as though she were a comedienne who had
donned her face for laughter.
But if God had cheated her in the matter of looks, He had
compensated for it by blessing her with a remarkable gift.
Teresa had the voice of an angel. It had been noticed the
first time she sang in the church choir. The parishioners
listened in astonishment to the pure, clear tones that came
from the young child. And as Teresa grew older, her voice
grew even more beautiful. She was given all the solos to sing
in church. There, she felt as though she belonged. But away
from church, Teresa was inordinately shy, self-conscious of
her appearance.
At school it was Monique who had all the friends. Boys and
girls alike flocked to her side. They wanted to play with
her, be seen with her. She was invited to all the parties.
Teresa was invited also, but always as an afterthought, the
fulfilling of a social obligation, and Teresa was painfully
aware of it.
"Now, Renee. You can't invite one of the De Fosse children
without the other. It would be bad manners."
Monique was ashamed to have an ugly sister. She felt that
it was somehow a reflection on her.
Their parents behaved properly toward their elder
daughter. They fulfilled their parental duty punctiliously,
but it was obvious that it was Monique they adored. The one
ingredient that Teresa longed for was missing: love.
She was an obedient child, willing and eager to please, a
good student who loved music, history, and foreign languages
and worked hard in school. Her teachers, the servants, and
the townspeople felt sorry for her. As a tradesman said one
day when Teresa left his shop, "God wasn't paying attention
when He made her."
The only place Teresa found love was in the church. The
priest loved her, and Jesus loved her. She went to mass every
morning and made the fourteen stations of the cross. Kneeling
in the cool, vaulted church, she felt God's presence. When
she sang there, Teresa was filled with a sense of hope, and
of expectation. She felt as though something wonderful were
about to happen to her. It was the only thing that made her
life bearable.
Teresa never confided her unhappiness to her parents or
her sister, for she did not want to burden them, and she kept
to herself the secret of how much God loved her and how much
she loved God.
Teresa adored her sister. They played together in the
estate grounds surrounding their chateau, and she let Monique
win the games they played. They went exploring together, down
the steep stone steps cut into the mountain to Èze Village
below, and wandered down the narrow streets of shops to watch
the artists in front selling their wares.
As the girls grew into their teens, the predictions of the
villagers came true. Monique grew more beautiful and the boys
came flocking around her, while Teresa had few friends and
stayed at home sewing or reading or went shopping in the
village.
As Teresa passed the drawing room one day, she heard her
mother and father having a discussion about her.
"She's going to be an old maid. We're going to have her on
our hands all our lives."
"Teresa will find someone. She has a very sweet
disposition."
"That's not what the young men of today are after. They
want someone they can enjoy having in their bed."
Teresa fled.
Teresa still sang in church on Sundays, and because of
that an event occurred that promised to change her life. In
the congregation was a Madame Neff, the aunt of a
radio-station director in Nice.
She stopped to speak to Teresa one Sunday morning.
"You're wasting your life here, my dear. You have an
extraordinary voice. You should be using it."
"I am using it. I—"
"I'm not talking about,"—she looked around the
church—"this. I'm talking about your using your voice
professionally. I pride myself on knowing talent when I hear
it. I want you to sing for my nephew. He can put you on the
radio. Are you interested?"
"I—I don't know." The very thought of it terrified Teresa.
"Talk it over with your family."
"I think it's a wonderful idea," Teresa's mother said. "It
could be a good thing for you," her father agreed. It was
Monique who had reservations about it. "You're not a
professional," she said. "You could make a fool of yourself."
Which had nothing to do with Monique's reasons for trying to
discourage her sister. What Monique was afraid of was that
Teresa would succeed. Monique was the one who had always been
in the limelight. It's not fair, she thought, that God should
have given Teresa a voice like that. What if she should
become famous? I would be left out, ignored.
And so Monique tried to persuade her sister not to
audition.
But the following Sunday at church, Madame Neff stopped
Teresa and said, "I've talked to my nephew. He is willing to
give you an audition. He's expecting you on Wednesday at
three o'clock."
And so it was that the following Wednesday a very nervous
Teresa appeared at the radio station in Nice and met the
director.
"I'm Louis Bonnet," he said curtly. "I can give you five
minutes."
Teresa's physical appearance only confirmed his worst
fears. His aunt had sent him talent before.
I should tell her to stick to her kitchen. But he knew
that he would not. The problem was that his aunt was very
rich, and he was her only heir.
Teresa followed Louis Bonnet down a narrow hallway into a
small broadcast studio.
"Have you ever sung professionally?"
"No, sir." Her blouse was soaked with perspiration. Why
did I ever let myself get talked into this? Teresa wondered.
She was in a panic, ready to flee.
Bonnet placed her in front of a microphone. "I don't have
a piano player around today, so you're going to have to sing
a cappella. Do you know what a cappella means?"
"Yes, sir."
"Wonderful." He wondered, not for the first time, if his
aunt was rich enough to make all these stupid auditions
worthwhile.
"I'll be in the control booth. You'll have time for one
song."
"Sir—what shall I—?"
He was gone. Teresa was alone in the room staring at the
microphone in front of her. She had no idea what she was
going to sing. "Just go and meet him," his aunt had said.
"The station has a musical program every Saturday evening
and…"
I've got to get out of here.
Louis's voice came out of nowhere. "I don't have all day."
"I'm sorry. I can't—"
But the director was determined to punish her for wasting
his time.
"Just a few notes," he insisted. Enough so he could report
to his aunt what a fool the girl had made of herself. Perhaps
that would persuade her to stop sending him her proteges.
"I'm waiting," he said.
He leaned back in his chair and lit a Gitane. Four more
hours to go. Yvette would be waiting for him. He would have
time to stop off at her apartment before he went home to his
wife. Maybe there would even be time to—
He heard it then, and he could not believe it. It was a
voice so pure and so sweet that it sent chills down his
spine. It was a voice filled with longing and desire, a voice
that sang of loneliness and despair, of lost loves and dead
dreams, and it brought tears to his eyes. It stirred emotions
in him that he had thought were long since dead. All he could
say to himself was, Jesus Christ! Where has she been?
An engineer had wandered into the control booth, and he
stood there listening, mesmerized. The door was open and
others began to come in, drawn by the voice. They stood there
silently listening to the poignant sound of a heart
desperately crying out for love, and there was not another
sound in the room.
When the song ended, there was a long silence, and one of
the women said, "Whoever she is, don't let her get away."
Louis Bonnet hurried out of the room into the broadcast
studio. Teresa was getting ready to leave.
"I'm sorry I took too long. You see, I've never—"
"Sit down, Maria."
"Teresa."
"Sorry." He took a deep breath. "We do a musical radio
broadcast every Saturday night."
"I know. I listen to it."
"How would you like to be on it?"
She stared at him, unable to believe what she was hearing.
"You mean—you want to hire me?"
"Beginning this week. We'll start you at the minimum. It
will be a great showcase for you."
It was almost too good to be true. They're going to pay me
to sing.
"Pay you? How much?" Monique asked.
"I don't know. I don't care." The important thing is that
somebody wants me, she almost said, but she stopped herself.
"That's wonderful news. So you're going to be on the
radio!" her father said.
Her mother was already making plans. "We'll see that all
our friends listen, and we'll have them send in letters
saying how good you are."
Teresa looked at Monique, waiting for her to say, "You
don't have to do that. Teresa is good."
But Monique said nothing. It will blow over quickly, was
what she was thinking.
She was wrong.
Saturday night at the broadcast station, Teresa was in a
panic.
"Believe me," Louis Bonnet assured her. "It's perfectly
natural. All artists go through this."
They were seated in the small green room used by
performers.
"You're going to be a sensation."
"I'm going to be sick."
"There's no time. You're on in two minutes."
Teresa had rehearsed that afternoon with the small
orchestra that was going to accompany her. The rehearsal had
been extraordinary. The stage from which they broadcast was
crowded with station personnel who had heard about the young
girl with the incredible voice. They listened in awed silence
as Teresa rehearsed the songs she was going to sing on the
air. There was no question in any of their minds but that
they were witnessing the birth of an important star.
"It's too bad she's not better-looking," a stage manager
commented, "but in radio who can tell the difference?"
Teresa's performance that evening was superb. She was
aware that she had never sung better. And who knew where this
could lead? She might become famous and have men at her feet,
begging her to marry them. As they begged Monique.
As though reading her thoughts, Monique said, "I'm really
happy for you, Sis, but don't let yourself get carried away
by all this. These things never last."
This will, Teresa thought happily. I'm finally a person.
I'm somebody.
Monday morning, there was a long-distance telephone call
for Teresa.
"It's probably somebody's idea of a joke," her father
warned her. "He says he's Jacques Raimu."
The most important stage director in France. Teresa picked
up the telephone, wary. "Hello?"
"Miss De Fosse?"
"Yes."
"Teresa De Fosse?"
"Yes."
"This is Jacques Raimu. I heard your radio program
Saturday night. You're exactly what I'm looking for."
"I—I don't understand."
"I'm staging a play at the Comedie Francaise, a musical. I
start rehearsals next week. I've been searching for someone
with a voice like yours. To tell you the truth, there is no
one with a voice like yours. Who is your agent?"
"Agent? I—I have no agent."
"Then I'll drive down there and we'll work out a deal
between us."
"Monsieur Raimu—I—I'm not very pretty." It was painful for
her to say the words, but she knew that it was necessary. He
mustn't have any false expectations.
He laughed. "You will be when I get through with you.
Theater is make-believe. Stage makeup can do all kinds of
incredible magic."
"But—"
"I'll see you tomorrow."
It was a dream on top of a fantasy. To be starring in a
play by Raimu!
"I'll work out the contract with him," Teresa's father
said. "You must be careful when you deal with theater
people."
"We must get you a new dress," her mother said. "And I'll
invite him to dinner."
Monique said nothing. What was happening was unbearable.
It was unthinkable that her sister was going to become a
star. Perhaps there was a way…
Monique saw to it that she was the first one downstairs
when Jacques Raimu arrived at the De Fosse villa that
afternoon. He was greeted by a young girl so beautiful that
his heart jumped. She was dressed in a simple white afternoon
frock that set off her figure to perfection.
My God, he thought. Those looks and that voice! She's
perfect. She's going to be an enormous star.
"I can't tell you how happy I am to meet you," Raimu said.
Monique smiled warmly. "I'm very happy to meet you. I'm a
big admirer of yours, Monsieur Raimu."
"Good. Then we'll work well together. I brought a script
with me. It's a beautiful love story, and I think—"
At that moment Teresa walked into the room. She was
wearing a new dress, but she looked awkward in it. She
stopped as she saw Jacques Raimu.
"Oh—hello. I didn't know you were here. I mean— you're
early."
He looked at Monique inquiringly.
"This is my sister," Monique said. "Teresa."
They both watched the expression on his face change. It
went from shock to disappointment to disgust.
"You're the singer?"
"Yes."
He turned to Monique. "And you're—"
Monique smiled innocently. "I'm Teresa's sister."
Raimu turned to examine Teresa again, then shook his head.
"I'm sorry," he said to Teresa. "You're too—" He fumbled for
a word. "You're too—young. If you'll excuse me, I must get
back to Paris."
And they stood there watching him walk out the door.
It worked, Monique thought jubilantly. It worked.
Teresa never made another broadcast. Louis Bonnet pleaded
with her to come back, but the hurt was too deep.
After looking at my sister, Teresa thought, how could
anyone want me? I'm so ugly.
As long as she lived, she would never forget the look on
Jacques Raimu's face.
It's my fault for having silly dreams, Teresa told
herself. It's God's way of punishing me.
After that, Teresa would sing only in church, and she
became more of a recluse than ever.
During the next ten years the beautiful Monique turned
down more than a dozen marriage proposals. She was proposed
to by the sons of the mayor, the banker, the doctor, the
merchants in the village. Her suitors ranged from young men
fresh out of school to established and successful men in
their forties and fifties. They were rich and poor, handsome
and ugly, educated and uneducated. And to all of them Monique
said non.
"What are you looking for?" her father asked, baffled.
"Papa, everyone here is boring. Èze is such an
unsophisticated place. My dream prince is in Paris."
And so her father dutifully sent her to Paris. As an
afterthought, he sent Teresa with her. The two girls stayed
at a small hotel on the Bois de Boulogne.
Each sister saw a different Paris. Monique attended
charity balls and glamorous dinner parties and had tea with
titled young men. Teresa visited Les Invalides and the
Louvre. Monique went to the races at Longchamp and to galas
at Malmaison. Teresa went to the Cathedral of Notre Dame to
pray, and walked along the tree-shaded path of the Canal St.
Martin. Monique went to Maxim's and the Moulin Rouge, while
Teresa strolled along the quays, browsing among the book
stalls and the flower vendors and stopping at the Basilica of
St. Denis. Teresa enjoyed Paris, but as far as Monique was
concerned, the trip was a failure.
When they returned home, Monique said, "I can't find any
man I want to marry."
"You met no one who interested you?" her father asked.
"Not really. There was a young man who took me to dinner
at Maxim's. His father owns coal mines."
"What was he like?" her mother asked eagerly.
"Oh, he was rich, handsome, polite, and he adored me."
"Did he ask you to marry him?"
"Every ten minutes. Finally I simply refused to see him
again."
Her mother stared at Monique in amazement. "Why?"
"Because all he could talk about was coal: bituminous
coal, lump coal, black coal, gray coal. Boring, boring,
boring."
The following year Monique decided she wanted to return to
Paris again.
"I'll pack my things," Teresa said.
Monique shook her head. "No. This time I think I'll go
alone."
So while Monique went to Paris, Teresa stayed home and
went to church every morning and prayed that her sister would
find a handsome prince. And one day the miracle occurred. A
miracle because it was to Teresa that it happened. His name
was Raoul Giradot.
He had gone to Teresa's church one Sunday and heard her
sing. He had never heard anything like it before. I must meet
her, he vowed.
Early Monday morning, Teresa stopped in at the village
general store to buy fabric for a dress she was making. Raoul
Giradot was working behind the counter.
He looked up as Teresa walked in, and his face lit up.
"The voice!"
She stared at him, flustered. "I—I beg your pardon?"
"I heard you sing in church yesterday. You are
magnificent."
He was handsome and tall, with intelligent, flashing dark
eyes and lovely, sensual lips. He was in his early thirties,
a year or two older than Teresa.
Teresa was so taken aback by his appearance that she could
only stammer. She stared at him, her heart pounding.
"Th—thank you," Teresa said."I—I—I would like three yards of
muslin, please."
Raoul smiled. "It will be my pleasure. This way."
It was suddenly difficult for Teresa to concentrate on her
errand. She was overpoweringly aware of the young man's
presence, his good looks and charm, the masculine aura
surrounding him.
When Teresa had decided on her purchase and Raoul was
wrapping it for her, she dared to say, "You're— you're new
here, aren't you?"
He looked at her and smiled, and it sent shivers through
her.
"Oui. I arrived in Èze a few days ago. My aunt owns this
shop and she needed help, so I thought I would work here for
a while."
How long is a while? Teresa found herself wondering.
"You should be singing professionally," Raoul told her.
She remembered the expression on Raimu's face when he had
seen her. No, she would never risk exposing herself publicly
again. "Thank you," Teresa mumbled.
He was touched by her embarrassment and shyness, and tried
to draw her into conversation.
"I haven't been to Èze before. It's a beautiful little
town."
"Yes," Teresa mumbled.
"Were you born here?"
"Yes."
"Do you like it?"
"Yes."
Teresa picked up her package and fled.
The following day she found an excuse to go back to the
shop again. She had stayed up half the night preparing what
she was going to say to Raoul.
I'm glad you like Èze…
The monastery was built in the fourteenth century, you
know…
Have you ever visited Saint-Paul-de-Vence? There's a
lovely chapel there…
I enjoy Monte Carlo, don't you? It's wonderful to have it
so close to here. Sometimes my sister and I drive down the
Grande Corniche and go to the Fort Antoine Theatre. Do you
know it? It's the big open-air theater…
Did you know that Nice was once called Nikaia? Oh, you
didn't? Yes, it was. The Greeks were there a long time ago.
There's a museum in Nice with the remains of cavemen who
lived there thousands of years ago. Isn't that interesting?
Teresa was prepared with dozens of such verbal gambits.
Unfortunately, the moment she walked into the shop and saw
Raoul, everything flew out of her head. She simply stared at
him, unable to speak.
"Bonjour," Raoul said cheerfully. "It's nice to see you
again, Mademoiselle De Fosse."
"M—merci." She felt like an idiot. I'm thirty years old,
she told herself, and I'm acting like a silly schoolgirl.
Stop it.
But she could not stop it.
"And what may I do for you today?"
"I—I need more muslin."
Which was the last thing she needed.
She watched Raoul as he went to get the bolt of fabric. He
set it on the counter and started to measure it out.
"How many yards would you like?"
She started to say two, but what came out was, "Are you
married?"
He looked up at her with a warm smile on his face. "No,"
he said. "I haven't been that fortunate yet."
You are going to be, Teresa thought. As soon as Monique
returns from Paris.
Monique was going to adore this man. They were perfect for
each other. The thought of Monique's reaction when she met
Raoul filled Teresa with happiness. It would be lovely to
have Raoul Giradot as her brother-in-law.
The following day as Teresa was passing the shop, Raoul
caught sight of her and hurried outside.
"Good afternoon, mademoiselle. I was about to take a
break. If you're free, would you care to join me for tea?"
"I—I—yes, thank you."
She was tongue-tied in his presence, and yet Raoul could
not have been more pleasant. He did everything he could to
put her at ease, and soon Teresa found herself telling this
stranger things she had never told anyone before. They talked
of loneliness.
"Crowds can make one lonely," Teresa said. "I always feel
like an island in a sea of people."
He smiled. "I understand."
"Oh, but you must have so many friends."
"Acquaintances. In the end, does anyone really have many
friends?"
It was as though she were speaking to a mirror image. The
hour melted away quickly, and soon it was time for him to go
back to work.
As they rose, Raoui asked, "Will you join me for lunch
tomorrow?"
He was being kind, of course. Teresa knew that no man
could ever be attracted to her. Especially someone as
wonderful as Raoul Giradot. She was sure that he was kind to
everyone.
"I would enjoy that," Teresa said.
When she went to meet Raoul the following day, he said
boyishly, "I've been given the afternoon off. If you're not
too busy, why can't we drive down to Nice?"
They drove along the Moyenne Corniche with his car top
down, the city spread out like a magic carpet below them.
Teresa leaned back in her seat and thought: I've never been
so happy. And then, filled with guilt: I'm being happy for
Monique.
Monique was to return from Paris the following day. Raoul
would be Teresa's gift to her sister. She was realistic
enough to know that the Raouls of the world were not for her.
Teresa had had enough pain in her life, and she had long
since learned what was real and what was impossible. The
handsome man seated beside her driving the car was an
impossible dream she dared not even let herself think about.
They had lunch at Le Chantecler in the Negresco Hotel in
Nice. It was a superb meal, but afterward Teresa had no
recollection of what she had eaten. It seemed to her that she
and Raoul had not stopped talking. They had so much to say to
each other. He was witty and charming, and he appeared to
find Teresa interesting—really interesting. He asked her
opinion about many things and listened attentively to her
answers. They agreed on almost everything. It was as though
they were soul mates. If Teresa had any regrets about what
was about to happen, she resolutely forced them out of her
mind.
"Would you like to come to dinner at the chateau tomorrow
night? My sister is returning from Paris. I would like you to
meet her."
"I'd be delighted, Teresa."
When Monique returned home the following day, Teresa
hurried to greet her at the door.
In spite of her resolve, she could not help asking, "Did
you meet anyone interesting in Paris?" And she held her
breath, waiting for her sister's answer.
"The same boring men," Monique replied.
So God had made the final decision.
"I've invited someone to dinner tonight," Teresa said. "I
think you're going to like him."
I must never let anyone know how much I care for him,
Teresa thought.
That evening at seven-thirty promptly, the butler ushered
Raoul Giradot into the drawing room, where Teresa, Monique,
and their parents were waiting.
"This is my mother and father. Monsieur Raoul Giradot."
"How do you do?"
Teresa took a deep breath. "And my sister, Monique."
"How do you do?" Monique's expression was polite, nothing
more.
Teresa looked at Raoul, expecting him to be stunned by
Monique's beauty.
"Enchanted." Merely courteous.
Teresa stood there holding her breath, waiting for the
sparks that she knew would start flying between them. But
Raoul was looking at Teresa.
"You look lovely tonight, Teresa."
She blushed and stammered, "Th—thank you."
Everything about that evening was topsy-turvy. Teresa's
plan to bring Monique and Raoul together, to watch them get
married, to have Raoul as a brother-in-law—none of it even
began to happen. Incredibly, Raoul's attention was focused
entirely on Teresa. It was like some impossible dream come
true. She felt like Cinderella, only she was the ugly sister
and the prince had chosen her. It was unreal, but it was
happening, and Teresa found herself struggling to resist
Raoul and his charm because she knew that it was too good to
be true, and she dreaded being hurt again. All these years
she had hidden her emotions, guarding against the pain that
came with rejection. Now, instinctively, she tried to do the
same. But Raoul was irresistible.
"I heard your daughter sing," Raoul said. "She is a
miracle!"
Teresa found herself blushing.
"Everyone loves Teresa's voice," Monique said sweetly.
It was a heady evening. But the best was yet to come.
When dinner was finished, Raoul said to Teresa's parents,
"Your grounds look lovely." Then he turned to Teresa. "Would
you show me the gardens?"
Teresa looked over at Monique, trying to read her sister's
emotions, but Monique seemed completely indifferent.
She must be deaf, dumb, and blind, Teresa thought.
And then she recalled all the times Monique had gone to
Paris and Cannes and St. Tropez looking for her perfect
prince but had never found him.
So it's not the fault of the men. It's the fault of my
sister. She has no idea what she wants.
Teresa turned to Raoul. "I would love to."
Outside, she could not let the subject drop.
"How did you like Monique?"
"She seems very nice," Raoul replied. "Ask me how I like
her sister."
And he took her in his arms and kissed her.
It was like nothing Teresa had ever experienced before.
She trembled in his arms, and she thought: Thank you, God.
Oh, thank you.
"Will you have dinner with me tomorrow night?" Raoul
asked.
"Yes," Teresa breathed. "Oh, yes."
When the two sisters were alone, Monique said, "He really
seems to like you."
"I think so," Teresa said shyly.
"Do you like him?"
"Yes."
"Well, be careful, big sister," Monique laughed. "Don't
get in over your head."
Too late, Teresa thought helplessly. Too late.
Teresa and Raoul were together every day after that.
Monique usually chaperoned them. The three of them walked
along the promenades and beaches at Nice and laughed at the
wedding-cake hotels. They lunched at a charming bistro at Cap
d'Antibes, and visited the Matisse chapel in Vence. They
dined at the Chateau de la Chevre d'Or, and at the fabulous
La Ferme St. Michel. One morning at five A.M. the three of
them went to the open farmer's market that rilled the streets
of Monte Carlo and bought fresh breads and vegetables and
fruit.
Sundays, when Teresa sang in church, Raoul and Monique
were there to listen, and afterward Raoul would hug Teresa
and say, "You really are a miracle. I could listen to you
sing for the rest of my life."
Four weeks after they met, Raoul proposed.
"I'm sure you could have any man you want, Teresa," Raoul
said, "but I would be honored if you chose me."
For one terrible moment Teresa thought he was ridiculing
her, but before she could speak, he went on.
"My darling, I must tell you that I have known many women,
but you are the most sensitive, the most talented, the
warmest…"
Each word was music to Teresa's ears. She wanted to laugh;
she wanted to cry. How blessed I am, she thought, to love and
be loved.
"Will you marry me?"
And her look was answer enough.
When Raoul left, Teresa went flying into the library where
her sister, mother, and father were having coffee.
"Raoul asked me to marry him." Her face was glowing, and
there was almost a beauty about her.
Her parents stared at her, stunned. It was Monique who
spoke.
"Teresa, are you sure he's not after the family money?"
It was like a slap in the face.
"I don't mean that unkindly," Monique went on, "but it all
seems to be happening so fast."
Teresa was determined not to let anything spoil her
happiness. "I know you want to protect me," she told her
sister, "but Raoul has money. His father left him a small
inheritance, and he's not afraid to work for a living." She
took her sister's hand in hers and begged, "Please be glad
for me, Monique. I never thought I'd know this feeling. I'm
so happy, I could die."
And then the three of them embraced her and told her how
pleased they were for her, and they began to talk excitedly
about plans for the wedding.
Very early the next morning Teresa went to church and
knelt to pray.
Thank You, Father. Thank You for giving me such happiness.
I will do everything to make myself worthy of Your love and
of Raoul's. Amen.
Teresa walked into the general store, her feet above the
ground, and said, "If you please, sir, I would like to order
some material for a wedding gown."
Raoul laughed and took her in his arms. "You're going to
make a beautiful bride."
And Teresa knew he meant it. That was the miracle.
The wedding was set to take place a month later in the
village church. Monique, of course, was to be the maid of
honor.
At five o'clock Friday afternoon, Teresa spoke to Raoul
for the last time. At twelve-thirty Saturday, standing in the
church vestry waiting for Raoul, who was thirty minutes late,
Teresa was approached by the priest. He took her arm and led
her aside, and she wondered at his agitation. Her heart began
to pound.
"What is it? Is something wrong? Has anything happened to
Raoul?"
"Oh, my dear," the priest said. "My poor, dear Teresa."
She was beginning to panic. "What is it, Father? Tell me!"
"I—I just received word a moment ago. Raoul—"
"Is it an accident? Was he hurt?"
"—Giradot left town early this morning."
"He what? Then some emergency must have come up to make
him—"
"He left with your sister. They were seen taking the train
to Paris."
The room began to whirl. No, Teresa thought. I mustn't
faint. I mustn't embarrass myself in front of God.
She had only a hazy memory of the events that followed.
From a far distance she heard the priest make an announcement
to the wedding party, and she dimly heard the uproar in the
church.
Teresa's mother put her arms around her daughter and said,
"My poor Teresa. That your own sister could be so cruel. I'm
so sorry."
But Teresa was suddenly calm. She knew how to make
everything all right.
"Don't worry, Mama. I don't blame Raoul for falling in
love with Monique. Any man would. I should have known that no
man could ever love me."
"You're wrong," her father cried. "You're worth ten of
Monique."
But his compassion came years too late.
"I would like to go home now, please."
They made their way through the crowd. The guests at the
church moved aside to let them pass, staring silently after
them.
When they returned to the chateau, Teresa said quietly,
"Please don't worry about me. I promise you that everything
is going to be fine."
Then she went up to her father's room, took out his razor,
and slashed her wrists.
CHAPTER TWELVE
When Teresa opened her eyes, the family doctor and the
village priest were standing alongside her bed.
"No!" she screamed. "I don't want to come back. Let me
die. Let me die!"
The priest said, "Suicide is a mortal sin. God gave you
life, Teresa. Only He may decide when it is finished. You are
young. You have a whole lifetime ahead of you."
"To do what?" Teresa sobbed. "Suffer more? I can't stand
the pain I'm in. I can't stand it!"
He said gently, "Jesus stood the pain and died for the
rest of us. Don't turn your back on Him."
The doctor finished examining Teresa. "You need to rest.
I've told your mother to put you on a light diet for a
while." He wagged a finger at her. "That does not include
razor blades."
The following morning Teresa dragged herself out of bed.
When she walked into the drawing room, her mother said in
alarm, "What are you doing up? The doctor told you—"
Teresa said hoarsely, "I have to go to church. I have to
talk to God."
Her mother hesitated. "I'll go with you."
"No. I must go alone."
"But—"
Her father nodded. "Let her go."
They watched the dispirited figure walk out of the house.
"What's going to happen to her?" Teresa's mother moaned.
"God only knows."
She entered the familiar church, walked up to the altar,
and knelt.
"I've come to Your house to tell You something, God. I
despise You. I despise You for letting me be born ugly. I
despise You for letting my sister be born beautiful. I
despise You for letting her take away the only man I ever
loved. I spit on You."
Her last words were so loud that people turned to stare at
her as she rose and stumbled out of the church.
Teresa had never believed there could be such pain. It was
unbearable. It was impossible for her to think of anything
else. She was unable to eat or sleep. The world seemed
muffled and far away. Memories kept flashing into her mind,
like scenes from a movie.
She remembered the day she and Raoul and Monique had
walked along the beach at Nice.
"It's a beautiful day for a swim," Raoul said.
"I'd love to go, but we can't. Teresa doesn't swim."
"I don't mind if you two go ahead. I'll wait for you at
the hotel."
And she had been so pleased that Raoul and Monique were
getting along so well together.
They were lunching at a small inn near Cagnes. The maltre
d' said, "The lobster is particularly good today."
"I'll have it," Monique said."Poor Teresa can't. Shellfish
makes her break out in hives."
St. Tropez. "I miss horseback riding. I used to ride every
morning at home. Do you want to ride with me, Teresa?"
"I—I'm afraid I don't ride, Raoul."
"I wouldn't mind going with you," Monique said. "I love to
ride."
And they had been gone all morning.
There were a hundred clues, and she had missed all of
them. She had been blind because she had wanted to be blind.
The looks that Raoul and Monique had exchanged, the innocent
touching of hands, the whispers and the laughter.
How could I have been so stupid?
At night when Teresa finally managed to doze off, she had
dreams. It was always a different dream, but it was always
the same dream.
Raoul and Monique were on a train, naked, making love, and
the train was crossing a trestle high over a canyon, and the
trestle collapsed and everyone on the train plunged to their
deaths.
Raoul and Monique were in a hotel room, naked in bed.
Raoul laid down a cigarette and the room exploded into
flames, and the two of them were burned to death, and their
screams awakened Teresa.
Raoul and Monique fell from a mountain, drowned in a
river, died in an airplane crash.
It was always a different dream.
It was always the same dream.
Teresa's mother and father were frantic. They watched
their daughter wasting away, and there was nothing they could
do to help her. And then suddenly Teresa began to eat. She
ate constantly. She could not seem to get enough food. She
gained her weight back, and then kept gaining and gaining
until her body was gross.
When her mother and father tried to talk to her about her
pain, she said, "I'm fine now. Don't worry about me."
Teresa carried on her life as though nothing were wrong.
She continued to go into town and shop and do all the errands
she had always done. She joined her mother and father for
dinner each evening and read or sewed. She had built an
emotional fortress around herself, and she was determined
that no one would ever breach it. No man will ever want to
look at me. Never again.
Outwardly, Teresa seemed fine. Inside, she was sunk in an
abyss of deep, desperate loneliness. Even when she was
surrounded by people, she sat in a lonely chair in a lonely
room, in a lonely house, in a lonely world.
A little over a year after Raoul had left Teresa, her
father was packing to leave for Ávila.
"I have some business to transact there," he told Teresa.
"But after that, I'll be free. Why don't you come with me?
Ávila is a fascinating town. It will do you good to get away
from here for a while."
"No, thank you, Father."
He looked at his wife and sighed. "Very well."
The butler walked into the drawing room.
"Excuse me, Miss De Fosse. This letter just arrived for
you."
Even before Teresa opened it, she was filled with a
prescience of something terrible looming before her.
The letter read:
Teresa, my darling Teresa:
God knows I do not have a right to call you darling, after
the terrible thing I have done, but I promise to make it up
to you if it takes me a lifetime. I don't know where to
begin.
Monique has run off and left me with our two-month-old
daughter. Frankly, I am relieved. I must confess that I have
been in hell ever since the day I left you. I will never
understand why I did what I did. I seem to have been caught
up in some kind of magic spell of Monique's, but I knew from
the beginning that my marriage to her was a terrible mistake.
It was you I always loved. I know now that the only place I
can find my happiness is at your side. By the time you
receive this letter, I will be on my way back to you.
I love you, and I have always loved you, Teresa. For the
sake of the rest of our lives together, I beg your
forgiveness. I want…
She could not finish reading the letter. The thought of
seeing Raoul again and his and Monique's baby was
unthinkable, obscene.
She threw the letter down, hysterical.
"I must get out of here," Teresa screamed. "Tonight. Now.
Please… please!"
It was impossible for her parents to calm her.
"If Raoul is coming here," her father said,"you should at
least talk to him."
"No! If I see him, I'll kill him." She grabbed her
father's arms, tears streaming down her face. "Take me with
you," she pleaded.
She would go anywhere, as long as she escaped from this
place.
And so that evening Teresa and her father set out for
Ávila.
Teresa's father was distraught over his daughter's
unhappiness. He was not by nature a compassionate man, but in
the past year Teresa had won his admiration with her
courageous behavior. She had faced the townspeople with her
head held high and had never complained. He felt helpless,
unable to console her.
He remembered how much solace she had once found in
church, and when they arrived in Ávila he said to Teresa,
"Father Berrendo, the priest here, is an old friend of mine.
Perhaps he can help you. Will you speak to him?"
"No." She would have nothing to do with God.
Teresa stayed in the hotel room alone while her father
conducted his business. When he returned, she was seated in
the same chair, staring at the walls.
"Teresa, please see Father Berrendo."
"No."
He was at a loss. She refused to leave the hotel room, and
she refused to return to Èze.
As a last resort, the priest came to see Teresa.
"Your father tells me that you once attended church
regularly."
Teresa looked into the eyes of the frail-looking priest
and said coldly, "I'm no longer interested. The Church has
nothing to offer me."
Father Berrendo smiled. "The Church has something to offer
everyone, my child. The Church gives us hope and dreams…"
"I've had my fill of dreams. Never again."
He took her hands in his thin hands and saw the white
scars of razor slashes on her wrists, as faint as a long-ago
memory.
"God doesn't believe that. Talk to Him and He will tell
you."
Teresa just sat there, staring at the wall, and when the
priest finally made his way out of the room, she was not even
aware of it.
The following morning Teresa walked into the cool, vaulted
church, and almost immediately the old, familiar feeling of
peace stole over her. The last time she had been in a church
was to curse God. A feeling of deep shame filled her. It was
her own weakness that had betrayed her, not God.
"Forgive me," she whispered. "I have sinned. I have lived
in hate. Help me. Please help me."
She looked up, and Father Berrendo was standing there.
When she finished, he led her into his office behind the
vestry.
"I don't know what to do, Father. I don't believe in
anything anymore. I've lost faith." Her voice was filled with
despair.
"Did you have faith when you were a young girl?"
"Yes. Very much."
"Then you still have it, my child. Faith is real and
permanent. It is everything else that is transient."
They talked that day for hours.
When Teresa returned to the hotel late in the afternoon,
her father said, "I must get back to Èze. Are you ready to
leave?"
"No, Papa. Let me stay here for a while."
He hesitated. "Will you be all right?"
"Yes, Father. I promise."
Teresa and Father Berrendo met every day after that. The
priest's heart went out to Teresa. He saw in her not a fat,
unattractive woman, but a beautiful, unhappy spirit. They
spoke of God and creation and the meaning of life, and
slowly, almost in spite of herself, Teresa began to find
comfort again. Something that Father Berrendo said one day
triggered a deep response in her.
"My child, if you do not believe in this world, then
believe in the next world. Believe in the world where Jesus
is waiting to receive you."
And for the first time since the day that was supposed to
have been her wedding day, Teresa began to feel at peace
again. The church had become her haven, just as it had once
been. But there was her future to think about.
"I have no place to go."
"You could return home."
"No. I could never go back there. I could never face Raoul
again. I don't know what to do. I want to hide, and there is
no place to hide."
Father Berrendo was silent for a long time. Finally he
spoke. "You could stay here."
She looked around the office, puzzled. "Here?"
"The Cistercian convent is nearby." He leaned forward.
"Let me tell you about it. It is a world inside a world,
where everyone is dedicated to God. It is a place of peace
and serenity."
And Teresa's heart began to lift. "It sounds wonderful."
"I must caution you. It is one of the strictest orders in
the world. Those who are admitted take a vow of chastity,
silence, and obedience. No one who enters there ever leaves."
The words sent a thrill through Teresa. "I will never want
to leave. It is what I have been searching for, Father. I
despise the world I live in."
But Father Berrendo was still concerned. He knew that
Teresa would be facing a life totally different from anything
she had ever experienced.
"There can be no turning back."
"I won't turn back."
Early the next day, Father Berrendo took Teresa to the
convent to meet the Reverend Mother Betina. He left the two
of them there to talk.
The moment Teresa entered the convent, she knew. At last,
she thought exultantly. At last.
After the meeting she eagerly telephoned her mother and
father.
"I've been so worried," her mother said. "When are you
coming home?"
"I am home."
The bishop of Ávila performed the rite:
"Creator, Lord, send thy benediction upon thy handmaid
that she shall be fortified with celestial virtue, that she
may maintain complete faith and unbroken fidelity."
Teresa responded, "The kingdom of this world and all
secular adornings I have despised for the love of our Lord,
Jesus Christ."
The bishop made the sign of the cross over her.
"De largitatis tuae fonte deflux it ut cum honorem
nuptiarum nulla interdicta minuissent ac super sanctum
conjugium nuptialis benedictio permaneret existerent
conubium, concupiscerent sacr amentum, nee imitarentur quod
nuptüs agitur, sed diligerent quod nuptüs praenotatur. Amen."
"Amen."
"I espouse thee to Jesus Christ, the son of the Supreme
Father. Therefore receive the seal of the Holy Ghost, so that
thou be called the spouse of God, and if thou serve him
faithfully, be crowned everlastingly." The bishop rose. "God,
the Father Almighty, Creator of heaven and earth, who hath
vouchsafed to choose you to an espousaiship like that of the
blessed Mary, mother of our Lord, Jesus Christ—ad beatae
Mariae, matris Domini nostri, Jesu Christi, consortium—hallow
you, that in the presence of God and of His angels, you may
persevere, untouched and undefiled, and hold to your purpose,
love, chastity, and keep patience that you may merit to
receive the crown of His blessing, through the same Christ
our Lord. God make you strong when frail, strengthen you when
weak, relieve and govern your mind with piety, and direct
your ways. Amen."
Now, thirty years later, lying in the woods watching the
sun come up over the horizon, Sister Teresa thought: I came
to the convent for all the wrong reasons. I was not running
to God. I was running away from the world. But God read my
heart.
She was sixty years old, and the last thirty years of her
life had been the happiest she had ever known. Now she had
suddenly been flung back into the world she had run away
from. And her mind was playing strange tricks on her.
She was no longer sure what was real and what was unreal.
The past and the present seemed to be blending together in a
strange, dizzying blur. Why is this happening to me? What
does God have planned for me?
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
For Sister Megan, the journey was an adventure. She had
gotten used to the new sights and sounds that surrounded her,
and the speed with which she had adapted surprised her.
She found her companions fascinating. Amparo Jirón was a
powerful woman, easily able to keep up with the two men, and
yet at the same time she was very feminine.
Felix Carpio, the husky man with a reddish beard and a
scar, seemed amiable and pleasant.
But to Megan, the most compelling of the group was Jaime
Miró. There was a relentless strength about him, an
unshakable faith in his beliefs that reminded Megan of the
nuns in the convent.
When they began the journey, Jaime, Amparo, and Felix were
carrying sleeping bags and rifles on their shoulders.
"Let me carry one of the sleeping bags," Megan suggested.
Jaime Miró had looked at her in surprise, then shrugged.
"All right, Sister."
He handed her the bag. It was heavier than Megan had
expected, but she did not complain. As long as I'm with them,
I'm going to do my share.
It seemed to Megan that they had been walking forever,
stumbling through the darkness, getting hit by branches,
scratched by underbrush, attacked by insects, guided only by
the light of the moon.
Who are these people? Megan wondered. And why are they
being hunted? Because Megan and the other nuns were also
being pursued, she felt a strong rapport with her new
companions.
There was little talking, but from time to time they held
cryptic conversations.
"Is everything set at Valladolid?"
"Right, Jaime. Rubio and Tomás will meet us at the bank
during the bullfight."
"Good. Send word to Largo Cortez to expect us. But don't
give him a date."
"Comprendo."
Who are Largo Cortez and Rubio and Tomás? Megan wondered.
And what was going to happen at the bullfight and the bank?
She almost started to ask, but thought better of it. I have a
feeling they wouldn't welcome a lot of questions.
Near dawn they smelled smoke from the valley below them.
"Wait here," Jaime whispered. "Be quiet."
They watched as he made his way toward the edge of the
forest and disappeared from sight.
Megan said, "What is it?"
"Shut up!" Amparo Jirón hissed.
Fifteen minutes later Jaime Miró returned.
"Soldiers. We'll circle around them."
They backtracked for half a mile, then moved cautiously
through the woods until they reached a side road. The
countryside stretched out ahead of them, redolent with the
odors of mowed hay and ripe fruit.
Megan's curiosity got the better of her. "Why are the
soldiers looking for you?" she asked.
Jaime said, "Let's say we don't see eye to eye."
And she had to be satisfied with that. For now, she
thought. She was determined to know more about this man.
Half an hour later, when they reached a sheltered
clearing, Jaime said, "The sun's up. We'll stay here until
nightfall." He looked at Megan. "Tonight we're going to have
to travel faster."
She nodded. "Very well."
Jaime took the sleeping bags and rolled them out.
Felix Carpio said to Megan, "You take mine, Sister. I'm
used to sleeping on the ground."
"It's yours," Megan said. "I couldn't—"
"For Christ's sake," Amparo snapped. "Get in the bag. We
don't want you to keep us up screaming about goddamned
spiders." There was an animosity in her tone that Megan did
not understand.
Without another word, Megan climbed into the sleeping bag.
What's bothering her? she wondered.
Megan watched as Jaime unrolled his sleeping bag a few
feet away from where she lay, then crawled into it. Amparo
Jirón crawled in beside him. I see, Megan thought. Jaime
looked over at Megan. "You'd better get some sleep," he said.
"We have a long way ahead of us."
Megan was awakened by a moaning. It sounded as though
someone were in terrible pain. She sat up, concerned. The
sounds were coming from Jaime's sleeping bag. He must be
terribly ill, was her first thought.
The moaning was getting louder, and then Megan heard
Amparo Jirón's voice saying, "Oh, yes, yes. Give it to me,
querido. Harder! Yes! Now! Now!"
And Megan's face flushed. She tried to close her ears to
the sounds she was hearing, but it was impossible. And she
wondered what it would be like to have Jaime Miró make love
to her.
Instantly Megan crossed herself and began to pray:
Forgive
me, Father. Let my thoughts be filled only with You.
Let my spirit seek You that it may find its source and good
in You.
And the sounds went on. Finally, when Megan thought she
would be unable to bear it an instant longer, they stopped.
But there were other noises keeping her awake. The sounds of
the forest ricocheted around her. There was a cacophony of
mating birds and crickets and the chattering of small animals
and the guttural growlings of larger ones. Megan had
forgotten how noisy the outside world could be. She missed
the wonderful silence of the convent. To her own
astonishment, she even missed the orphanage. The terrible,
wonderful orphanage…
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
Ávila
They called her "Megan the Terror." They called her "Megan
the Blue-eyed Devil." They called her "Megan the Impossible."
She was ten years old.
She had been brought to the orphanage when she was an
infant, having been left on the doorstep of a farmer and his
wife who were unable to care for her.
The orphanage was an austere, two-story, whitewashed
building on the outskirts of Ávila, in the poorer section of
the city, off the Plaza de San Vicente. It was run by
Mercedes Angeles, an Amazon of a woman with a fierce manner
that belied the warmth she felt toward her wards.
Megan looked different from the other children, an alien
with blond hair and bright blue eyes, standing out in stark
contrast to the dark-eyed, dark-haired children. But from the
beginning, Megan was different in other ways as well. She was
a fiercely independent child, a leader, a mischief-maker.
Whenever there was trouble at the orphanage, Mercedes Angeles
could be certain that Megan was at the bottom of it.
Over the years, Megan led riots protesting the food, she
tried to form the children into a union, and she found
inventive ways to torment the supervisors, including half a
dozen escape attempts. Needless to say, Megan was immensely
popular with the other children. She was younger than many of
them, but they all turned to her for guidance. She was a
natural leader. And the younger children loved to have Megan
tell them stories. She had a wild imagination.
"Who were my parents, Megan?"
"Ah. Your father was a clever jewel thief. He climbed over
the roof of a hotel in the middle of the night to steal a
diamond belonging to a famous actress. Well, just as he was
putting the diamond in his pocket, the actress woke up. She
turned on the light and saw him."
"Did she have him arrested?"
"No. He was very handsome."
"What happened, then?"
"They fell in love and got married. Then you were born."
"But why did they send me to an orphanage? Didn't they
love me?"
That was always the difficult part. "Of course they loved
you. But—well—they were skiing in Switzerland and they were
killed in a terrible avalanche—"
"What's a terrible avalanche?"
"That's when a bunch of snow comes down all at once and
buries you."
"And my mother and father both died?"
"Yes. And their last words were that they loved you. But
there was no one to take care of you, so you were sent here."
Megan was as anxious as the others to know who her parents
were, and at night she would put herself to sleep by making
up stories to herself: My father was a soldier in the Civil
War. He was a captain and very brave. He was wounded in
battle, and my mother was the nurse who took care of him.
They married, and he went back to the front and was killed.
My mother was too poor to keep me, so she had to leave me at
the farmhouse, and it broke her heart. And she would weep
with pity for her courageous dead father and her bereaved
mother.
Or: My father was a bullfighter. He was one of the great
matadors. He was the toast of Spain. Everyone adored him. My
mother was a beautiful flamenco dancer. They were married,
but he was killed one day by a huge, dangerous bull. My
mother was forced to give me up.
Or: My father was a clever spy from another country…
The fantasies were endless.
There were thirty children in the orphanage, ranging from
abandoned newborn infants to fourteen-year-olds. Most of them
were Spanish, but there were children there from half a dozen
countries, and Megan became fluent in several languages. She
slept in a dormitory with a dozen other girls. There were
late-night whispered conversations about dolls and clothes,
and as the girls grew older, about sex. It soon became the
primary topic of conversation.
"I hear it hurts a lot."
"I don't care. I can't wait to do it."
"I'm gonna get married, but I'm never going to let my
husband do it to me. I think it's dirty."
One night, when everyone was asleep, Primo Condé, one of
the young boys at the orphanage, crept into the girls'
dormitory. He moved to the side of Megan's bed.
"Megan…" His voice was a whisper.
She was instantly awake. "Primo? What's the matter?"
He was sobbing, frightened. "Can I get into bed with you?"
"Yes. Be quiet."
Primo was thirteen, the same age as Megan, but he was
small for his age, and he had been an abused child. He
suffered from terrible nightmares and would wake up in the
middle of the night screaming. The other children tormented
him, but Megan always protected him.
Primo climbed into bed beside her, and Megan felt the
tears running down his cheeks. She held him close in her
arms.
"It's all right," she whispered. "It's all right."
She rocked him gently and his sobs subsided. His body was
pressed against hers, and she could feel his growing
excitement.
"Primo…"
"I'm sorry. I—I can't help it."
His erection was pressing into her.
"I love you, Megan. You're the only one I care about in
the whole world."
"You haven't been out in the world yet."
"Please don't laugh at me."
"I'm not."
"I have no one but you."
"I know."
"I love you."
"I love you too, Primo."
"Megan—would you—let me make love to you? Please."
"No."
There was silence. "I'm sorry I bothered you. I'll go back
to my bed." His voice was filled with pain. He started to
move away.
"Wait." Megan held him close to her, wanting to ease his
suffering, feeling aroused herself. "Primo, I—I can't let you
make love to me, but I can do something to make you feel
better. Will that be all right?"
"Yes." His voice was a murmur.
He was wearing pajamas. Megan pulled the cord that held
his pajama bottom up and reached inside. He's a man, Megan
thought. She held him gently in her hand and began to stroke
him.
Primo groaned and said, "Oh, that feels wonderful," and a
moment later said, "God, I love you, Megan."
Her body was on fire, and if at that moment he had said "I
want to make love to you," she would have said yes.
But he lay there, silent, and in a few minutes he returned
to his own bed.
There was no sleep for Megan that night. And she never
allowed him to come into her bed again.
The temptation was too great.
From time to time a child would be called into the
supervisor's office to meet a prospective foster parent. It
was always a moment of great excitement for the children, for
it would mean a chance to escape from the dreary routine of
the orphanage, a chance to have a real home, to belong to
someone.
Over the years Megan watched as other orphans were chosen.
They went to the homes of merchants, farmers, bankers,
shopkeepers. But it was always the other children, never her.
Megan's reputation preceded her. She would hear the
prospective parents talk among themselves.
"She's a very pretty child, but I hear she's difficult."
"Isn't she the one who smuggled twelve dogs into the
orphanage last month?"
"They say she's a ringleader. I'm afraid she wouldn't get
along with our children."
They had no idea how much the other children adored Megan.
Father Berrendo came to the orphanage once a week to visit
the wards, and Megan looked forward to his visits. She was an
omnivorous reader, and the priest and Mercedes Angeles saw to
it that she was well supplied with books. She could discuss
things with the priest that she dared not talk about with
anyone else. It was Father Berrendo to whom the farm couple
had turned over the infant Megan.
"Why didn't they want to keep me?" Megan asked.
The old priest said gently, "They wanted to very much,
Megan, but they were old and ill."
"Why do you suppose my real parents left me at that farm?"
"I'm sure it was because they were poor and couldn't
afford to keep you."
As Megan grew up, she became more and more devout. She was
stirred by the intellectual aspects of the Catholic Church.
She read St. Augustine's Confessions, the writings of St.
Francis of Assisi, Thomas More, Thomas Merton, and a dozen
others. Megan went to church regularly, and she enjoyed the
solemn rituals, mass, receiving communion, Benediction.
Perhaps most of all, she loved the wonderful feeling of
serenity that always stole over her in church.
"I want to become a Catholic," Megan told Father Berrendo
one day.
He took her hand in his and said with a twinkle, "Perhaps
you are already, Megan, but we'll hedge our bets."
"Dost thou believe in God the Father Almighty, creator of
heaven and earth?"
"Yes, I believe!"
"Dost thou believe in Jesus Christ, His only son, who was
born and suffered?"
"Yes, I believe!"
"Dost thou believe in the Holy Spirit, in the Holy
Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the remission of
sins, the resurrection of the body and eternal life?"
"Yes, I believe!"
The priest blew gently into her face. "Exi ab ea, spiritus
immunde. Depart from her, thou impure spirit, and give place
to the Holy Spirit, the Paraclete." He breathed again into
her face. "Megan, receive the good Spirit through this
breathing and receive the blessing of God. Peace be with
thee."
At fifteen Megan had become a beautiful young woman, with
long blond hair and a milky complexion that set her off even
more from most of her companions.
One day she was summoned to the office of Mercedes
Angeles. Father Berrendo was there.
"Hello, Father."
"Hello, my dear Megan."
Mercedes Angeles said, "I'm afraid we have a problem,
Megan."
"Oh?" She wracked her brain, trying to remember her latest
misdeed.
The headmistress went on: "There is an age limit here of
fifteen, and you've reached your fifteenth birthday."
Megan had long known of the rule, of course. But she had
put it in the back of her mind, because she did not want to
face the fact that she had nowhere in the world to go, that
no one wanted her, and that she was going to be abandoned
once again.
"Do I—do I have to leave?"
The kindly Amazon was upset, but she had no choice. "I'm
afraid we must abide by the rules. We can find a position for
you as a maid."
Megan had no words.
Father Berrendo spoke. "Where would you like to go?"
As she thought about it, an idea came to Megan. There was
somewhere for her to go.
From the time Megan was twelve years old, she had helped
earn her keep at the orphanage by making outside deliveries
in town, and many of them were made to the Cistercian
convent. They were always delivered to the Reverend Mother
Betina. Megan had sneaked glimpses of the nuns while they
were praying or walking through the halls, and she had sensed
in them an almost overpowering feeling of serenity. She had
envied the joy that the nuns seemed to radiate. To Megan, the
convent seemed a house of love.
The Reverend Mother had taken a liking to the bright young
girl, and they had had long talks over the years.
"Why do people join convents?" Megan had once asked.
"People come to us for many reasons. Most come to dedicate
themselves to God. But some come because they have no hope.
We give them hope. Some come because they feel they have no
reason to live. We show them that God is the reason. Some
come because they are running away. Others come here because
they feel alienated and they want to belong."
That was what had struck a responsive chord in the young
girl. I've never really belonged to anyone, Megan thought.
This is my chance.
"I think I would like to join the convent."
Six weeks later, she took her vows.
And finally Megan found what she had been searching for
for so long. She belonged. These were her sisters, the family
she never had, and they were all one under their Father.
Megan worked in the convent as a bookkeeper. She was
fascinated by the ancient sign language that the sisters used
when they needed to communicate with the Reverend Mother.
There were 472 signs, enough to convey among themselves
everything they needed to express.
When it was a sister's turn to dust the long halls,
Prioress Betina held out her right hand with the heel forward
and blew on the back of it. If a nun had a fever, she went to
the Reverend Mother and pressed the tips of her right
forefinger and middle finger on the outside of her left
wrist. If a request was to be delayed, Prioress Betina held
her right fist before her right shoulder and pushed it
slightly forward and down. Tomorrow.
One November morning, Megan was introduced to the rites of
death. A nun was dying, and a wooden rattle was rung in the
cloister, the signal for the beginning of a ritual unchanged
since the year 1030. All those who could answer the call
hurried to kneel in the infirmary for the anointing and the
psalms. They silently prayed for the saints to intercede for
the departing sister's soul. To signify that it was time for
the last sacraments to be given, the Mother Prioress held out
her left hand with the palm up and drew a cross on it with
the tip of her right thumb.
And finally, there was the sign of death itself, a sister
placing the tip of her right thumb under her chin and raising
it slightly.
When the last prayers had been said, the body was left
alone for an hour so that the soul could go in peace. At the
foot of the bed the great Paschal candle, the Christian
symbol of eternal light, burned in its wooden holder.
The infirmarian washed the body and clothed the dead nun
in her habit, black scapular over white cowl, rough
stockings, and handmade sandals. From the garden one of the
nuns brought fresh flowers woven into a crown. When the dead
woman was dressed, six of the nuns in a procession carried
her to the church and placed her on the whitesheeted bier
facing the altar. She would not be left alone before God, and
in their stalls by her side, two nuns stayed through the rest
of the day and night praying, while the Paschal candle
flickered at her side.
The next afternoon, after the Requiem mass, she was
carried through the cloister by the nuns to the private,
walled cemetery where even in death the nuns kept their
enclosure. The sisters, three and three, lowered her
carefully into the grave, supported on white bands of linen.
It was the Cistercian custom for the dead to lie uncovered in
the earth, buried without a coffin. As the last service they
performed for their sister, two nuns started to drop soil
softly onto her still body before they all returned to the
church to say the psalms of penance. Three times they begged
that God have mercy on her soul:
Domine miserere super peccatrice.
Domine miserere super peccatrice.
Domine miserere super peccatrice.
There were often times when young Megan was filled with
melancholy. The convent gave her serenity, and yet she was
not completely at peace. It was as though a part of her were
missing. She felt longings that she should have long ago
forgotten. She found herself thinking about the friends she
had left behind in the orphanage, and wondering what had
happened to them. And she wondered what was happening in the
outside world, the world that she had renounced, a world
where there was music and dancing and laughter.
Megan went to Sister Betina.
"It happens to all of us from time to time," she assured
Megan. "The church calls it acedia. It is a spiritual
malaise, an instrument of Satan. Do not worry about it,
child. It will pass."
And it did.
But what did not pass was the bone-deep longing to know
who her parents were. I'll never know, Megan thought
despairingly. Not as long as I live.
CHAPTER Fifteen
New York City
The reporters gathered outside the gray fagade of New
York's Waldorf-Astoria Hotel watched the parade of
celebrities in evening dress alight from their limousines,
enter the revolving doors, and head for the Grand Ballroom on
the third floor. The guests had come from around the world.
Cameras flashed as reporters called out, "Mr.
Vice-President, would you look this way, please?"
"Governor Adams, could I have one more picture, please?"
There were senators and representatives from several
foreign countries, business tycoons, and celebrities. And
they were all there to celebrate Ellen Scott's sixtieth
birthday. In truth, it was not so much Ellen Scott that they
were honoring as the philanthropy of Scott Industries, one of
the most powerful conglomerates in the world. The huge,
sprawling empire included oil companies and steel mills,
communications systems and banks. All the money raised this
evening would go to international charities.
Scott Industries had interests in every part of the world.
Twenty-seven years earlier, its president, Milo Scott, had
died unexpectedly of a heart attack, and his wife, Ellen, had
taken over the management of the huge conglomerate. In the
ensuing years she proved to be a brilliant executive, more
than tripling the assets of the company.
The Grand Ballroom of the Waldorf-Astoria was an enormous
room decorated in beige and gold, with a red-carpeted stage
at one end. A balcony holding thirty-three boxes with a
chandelier over each one curved around the entire room.
In the center of the balcony sat the guest of honor. There
were at least six hundred men and women present, dining at
tables gleaming with silver.
When dinner was finished, the governor of New York strode
onto the stage.
"Mr. Vice-President, ladies and gentlemen, honored guests,
we are all here tonight for one purpose: to pay tribute to a
remarkable woman and to her unselfish generosity over the
years. Ellen Scott is the kind of person who could have made
a success in any field. She would have been a great scientist
or doctor. She would also have made a great politician, and I
must tell you that if Ellen Scott decides to run for
president of the United States, I'll be the first one to vote
for her. Not in the next election, of course, but the one
after that."
There was laughter and applause.
"But Ellen Scott is much more than just a brilliant woman.
She is a charitable, compassionate human being who never
hesitates to get involved in the problems that face the world
today…"
The speech went on for ten more minutes, but Ellen Scott
was no longer listening. How wrong he is, she thought wryly.
How wrong they all are. Scott Industries isn't even my
company. Milo and I stole it. And I'm guilty of a far greater
crime than that. It doesn't matter any longer. Not now.
Because I'll be dead soon.
She remembered the doctor's exact words as he read the lab
report that was her death sentence.
"I'm dreadfully sorry, Mrs. Scott, but I'm afraid there's
no way to break this to you gently. The cancer has spread
throughout your lymphatic system. It's inoperable."
She had felt the sudden leaden weight in her stomach.
"How… how long do I have?"
He hesitated. "A year—maybe."
Not enough time. Not with so much still to do. "You will
say nothing of this, of course." Her voice was steady.
"Certainly not."
"Thank you, Doctor."
She had no recollection of leaving Columbia-Presbyterian
Medical Center or of the drive downtown. Her only thought
was: I must find her before I die.
Now the governor's speech was over.
"Ladies and gentlemen, it is my honor and privilege to
introduce Mrs. Ellen Scott."
She rose to a standing ovation, then walked toward the
stage, a thin, gray-haired, straight-backed woman, smartly
dressed and projecting a vitality she no longer felt. Looking
at me is like seeing the distant light of a long-dead star,
she thought bitterly. I'm not really here anymore.
On the stage she waited for the applause to die down.
They're applauding a monster. What would they do if they
knew? When she spoke, her voice was firm.
"Mr. Vice-President, senators, Governor Adams…"
A year, she was thinking. I wonder where she is and if she
is still alive. I must find out.
She talked on, automatically saying all the things her
audience expected to hear. "I gladly accept this tribute not
for myself, but for all those who have worked so hard to
lighten the burden of those who are less fortunate than we
are…"
Her mind was drifting back forty-two years to Gary,
Indiana…
At eighteen, Ellen Dudash was employed at the Scott
Industries automotive-parts plant in Gary, Indiana. She was
an attractive, outgoing girl, popular with her fellow
workers. On the day Milo Scott came to inspect the plant,
Ellen was selected to escort him around.
"Hey! How about you, Ellie? Maybe you'll marry the boss's
brother and we'll all be working for you."
Ellen Dudash laughed. "Right. And that's when pigs will
grow wings."
Milo Scott was not at all what Ellen had expected. He was
in his early thirties, tall and slim. Not bad-looking, Ellen
thought. He was shy and almost deferential.
"It's very kind of you to take the time to show me around,
Miss Dudash. I hope I'm not taking you away from your work."
She grinned. "I hope you are."
He was so easy to talk to.
I can't believe I'm kidding around with the big boss's
brother. Wait till I tell Mom and Pop about this.
Milo seemed genuinely interested in the workers and their
problems. Ellen took him through the department where the
round drive gears and the long driven gears were made. She
showed him through the annealing room, where the soft gears
were put through a hardening process, and the packing section
and the shipping department, and he seemed properly
impressed.
"It's certainly a large operation, isn't it, Miss Dudash?"
He owns all of this, and he acts like an awed kid. I guess
it takes all kinds.
It was in the assembly section that the accident happened.
An overhead cable car carrying metal bars to the machine shop
snapped and a load of iron came tumbling down. Milo Scott was
directly beneath it. Ellen saw it coming a fraction of a
second before it hit and, without thinking, shoved him out of
harm's way. Two of the heavy iron bars hit her before she
could escape, and she was knocked unconscious.
She awakened in a private suite in a hospital. The room
was literally filled with flowers. When Ellen opened her eyes
and looked around, she thought: I've died and gone to heaven.
There were orchids and roses and lilies and chrysanthemums
and rare blooms she could not even begin to identify.
Her right arm was in a cast and her ribs were taped and
felt bruised.
A nurse came in. "Ah, you're awake, Miss Dudash. I'll
inform the doctor."
"Where—where am I?"
"Blake Center—it's a private hospital."
Ellen looked around the large suite. I can never afford to
pay for all this.
"We've been screening your calls."
"What calls?"
"The press has been trying to get in to interview you.
Your friends have been calling. Mr. Scott has telephoned
several times…"
Milo Scott! "Is he all right?"
"I beg your pardon?"
"Was he hurt in the accident?"
"No. He was here again early this morning, but you were
asleep."
"He came to see me?"
"Yes." She looked around the room. "Most of these flowers
are from him."
Unbelievable.
"Your mother and father are in the waiting room. Do you
feel up to seeing them now?"
"Of course."
"I'll send them in."
Boy, I've never been treated like this in a hospital
before, Ellen thought.
Her mother and father walked in and came up to the bed.
They had been born in Poland and their English was tentative.
Ellen's father was a mechanic, a burly, rough-hewn man in his
fifties, and her mother was a bluff northern European
peasant.
"I brought you some soup, Ellen."
"Mom—they feed people in hospitals."
"Not my soup they don't feed you in the hospital. Eat it
and you'll get well faster."
Her father said, "Did you see the paper? I brung you a
copy."
He handed the newspaper to her. The headline read:
FACTORY WORKER RISKS LIFE TO SAVE BOSS.
She read the story twice.
"That was a brave thing you done to save him."
Brave? It was stupid. If I had had time to think, I would
have saved myself. That was the dumbest thing I ever did.
Why, I could have been killed!
Milo Scott came to see Ellen later that morning. He was
carrying another bouquet of flowers.
"These are for you," he said awkwardly. "The doctor tells
me you're going to be fine. I—I can't tell you how grateful I
am to you."
"It was nothing."
"It was the most courageous act I've ever seen. You saved
my life."
She tried to move, but it sent a sharp pain through her
arm.
"Are you all right?"
"Sure." Her side was beginning to throb. "What did the doc
say was wrong with me?"
"You have a broken arm and three broken ribs."
He couldn't have given her worse news. Her eyes filled
with tears.
"What's the matter?"
How could she tell him? He would only laugh at her. She
had been saving up for a long-awaited vacation to New York
with some of the girls from the factory. It had been her
dream. Now I'll be out of work for a month or more. There
goes Manhattan.
Ellen had been working since she was fifteen. She had
always been fiercely independent and self-sufficient, but now
she thought: Maybe if he's so grateful he'll pay part of my
hospital bills. But I'll be damned if I'll ask him.
She was beginning to feel drowsy. It must be the
medication.
She said sleepily, "Thank you for all the flowers, Mr.
Scott. And it was nice meeting you." I'll worry about the
hospital bills later.
Ellen Dudash slept.
The following morning, a tall, distinguished-looking man
came into Ellen's suite.
"Good morning, Miss Dudash. How are you feeling this
morning?"
"Better, thank you."
"I'm Sam Norton, chief public-relations officer for Scott
Industries."
"Oh." She had never seen him before. "Do you live here?"
"No. I flew in from Washington."
"To see me?"
"To assist you."
"To assist me in what!"
"The press is outside, Miss Dudash. Since I don't believe
you've ever held a press conference, I thought perhaps you
could use some help."
"What do you want?"
"Mainly, they're going to ask you to tell them about how
and why you saved Mr. Scott."
"Oh. That's easy. If I had stopped to think, I'd have run
like hell."
Norton stared at her. "Miss Dudash—I don't think I would
say that if I were you."
"Why not? It's the truth."
This was not at all what he had expected. The girl seemed
to have no idea of her situation.
There was something worrying Ellen, and she decided to get
it out in the open. "Are you going to see Mr. Scott?"
"Yes."
"Would you do me a favor?"
"If I can, certainly."
"I know the accident's not his fault, and he didn't ask me
to push him out of the way, but—" The strong independent
streak in her made her hesitate. "Oh, never mind."
Ah, here it comes, Norton thought. How much reward was she
going to try to extort? Would it be cash? A better job? What?
"Please, go on, Miss Dudash."
She blurted it out. "The truth is, I don't have a lot of
money, and I'm going to lose some pay because of this, and I
don't think I can afford all these hospital bills. I don't
want to bother Mr. Scott, but if he could arrange a loan for
me, I'd pay it back." She saw the expression on Norton's
face, and misread it. "I'm sorry. I guess I sound mercenary.
It's just that I've been saving up for a trip, and—well, this
screws everything up." She took a deep breath. "It's not his
problem. I'll manage."
Sam Norton almost kissed her. How long has it been since
I've come across real innocence? It's, enough to restore my
faith in womankind.
He sat down at the side of her bed, and his professional
manner disappeared. He took her hand. "Ellen, I have a
feeling you and I are going to be great friends. I promise
you, you're not going to have to worry about money. But the
first thing we have to do is get you through this press
conference. We want you to come out of this looking good, so
that—" He stopped himself. "I'm going to be honest. My job is
to see that Scott Industries comes out of this looking good.
Do you understand?"
"I guess so. You mean it wouldn't sound so good if I said
I wasn't really interested in saving Milo Scott? It would
sound better if I said something like, 'I like working for
Scott Industries so much that when I saw Milo Scott was in
danger, I knew I had to try to save him, even at the risk of
my own life'?"
"Yes."
She laughed. "Okay. If it'll help you. But I don't want to
kid you, Mr. Norton. I don't know what made me do it."
He smiled. "That will be our secret. I'll let the lions
in."
There were more than two dozen reporters and photographers
from radio stations, newspapers, and magazines. It was a
man-bites-dog story, and the press intended to make the most
of it. It was not every day that a pretty young employee
risked her life to save her boss's brother. And the fact that
he happened to be Milo Scott did not hurt the story one bit.
"Miss Dudash—when you saw all that iron hurtling down at
you, what was your first thought?"
Ellen looked over at Sam Norton with a straight face and
said, "I thought, 'I must save Mr. Scott. I'd never forgive
myself if I let him be
killed.' "
The press conference proceeded smoothly, and when Sam
Norton saw that Ellen was beginning to tire, he said, "That's
it, ladies and gentlemen. Thank you very much."
"Did I do all right?"
"You were great. Now get some sleep."
She slept fitfully. She had a dream that she was in the
lobby of the Empire State Building, but the guards would not
let her go up to the top because she did not have enough
money to buy a ticket.
Milo Scott came to visit Ellen that afternoon. She was
surprised to see him. She had heard that his home was in New
York.
"I heard the press conference went very well. You're quite
a heroine."
"Mr. Scott—I have to tell you something. I'm not a
heroine. I didn't stop to think about saving you. I—I just
did it."
"I know. Sam Norton told me."
"Well, then—"
"Ellen, there are all kinds of heroism. You didn't think
about saving me, but you did it instinctively, instead of
saving yourself."
"I—I just wanted you to know."
"Sam also told me that you're worried about the hospital
bills."
"Well—"
"They're all taken care of. And as for your losing some
wages,"—he smiled—"Miss Dudash, I—I don't think you know how
much I owe you."
"You don't owe me anything."
"The doctor told me that you'll be leaving the hospital
tomorrow. Will you let me buy you dinner?"
He doesn't understand, Ellen thought. I don't want his
charity. Or his pity. "I meant it when I said you don't owe
me anything. Thanks for taking care of the hospital bills.
We're even."
"Good. Now may I buy you dinner?"
That was how it began. Milo Scott stayed in Gary for a
week, and he saw Ellen every night. Ellen's mother and father
warned, "Be careful. Big bosses don't go out with factory
girls unless they want something."
That had been Ellen's attitude at the beginning, but Milo
changed her mind. He was a perfect gentleman at all times,
and the truth finally dawned on Ellen: He really enjoys being
with me.
Where Milo was shy and reserved, Ellen was forthright and
open. All his life, Milo had been surrounded by women whose
burning ambition was to become a part of the powerful Scott
dynasty. They had played their calculating games. Ellen
Dudash was the first totally honest woman Milo had ever met.
She said exactly what was on her mind. She was bright, she
was attractive, and, most of all, she was fun to be with. By
the end of the week, they were both falling in love.
"I want to marry you," Milo said. "I can't think about
anything else. Will you marry me?"
"No."
Nor had Ellen been able to think about anything else. The
truth was that she was terrified. The Scotts were as close as
America could come to royalty. They were famous, rich, and
powerful. I don't belong in their circle. I would only make a
fool of myself. And of Milo. But she knew she was fighting a
losing battle.
They were married by a justice of the peace in Greenwich,
Connecticut, and then took a trip to Manhattan so that Ellen
Dudash could meet her in-laws.
Byron Scott greeted his brother with, "What the fuck have
you done—marry a Polish hooker? Are you out of your mind?"
Susan Scott was just as ungiving. "Of course she married
Milo for his money. When she finds out he doesn't have any,
we'll arrange an annulment. This marriage will never last."
They badly underestimated Ellen Dudash.
"Your brother and sister-in-law hate me, but I didn't
marry them. I married you. I don't want to come between you
and Byron. If this is making you too unhappy, Milo, say so,
and I'll leave."
He took his bride in his arms and whispered, "I adore you,
and when Byron and Susan really get to know you, they'll
adore you too."
She held him closely and thought: How naive he is. And how
I love him.
Byron and Susan were not unpleasant to their new
sister-in-law. They were patronizing. To them, she would
always be the little Polish girl who worked in one of the
Scott factories.
Ellen studied, and read, and learned. She watched how the
wives of Milo's friends dressed, and copied them. She was
determined to become a fit wife to Milo Scott, and in time
she succeeded. But not in the eyes of her in-laws. And slowly
her naivete turned to cynicism. The rich and powerful aren't
all that wonderful, she thought. All they want is to be
richer and more powerful.
Ellen was fiercely protective of Milo, but there was
little she could do to help him. Scott Industries was one of
the few privately held conglomerates in the world, and all
the stock belonged to Byron. Byron's younger brother was a
salaried employee, and he never let Milo forget it. He
treated his brother shabbily. Milo was given all the dirty
jobs to do, and was never given any credit.
"Why do you put up with it, Milo? You don't need him. We
could move away from here. You could start your own
business."
"I couldn't leave Scott Industries. Byron needs me."
But in time, Ellen came to understand the real reason.
Milo was weak. He needed someone strong to lean on. She knew
then that he would never have the courage to leave the
company.
All right, she thought fiercely. One day the company will
be his. Byron can't live forever. Milo is his only heir.
When Susan Scott announced that she was pregnant, it was a
blow to Ellen. The baby's going to inherit everything.
When the baby was born, Byron said, "It's a girl, but I'll
teach her how to run the company."
The bastard, Ellen thought. Her heart ached for Milo.
All Milo said was, "Isn't she a beautiful baby?"
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
The pilot of the Lockheed Lodestar was worried. "A front
is closing in. I don't like the look of it." He nodded to the
co-pilot."Take over." Then he left the cockpit to go back to
the cabin.
There were five passengers on board besides the pilot and
co-pilot: Byron Scott, the brilliant, dynamic founder and
chief executive officer of Scott Industries; his attractive
wife, Susan; their year-old daughter, Patricia; Milo Scott,
Byron's younger brother; and Milo's wife, Ellen. They were
flying in one of the company planes from Paris to Madrid.
Bringing the baby had been a last-minute impulse on Susan's
part.
"I hate to be away from her for so long," she had told her
husband.
"Afraid she'll forget us?" he had teased. "All right.
We'll take her with us."
Now that World War II was over, Scott Industries was
rapidly expanding into the European market. In Madrid, Byron
Scott would investigate the possibilities of opening a new
steel mill.
The pilot approached him.
"Excuse me, sir. We're heading into some thunder clouds.
It doesn't look very good ahead. Do you want to turn back?"
Byron looked out the small window. They were flying
through a gray mass of cumulus clouds, and every few seconds
distant lightning illuminated them. "I have a meeting in
Madrid tonight. Can you go around the storm?"
"I'll try. If I can't, then I'm going to have to turn us
around."
Byron nodded. "All right."
"Would you all fasten your seat belts, please?"
The pilot hurried back to the cockpit.
Susan had heard the conversation. She picked up the baby
and held her in her arms, suddenly wishing she had not
brought her along. I've got to tell Byron to have the pilot
turn back, she thought.
"Byron—"
They were suddenly in the eye of the storm and the plane
began to buck up and down, caught in the gusting winds. The
motion began to grow more violent. Rain was smashing against
the windows. The storm had closed off all visibility. The
passengers felt as though they were riding on a rolling
cotton sea.
Byron flicked down the intercom switch. "Where are we,
Blake?"
"We're fifty-five miles northwest of Madrid, over the town
of Ávila."
Byron looked out the window again. "We'll forget Madrid
tonight. Let's turn around and get the hell out of here."
"Roger."
The decision was a fraction of a second too late. As the
pilot started to bank the plane, a mountain peak loomed
suddenly in front of him. There was no time to avoid the
crash. There was a rending tear, and the sky exploded as the
plane tore into the side of the mountain, ripping apart,
scattering chunks of fuselage and wings along a high plateau.
After the crash there was an unnatural silence that lasted
for what seemed an eternity. It was broken by the crackle of
flames starting to lick at the undercarriage of the plane.
"Ellen—"
Ellen Scott opened her eyes. She was lying under a tree.
Her husband was bending over her, lightly slapping her face.
When he saw that she was alive, he said, "Thank God."
Ellen sat up, dizzy, her head throbbing, every muscle in
her body aching. She looked around at the obscene pieces of
wreckage that had once been an airplane filled with human
bodies, and shuddered.
"The others?" she asked hoarsely.
"They're dead."
She stared at her husband. "Oh, my God! No!"
He nodded, his face tight with grief. "Byron, Susan, the
baby, the pilots, everyone."
Ellen Scott closed her eyes again and said a silent
prayer. Why were Milo and I spared? she wondered. It was hard
to think clearly. We have to go down and get help. But it's
too late. They're all dead. It was impossible to believe.
They had been so full of life just a few minutes before.
"Can you stand up?"
"I—I think so."
Milo helped his wife to her feet. There was a surge of
sickening dizziness, and she stood there, waiting for it to
pass.
Milo turned to look at the plane. Flames were beginning to
get higher. "Let's get out of here," he said. "The damned
thing is going to blow up any second."
They quietly moved away and watched it burn. A moment
later, there was an explosion as the gas tanks blew apart and
the plane was engulfed in flames.
"It's a miracle we're alive," Milo said.
Ellen looked at the burning plane. Something was nagging
at the edges of her mind, but she was having trouble thinking
clearly. Something about Scott Industries. And then suddenly
she knew.
"Milo?"
"Yes?" He was not really listening.
"It's fate."
The fervor in her voice made him turn. "What?"
"Scott Industries—it belongs to you now."
"I don't—"
"Milo, God left it to you." Her voice was filled with a
burning intensity. "All your life you've lived in the shadow
of your big brother." She was thinking clearly now,
coherently, and she forgot her headache and the pain. The
words were tumbling out in a spate that shook her whole body.
"You worked for Byron for twenty years, building up the
company. You're as responsible for its success as he is, but
did he—did he ever give you credit for it? No. It was always
his company, his success, his profits. Well, now you—you
finally have a chance to come into your own."
He looked at her, horrified. "Ellen—their bodies are— how
can you even think about—?"
"I know. But we didn't kill them. It's our turn, Milo.
We've finally come into our own. There's no one alive to
claim the company but us. It's ours! Yours!"
And at that moment they heard the cry of a baby. Ellen and
Milo Scott stared at each other unbelievingly.
"It's Patricia! She's alive. Oh, my God!"
They found the baby near a clump of bushes. By some
miracle she was unhurt.
Milo picked her up gently and held her close. "Shh! It's
all right, darling," he whispered. "Everything's going to be
all right."
Ellen was standing at his side, a look of shock on her
face. "You—you said she was dead."
"She must have been knocked unconscious."
Ellen stared at the baby a long time. "She should have
been killed with the others," she said in a strangled voice.
Milo looked up at her, shocked. "What are you saying?"
"Byron's will leaves everything to Patricia. You can look
forward to spending the next twenty years being her caretaker
so that when she grows up she can treat you as shabbily as
her father did. Is that what you want?"
He was silent.
"We'll never have a chance like this again." She was
staring at the baby, and there was a wild look in her eyes
that Milo had never seen before. It was almost as though she
wanted to—
She's not herself. She's suffering from a concussion. "For
God's sake, Ellen, what are you thinking?"
She looked at her husband for a long moment, and the wild
light faded from her eyes. "I don't know," she said calmly.
After a pause she said, "There's something we can do. We can
leave her somewhere, Milo. The pilot said we were near Ávila.
There should be plenty of tourists there. There's no reason
for anyone to connect the baby with the plane crash."
He shook his head. "Their friends know that Byron and
Susan took Patricia with them."
Ellen looked at the burning plane. "That's no problem.
They all burned up in the crash. We'll have a private
memorial service here."
"Ellen," he protested. "We can't do this. We'd never get
away with it."
"God did it for us. We have gotten away with it."
Milo looked at the baby. "But she's so—"
"She'll be fine," Ellen said soothingly. "We'll drop her
off at a nice farmhouse outside of town. Someone will adopt
her and she'll grow up to have a lovely life here."
He shook his head. "I can't do it. No."
"If you love me you'll do this for us. You have to choose,
Milo. You can either have me, or you can spend the rest of
your life working for your brother's child."
"Please, I—"
"Do you love me?"
"More than my life," he said simply.
"Then prove it."
They made their way carefully down the mountainside in the
dark, whipped by the wind. Because the plane had crashed in a
high wooded area, the sound was muffled, so the townspeople
were unaware as yet of what had happened.
Three hours later, in the outskirts of Ávila, Ellen and
Milo reached a small farmhouse. It was not yet dawn.
"We'll leave her here," Ellen whispered.
Mild made one last try. "Ellen, couldn't we—?"
"Do it!" she said fiercely.
Without another word he turned and carried the baby to the
door of the farmhouse. She was wearing only a torn pink
nightgown and had a blanket wrapped around her.
Milo looked at Patricia for a long moment, his eyes filled
with tears, then laid her gently down.
He whispered, "Have a good life, darling."
The crying awakened Asunción Moras. For a sleepy moment
she thought it was the bleating of a goat or a lamb. How had
it gotten out of its pen?
Grumbling, she rose from her warm bed, put on an old faded
robe, and walked to the door.
When she saw the infant lying on the ground screaming and
kicking, she said, "Madre de Dios!" and yelled for her
husband.
They brought the child inside and stared at it. It would
not stop crying, and it seemed to be turning blue.
"We've got to get her to the hospital."
They hurriedly wrapped another blanket around the baby,
carried her to their pickup truck, and drove her to the
hospital. They sat on a bench in the long corridor waiting
for someone to attend to them, and thirty minutes later a
doctor came and took the baby away to examine her.
When he returned, he said, "She's got pneumonia."
"Is she going to live?" The doctor shrugged.
Milo and Ellen Scott stumbled into the police station at
Ávila.
The desk sergeant looked up at the two bedraggled
tourists. "Buenos dias. Can I help you?"
"There's been a terrible accident," Milo said. "Our plane
crashed up in the mountains and…"
One hour later a rescue party was on its way to the
mountainside. When they arrived, there was nothing to see but
the smoldering, charred remains of an aircraft and its
passengers.
The investigation of the airplane accident conducted by
the Spanish authorities was cursory.
"The pilot should not have attempted to fly into such a
bad storm. We must attribute the accident to pilot error."
There was no reason for anyone in Ávila to associate the
airplane crash with a small child left on the doorstep of a
farmhouse.
It was over.
It was just beginning.
Milo and Ellen held a private memorial service for Byron,
his wife, Susan, and their daughter, Patricia. When they
returned to New York, they held a second memorial service,
attended by the shocked friends of the Scotts. "What a
terrible tragedy. And poor little Patricia."
"Yes," Ellen said sadly. "The only blessing is that it
happened so quickly, none of them suffered."
The financial community was shaken by the news. It was
almost unanimously agreed that with Byron Scott's death,
Scott Industries had suffered an irreparable loss.
"Don't listen to what any of them say," Ellen Scott told
her husband, "you're better than Byron ever was. The company
is going to be bigger than ever."
Milo took her in his arms. "I don't know what I'd do
without you."
She smiled. "You'll never have to. From now on we're going
to have everything in the world we've ever dreamed of."
She held him close and thought: Who would have believed
that Ellen Dudash, from a poor Polish family in Gary,
Indiana, would have one day said, "From now on, we're going
to have everything in the world we ever dreamed of."
And meant it.
For ten days the baby remained in the hospital, fighting
for her life, and when the crisis was past, Father Berrendo
went to see the farmer and his wife.
"I have joyous news for you," he said happily. "The child
is going to be all right."
The Morases exchanged an uncomfortable look.
"I'm glad for her sake," the farmer said evasively.
Father Berrendo beamed. "She is a gift from God."
"Certainly, Father. But my wife and I have talked it over
and decided that God is too generous to us. His gift requires
feeding. We can't afford to keep it."
"But she's such a beautiful baby," Father Berrendo pointed
out. "And—"
"Agreed. But my wife and I are old and sick, and we can't
take on the responsibility of bringing up a baby. God will
have to take back his gift."
And so it was that with nowhere else to go the baby was
sent to the orphanage in Ávila.
Milo and Ellen were seated in the office of Byron Scott's
attorney for the reading of the will. The three of them were
the only ones present. Ellen was filled with a sense of
almost unbearable excitement. A few words on a piece of paper
were going to make her and Milo rich beyond imagining.
We'll buy old masters and an estate in Southampton, and a
castle in France. And that's only the beginning.
The lawyer started to speak, and Ellen turned her
attention to him. Months earlier she had seen a copy of
Byron's will and knew exactly what it said:
"In the event that my wife and I should both be deceased,
I bequeath all my stock in Scott Industries to my only child,
Patricia, and I appoint my brother, Milo, as executor of my
estate until she reaches the legal age and is able to take
over. …"
Well, all that is changed now, Ellen thought excitedly.
The lawyer, Lawrence Gray, said solemnly, "This has been a
terrible shock to all of us. I know how much you loved your
brother, Milo, and as for that darling little baby…" He shook
his head. "Well, life must go on. You may not be aware that
your brother had changed his will. I won't bother you with
the legalese. I will just read you the gist of it." He
thumbed through the will and came to the paragraph he was
looking for. "I amend this will so that my daughter,
Patricia, will receive the sum of five million dollars plus a
distribution of one million dollars a year for the rest of
her life. All the stock in Scott Industries held in my name
will go to my brother, Milo, as a reward for the faithful and
valuable services he has provided the company through the
years."
Milo felt the room begin to sway.
Mr. Gray looked up. "Are you all right?"
Milo was finding it difficult to breathe. Good God, what
have we done? We've taken away her birthright, and it wasn't
necessary at all. Now we can give it back to her.
He turned to say something to Ellen, but the look in her
eyes stopped him.
"There has to be something we can do, Ellen. We can't just
leave Patricia there. Not now."
They were in their Fifth Avenue apartment getting dressed
to go to a charity dinner.
"That's exactly what we're going to do," Ellen told him.
"Unless you'd like to bring her back here and try to explain
why we said she was burned to death in the airplane crash."
He had no answer to that. After thinking a moment he said,
"All right, then. We'll send her money every month so she—"
"Don't be a fool, Milo." Her voice was curt. "Send her
money? And have the police start checking on why someone is
sending her money and trace it back to us? No. If your
conscience bothers you, we'll have the company give money to
charity. Forget about the child, Milo. She's dead. Remember?"
Remember… remember… remember…
The words echoed in Ellen Scott's mind as she looked out
at the audience in the Waldorf-Astoria ballroom and finished
her speech. There was another standing ovation.
You're standing up for a dead woman, she thought.
That night the ghosts came back. She thought she had
exorcised them long ago. In the beginning, after the memorial
services for her brother- and sister-in-law and Patricia, the
night visitors had come frequently. Pale mists hovered over
her bed and voices whispered in her ear. She would awaken,
her pulse racing, but there would be nothing to see. She had
told none of this to Milo. He was weak, and it might have
terrified him into doing something foolish, something that
would jeopardize the company. If the truth got out, the
scandal would destroy Scott Industries, and Ellen was
determined that that must never happen. And so she suffered
the ghosts in silence, until finally they went away and left
her in peace.
Now, the night of the banquet, they returned. She awakened
and sat up in her bed and looked around. The room was empty
and quiet, but she knew they had been there. What were they
trying to tell her? Did they know she would be joining them
soon?
Ellen rose and walked into the spacious, antique-filled
drawing room of the beautiful townhouse she had bought after
Milo passed away. She looked around the lovely room and
thought: Poor Milo. He had not had time to enjoy any of the
benefits of his brother's death. He had died of a heart
attack a year after the plane crash, and Ellen Scott had
taken over the company, running it with an efficiency and
expertise that had catapulted Scott Industries into greater
international prominence.
The company belongs to the Scott family, she thought. I'm
not going to turn it over to faceless strangers.
And that led her thoughts to Byron and Susan's daughter.
The rightful heiress to the throne that had been stolen from
her. Was there fear in her thoughts? Was it a wish to make an
atonement before her own death?
Ellen Scott sat in her drawing room all night, staring
into nothingness, thinking and planning. How long ago had it
been? Twenty-eight years. Patricia would be a grown woman
now, assuming that she was still alive. What had her life
become? Had she married a farmer or a merchant in the
village? Did she have children? Was she still living in
Ávila, or had she gone away to some other place?
I must find her, Ellen thought. And quickly. If Patricia
is still alive, I've got to see her, talk to her. I have to
finally set the account straight. Money can turn lies into
truth. I'll find a way to solve the situation without ever
letting her know what really happened.
The following morning, Ellen sent for Alan Tucker, chief
of security for Scott Industries. He was a former detective
in his forties, a thin, balding, sallow-looking man,
hard-working and brilliant.
"I want you to go on a mission for me."
"Yes, Mrs. Scott."
She studied him a moment, wondering how much she could
tell him. I can tell him nothing, she decided. As long as I
am alive, I refuse to put myself or the company in jeopardy.
Let him find Patricia first, and then I'll decide how to
handle her.
She leaned forward. "Twenty-eight years ago, an orphan was
left on the doorstep of a farmhouse outside Ávila, Spain. I
want you to find out where she is today and bring her back
here to me as quickly as possible."
Alan Tucker's face remained impassive. Mrs. Scott did not
like her employees to show emotion.
"Yes, ma'am. I'll leave tomorrow."
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
Colonel Ramón Acoca was in an expansive mood. All the
pieces were finally falling into place. An orderly came into
his office. "Colonel Sostelo has arrived."
"Show him in."
I won't be needing him anymore, Acoca thought. He can go
back to his tin soldiers.
Colonel Fal Sostelo walked in. "Colonel."
"Colonel."
It's ironic, Sostelo thought. We hold the same rank, but
the scarred giant has the power to break me. Because he's
connected to the OPUS MUNDO.
It was an indignity for Sostelo to have to answer Acoca's
summons as though he were some unimportant subordinate. But
he managed to show none of his feelings. "You wanted to see
me?"
"Yes." Acoca waved him to a chair. "Sit down. I have some
news for you. Jaime Miró has the nuns."
"What?"
"Yes. They're traveling with Miró and his men. He's split
them up into three groups."
"How—how do you know that?"
Ramón Acoca leaned back in his chair. "Do you play chess?"
"No."
"Pity. It's a very educational game. In order to be a good
player, it's necessary to get into the mind of your opponent.
Jaime Miró and I play chess with each other."
Fal Sostelo was staring at him. "I don't understand how—"
"Not literally, Colonel. We don't use a chess board. We
use our minds. I probably understand Jaime Miró better than
anyone in the world. I know how his mind works. I knew that
he would try to blow up the dam at Puente la Reina. We
captured three of his lieutenants there, and it was only by
luck that Miró himself got away. I knew that he would try to
rescue them, and Miro knew that I knew it." Acoca shrugged.
"I didn't anticipate that he would use the bulls to effect
their escape." There was a note of admiration in his voice.
"You sound as though you—"
"Admire him? I admire his mind. I despise the man."
"Do you know where Miró is headed?"
"He is traveling north. I will catch him within the next
three days."
Colonel Sostelo was gaping at him, stunned.
"It will finally be checkmate."
It was true that Colonel Acoca understood Jaime Miró, and
the way his mind worked, but it was not enough for him. The
colonel wanted an edge, to ensure victory, and he had found
it.
"How—?"
"One of Miró's terrorists," Colonel Acoca said, "is an
informant."
Rubio, Tomás, and the two sisters avoided the large cities
and took side roads, passing old stone villages with grazing
sheep and goats, and shepherds listening to music and soccer
games on their transistor radios. It was a colorful
juxtaposition of the past and the present, but Lucia had
other things on her mind.
She stayed close to Sister Teresa, waiting for the first
opportunity to get the cross and leave. The two men were
always at their side. Rubio Arzano was the more considerate
of the two, a tall, pleasant-looking, cheerful man. A
simple-minded peasant, Lucia decided. Tomás Sanjuro was
slight and balding. He looks more like a shoe clerk than a
terrorist. It will be easy to outwit them both.
They walked across the plains north of Ávila by night,
cooled by the winds blowing down from the Guadarrama
mountains. There was a haunting emptiness about the plains by
moonlight. They passed granjas of wheat, olive trees,
grapevines, and maize, and they foraged for potatoes and
lettuce, fruit from the trees, and eggs and chickens from the
hen coops.
"The whole countryside of Spain is a huge market," said
Rubio Arzano.
Tomás Sanjuro grinned. "And it's all for free."
Sister Teresa was totally oblivious to her surroundings.
Her only thought was to reach the convent at Mendavia. The
cross was getting heavy, but she was determined not to let it
out of her hands. Soon, she thought. We'll be there soon.
We're fleeing from Gethsemane and our enemies to the new
mansion He has prepared for us.
Lucia said, "What?"
Sister Teresa was unaware that she had spoken aloud.
"I—nothing," she mumbled.
Lucia took a closer look at her. The older woman seemed
distracted and vaguely disoriented, unaware of what was
happening around her. She nodded toward the canvas package
that Sister Teresa carried. "That must be heavy," Lucia said
sympathetically. "Wouldn't you like me to carry it for a
while?"
Sister Teresa clutched it to her body more tightly."Jesus
carried a heavier burden. I can carry this for Him. Does it
not say in Luke: 'If any man would come after me, let him
deny himself, and take up his cross daily, and follow me'?
I'll carry it," she said stubbornly.
There was something odd in her tone.
"Are you all right, Sister?"
"Of course."
Sister Teresa was far from all right. She had not been
able to sleep. She felt dizzy and feverish. Her mind was
playing tricks again. I mustn't let myself become ill, she
thought. Sister Betina will scold me. But Sister Betina was
not there. It was so confusing. And who were these men? I
don't trust them. What do they want with me?
Rubio Arzano had attempted to strike up a conversation
with Sister Teresa, trying to make her feel at ease.
"It must seem strange to you, being out in the world
again, Sister. How long were you in the convent?" Why did he
want to know? "Thirty years."
"My, that's a long time. Where are you from?" It was
painful for her even to say the word. "Èze." His face
brightened. "Èze? I spent a summer there once on a holiday.
It's a lovely town. I know it well. I remember…"
I know it well. How well? Does he know Raoul? Did Raoul
send him here? And the truth hit her like a bolt of
lightning. These strangers had been sent to bring her back to
Èze, to Raoul Giradot. They were kidnapping her. God was
punishing her for deserting Monique's baby. She was certain
now that the baby she had seen in the village square in
Villacastin was her sister's. "But it couldn't have been,
could it? That was thirty years ago," Teresa muttered to
herself. "They're lying to me."
Rubio Arzano was watching her, listening to her mumbling.
"Is something wrong, Sister?" Sister Teresa shrank away
from him. "No." She was onto them now. She was not going to
let them take her back to Raoul and the baby. She had to get
to the convent at Mendavia and hand over the gold crucifix,
and then God would forgive her for the terrible sin she had
committed. I must be clever. I must not let them know I am
onto their secret.
She looked up at Rubio. "I am fine," she said. Moving on
across the dry, sunbaked plains, they came to a small village
where peasant women dressed in black were doing their wash at
a spring covered by a roof resting on four ancient beams. The
water poured into a long wooden trough and out again, so that
it was always fresh, and the women scrubbed their wash on
stone slabs and rinsed it clean in the running water.
It's such a peaceful scene, Rubio thought. It reminded him
of the farm he had left behind. It's what Spain used to be
like. No bombs, no killing. Will we ever know peace again?
"Buenos dias."
"Buenos dias."
"I wonder if we might have a drink? Traveling is thirsty
work."
"Certainly. Please help yourselves."
The water was cold and refreshing.
"Gracias. Adios."
"Adios."
Rubio hated to leave.
The two women and their escorts moved on, past cork and
olive trees, the summer air filled with the smells of ripe
grapes and oranges. They went by orchards of apple, cherry,
and plum trees, and farms noisy with the sounds of chickens,
pigs, and goats.
Rubio and Tomás walked ahead, talking quietly together.
They are talking about me. They think I do not know their
plan. Sister Teresa moved nearer to them so she could hear
what they were saying.
"…a reward of five hundred thousand pesetas on our heads.
Of course Colonel Acoca would pay more for Jaime, but he
doesn't want his head. He wants his cojones."
The men laughed.
As Sister Teresa listened to them talk, her conviction
grew stronger. These men are killers doing Satan's work,
messengers of the devil sent to damn me to everlasting hell.
But God is stronger than they are. He will not let them take
me back home.
Raoul Giradot was at her side, smiling the smile that she
knew so well.
The voice!
I beg your pardon?
I heard you sing yesterday. You are magnificent.
May I help you?
I would like three yards of muslin, please.
Certainly. This way… My aunt owns this shop and she needed
help, so I thought I'd work for her for a while.
I'm sure you could have any man you want, Teresa, but I
hope you will choose me.
He looked so handsome.
I have never known anyone like you, my darling.
Raoul took her in his arms and was kissing her.
You're going to make a beautiful bride.
But now I'm Christ's bride. I can't return to Raoul.
Lucia was watching Sister Teresa closely. She was talking
to herself, but Lucia could not make out the words.
She's cracking up, Lucia thought. She's not going to make
it. I've got to get hold of that cross soon.
It was dusk when they saw the town of Olmedo in the
distance.
Rubio stopped. "There will be soldiers there. Let's move
up to the hills and skirt the city."
They moved off the road and left the plains, heading for
the hills above Olmedo. The sun was skipping across the
mountaintops and the sky was beginning to darken.
"We've only a few more miles to go," Rubio Arzano said
reassuringly. "Then we can rest."
They had reached the top of a high ridge when Tomás
Sanjuro suddenly held up a hand. "Hold it," he whispered.
Rubio walked over to his side and together they moved to
the edge of the ridge and looked down into the valley below.
There was an encampment of soldiers there.
"Mierda!" Rubio whispered. "There must be a whole platoon.
We'll stay up here for the rest of the night. They'll
probably pull out in the morning and we can move on." He
turned to Lucia and Sister Teresa, trying not to show how
worried he was. "We'll spend the night here, Sisters. We must
be very quiet. There are soldiers down there and we don't
want them to find us."
It was the best news Lucia could have heard. It's perfect,
she thought. I'll disappear with the cross during the night.
They won't dare try to follow me because of the soldiers.
To Sister Teresa, the news had a different meaning. She
had heard the men say that someone named Colonel Acoca was
searching for them. They called Colonel Acoca the enemy. But
these men are the enemy, so Colonel Acoca must be my friend.
Thank You, dear God, for sending me Colonel Acoca.
The tall man called Rubio was speaking to her.
"Do you understand, Sister? We must all be very, very
quiet."
"Yes, I understand." I understand more than you think.
They had no idea that God permitted her to see into their
evil hearts.
Tomás Sanjuro said kindly, "I know how difficult this must
be for both of you, but don't worry. We'll see that you get
safely to the convent."
To Èze, he means. Oh, but he is cunning. He speaks the
honeyed words of the devil. But God is within me, and He is
guiding me. She knew what she must do. But she had to be
careful.
The two men arranged the sleeping bags for the women, next
to each other.
"Both of you get some sleep now."
The women got into the unfamiliar sleeping bags. The night
was incredibly clear and the sky was spangled with glimmering
stars. Lucia looked up at them and thought happily: In just a
few hours now, I'll be on my way to freedom. As soon as
they're all asleep. She yawned. She had not realized how
tired she was. The long, hard journey and the emotional
strain had taken their toll. Her eyes felt heavy. I'll just
rest for a little while, Lucia thought.
She slept.
Sister Teresa lay near Lucia, wide awake, fighting the
demons that were trying to possess her, to send her soul to
hell. I must be strong. The Lord is testing me. I have been
exiled so that I can find my way back to Him. And these men
are trying to stop me. I must not let them.
At four o'clock in the morning, Sister Teresa silently sat
up and looked around. Tomás Sanjuro was asleep only a few
feet from her. The tall, dark man called Rubio was keeping
watch at the edge of the clearing, his back to her. She could
see his silhouette against the trees.
Very quietly, Sister Teresa rose. She hesitated, thinking
about the cross. Should I carry it with me? But I'll be
coming back here very soon. I must find a place where it will
be safe until I return. She looked over to where Sister Lucia
lay sleeping. Yes, It will be safe with my sister in God,
Sister Teresa decided.
Silently she moved over to Lucia's sleeping bag and gently
slipped the wrapped cross inside. Lucia did not stir. Sister
Teresa turned and moved into the woods, out of Rubio Arzano's
sight, and carefully began to make her way downhill toward
the soldiers' camp. The hill was steep and slippery with dew,
but God gave her wings and she sped downhill without
stumbling or falling, hurrying toward her salvation.
In the darkness ahead, the figure of a man suddenly
materialized.
A voice called out, "Who goes there?"
"Sister Teresa."
She approached the sentry, who was wearing an army uniform
and pointing a rifle at her.
"Where did you come from, old woman?" he demanded.
She looked at him with glowing eyes. "God sent me."
The sentry stared at her. "Did He, now?"
"Yes. He sent me to see Colonel Acoca."
The guard shook his head."You'd better tell Him you're not
the colonel's type. Adios, senora."
"You don't understand. I am Sister Teresa from the
Cistercian convent. I have been taken prisoner by Jaime Miró
and his men." She watched the stunned expression that came
over his face.
"You're—you're from the convent?"
"Yes."
"The one at Ávila?"
"Yes," Teresa said impatiently. What was the matter with
the man? Didn't he realize how important it was that she be
rescued from those evil men?
The soldier said carefully, "The colonel isn't here just
now, Sister—"
It was an unexpected blow.
"—but Colonel Sostelo is in charge. I can take you to
him."
"Will he be able to help me?"
"Oh, I'm sure he will. Follow me, please."
The sentry was scarcely able to believe his good fortune.
Colonel Fal Sostelo had sent squadrons of soldiers to scour
the entire countryside in search of the four nuns, and they
had had no success. Now one of the sisters had stumbled into
the camp and given herself up to him. The colonel was going
to be very pleased.
They reached the tent where Colonel Fal Sostelo and his
second-in-command were poring over a map. The men looked up
as the sentry and a woman entered.
"Excuse me, Colonel. This is Sister Teresa from the
Cistercian convent."
Colonel Sostelo stared at her unbelievingly. For the last
three days, all of his energy had been focused on finding
Jaime Miró and the nuns, and now, here in front of him, was
one of them. There was a God.
"Sit down, Sister."
There is no time for that, Sister Teresa thought. She had
to make him realize how urgent this was. "We must hurry. They
are trying to take me back to Èze."
The colonel was puzzled. "Who's trying to take you back to
Èze?"
"The men of Jaime Miró."
He got to his feet. "Sister—do you by any chance happen to
know where these men are?"
Sister Teresa said impatiently,"Of course." She turned and
pointed. "They're up in those hills hiding from you."
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
Alan Tucker arrived in Ávila the day after his
conversation with Ellen Scott. It had been a long flight, and
Tucker should have been exhausted, but instead he was
exhilarated. Ellen Scott was not a woman given to whims.
There's something strange going on behind all this, Alan
Tucker thought, and if I play my cards right, I have a hunch
it could be very profitable for me.
He checked into the Cuatro Postes hotel and said to the
clerk behind the desk,"Is there a newspaper office around
here?"
"Down the street, senor. To your left, two blocks. You
can't miss it."
"Thank you."
"De nada."
Walking down the main street, watching the town come alive
after its afternoon siesta, Tucker thought about the
mysterious girl he had been sent to bring back. This had to
be something important. But important why! He could hear
Ellen Scott's voice.
If she's alive, bring her back to me. You are not to
discuss this with anyone.
No, ma'am. What shall I tell her?
Simply tell her that a friend of her father's wishes to
meet her. She'll come.
Tucker found the newspaper office. Inside, he approached
one of the half dozen people working behind desks. "Perdone,
I would like to see the managing editor."
The man pointed to an office. "In there, senor."
"Gracias."
Tucker walked over to the open door and looked inside. A
man in his mid-thirties was seated behind a desk, busily
editing copy.
"Excuse me," Tucker said. "Could I speak to you for a
moment?"
The man looked up. "What can I do for you?"
"I'm looking for a senorita."
The editor smiled. "Aren't we all, senor?"
"She was left at a farmhouse around here when she was an
infant."
The smile faded. "Oh. She was abandoned?"
"Yes."
"And you are trying to find her?"
"Yes."
"How many years ago would that be, senor?"
"Twenty-eight."
The young man shrugged. "It was before my time."
Perhaps it's not going to be so easy. "Could you suggest
someone who might be able to help me?"
The editor leaned back in his chair, thinking. "As a
matter of fact, I can. I would suggest you speak with Father
Berrendo."
Father Berrendo sat in his study, a lap robe over his thin
legs, listening to the stranger.
When Alan Tucker was finished explaining why he was there,
Father Berrendo said, "Why do you wish to know about this
matter, senor? It happened so long ago. What is your interest
in it?"
Tucker hesitated, choosing his words carefully. "I am not
at liberty to say. I can only assure you that I mean the
woman no harm. If you could just tell me where the farmhouse
is where she was left—?"
The farmhouse. Memories came flooding back of the day the
Morases had come to him after they had taken the little girl
to the hospital.
"I think she's dying, Father. What shall we do?"
Father Berrendo telephoned his friend Don Morago, the
chief of police.
"I think the baby was abandoned by tourists visiting
Ávila. Could you check the hotels and inns and see if anyone
arrived with a baby and left without one?"
The police went through the registration cards that all
hotels were required to fill out, but they were of no help.
"It is as if the baby just dropped out of the sky," Don
Morago had said.
And he had had no idea of how close he had come to solving
the mystery.
When Father Berrendo took the infant to the orphanage,
Mercedes Angeles had asked, "Does the baby have a name?"
"I don't know."
"Wasn't there a blanket or something with the name on it?"
"No."
Mercedes Angeles looked at the infant in the priest's
arms. "Well, we'll just have to give her a name, won't we?"
She had recently finished reading a romantic novel, and
she liked the name of the heroine in it.
"Megan," she said. "We'll call her Megan."
And fourteen years later, Father Berrendo had taken Megan
to the Cistercian convent.
So many years after that, this stranger was looking for
her. Life always comes full circle, Father Berrendo thought.
In some mysterious way, it has come full circle for Megan.
No, not Megan. That was the name given her by the orphanage.
"Sit down, senor," Father Berrendo said. "There is much to
tell you."
And he told him.
When the priest was finished, Alan Tucker sat there
quietly, his mind racing. There had to be a very good reason
for Ellen Scott's interest in a baby abandoned at a farmhouse
in Spain twenty-eight years earlier. A woman now called
Megan, according to the priest.
Tell her that a friend of her father's wishes to meet her.
If he remembered correctly, Byron Scott and his wife and
daughter had died in an airplane crash many years ago
somewhere in Spain. Could there be a connection? Alan Tucker
felt a growing sense of excitement.
"Father—I'd like to get into the convent to see her. It's
very important."
The priest shook his head. "I'm afraid you are too late.
The convent was attacked two days ago by agents of the
government."
Alan Tucker stared at him. "Attacked? What happened to the
nuns?"
"They were arrested and taken to Madrid."
Alan Tucker got to his feet. "Thank you, Father." He would
catch the first plane to Madrid.
Father Berrendo went on. "Four of the nuns escaped. Sister
Megan was one of them."
Things were becoming complicated. "Where is she now?"
"No one knows. The police and the army are searching for
her and the other sisters."
"I see." Under ordinary circumstances, Alan Tucker would
have telephoned Ellen Scott and informed her that he had
reached a dead end. But all his instincts as a detective told
him there was something here that warranted further
investigation.
He placed a call to Ellen Scott.
"There's a complication, Mrs. Scott." He repeated his
conversation with the priest.
There was a long silence. "No one knows where she is?"
"She and the others are on the run, but they can't hide
out much longer. The police and half the Spanish army are
looking for them. When they surface, I'll be there."
Another silence. "This is very important to me, Tucker."
"Yes, Mrs. Scott."
Alan Tucker returned to the newspaper office. He was in
luck. It was still open.
He said to the editor, "I would like to look through your
files, if I may."
"Are you looking for something in particular?"
"Yes. There was an airplane crash here."
"How long ago, senor?"
"Twenty-eight years ago. Nineteen forty-eight."
It took Alan Tucker fifteen minutes to find the item he
was looking for. The headline leaped out at him.
PLANE CRASH KILLS EXECUTIVE, FAMILY
October 1, 1948. Byron Scott, President of Scott
Industries, his wife, Susan, and their one-year-old daughter,
Patricia, were burned to death in an airplane crash…
I've hit the jackpot! He could feel his pulse begin to
race. If this is what I think it is, I'm going to be a rich
man… a very rich man.
CHAPTER NINETEEN
She was naked in her bed, and she could feel the male
hardness of Benito Patas pressing into her groin. His body
felt wonderful, and she moved closer to him, grinding her
hips against him, feeling the heat growing in her loins. She
started to stroke him, to excite him. But something was
wrong. I killed Patas, she thought. He's dead.
Lucia opened her eyes and sat up, trembling, looking
around wildly. Benito was not there. She was in the forest,
in a sleeping bag. Something was pressing against her thigh.
Lucia reached down inside the sleeping bag and pulled out the
canvas-wrapped cross. She stared at it unbelievingly. God
just performed a miracle for me, she thought.
Lucia had no idea how the cross had gotten there, nor did
she care. She finally had it in her hands. All she had to do
now was to slip away from the others.
She crept out of the sleeping bag and looked over to where
Sister Teresa had slept. She was gone. Lucia looked around in
the darkness, and she could barely make out the figure of
Tomás Sanjuro at the edge of the clearing, facing away from
her. She was not sure where Rubio was. It doesn't matter.
It's time to get out of here, Lucia thought.
She started to move to the edge of the clearing, away from
Sanjuro, bending low so she would not be seen.
At that instant all hell broke loose.
Colonel Fal Sostelo had a command decision to make. He had
been given orders by the prime minister himself to work
closely with Colonel Ramón Acoca to help capture Jaime Miró
and the nuns. But fate had blessed him by delivering one of
the nuns into his hands. Why share the credit with Colonel
Acoca when he could catch the terrorists and keep all the
glory? Fuck Colonel Acoca, Fal Sostelo thought. This one is
mine. Maybe the OPUS MUNDO will use me instead of Acoca, with
all his bullshit about chess games and getting into the minds
of people. No, it's time to teach the scarred giant a lesson.
Colonel Sostelo gave specific orders to his men.
"Don't take any prisoners. You're dealing with terrorists.
Shoot to kill."
Major Ponte hesitated. "Colonel, there are nuns up there
with Miró's men. Shouldn't we—?"
"Let the terrorists hide behind the nuns? No, we'll take
no chances."
Sostelo selected a dozen men to accompany him on the raid
and saw to it that they were heavily armed. They moved
noiselessly in the dark, up the slope of the mountain. The
moon had disappeared behind clouds. There was almost no
visibility. Good. They won't be able to see us coming.
When his men were in position, Colonel Sostelo shouted,
for the sake of the record, "Put down your arms. You're
surrounded." And in the same breath he called out the
command, "Fire! Keep firing!"
A dozen automatic weapons began to spray the clearing.
Tomás Sanjuro never had a chance. A hail of machine-gun
bullets caught him in the chest and he was dead before he hit
the ground. Rubio Arzano was at the far edge of the clearing
when the firing started. He saw Sanjuro fall, and he whirled
and started to raise his gun to return the fire but stopped.
It was pitch black in the clearing and the soldiers were
firing blindly. If he returned their fire, he would give his
position away.
To his amazement, he saw Lucia crouched two feet away from
him.
"Where's Sister Teresa?" he whispered.
"She—she's gone."
"Stay low," Rubio told her.
He grabbed Lucia's hand and they zigzagged toward the
forest, away from the enemy fire. Shots whizzed dangerously
close as they ran, but moments later Lucia and Rubio were
among the trees. They continued running.
"Hold on to me, Sister," he said.
They heard the sound of their attackers behind them, but
gradually it died away. It was impossible to pursue anyone
through the inky blackness of the woods.
Rubio stopped to let Lucia catch her breath.
"We've lost them for now," he told her. "But we have to
keep moving."
Lucia was breathing hard.
"If you want to rest for a minute—?"
"No," she said. She was exhausted, but she had no
intention of letting them catch her. Not now when she had the
cross. "I'm fine," she said. "Let's get out of here."
Colonel Fal Sostelo was facing disaster. One terrorist was
dead, but God alone knew how many had escaped. He did not
have Jaime Miró and he had only one of the nuns. He knew he
would have to inform Colonel Acoca of what had happened, and
he was not looking forward to it.
The second call from Alan Tucker to Ellen Scott was even
more disturbing than the first.
"I've come across some rather interesting information,
Mrs. Scott," he said cautiously.
"Yes?"
"I went through some old newspaper files here, hoping to
get more information on the girl."
"And?" She braced herself for what she knew was coming.
Tucker kept his voice casual. "It seems that the girl was
abandoned about the time of your plane crash."
Silence.
He went on. "The one that killed your brother-in-law and
his wife and their daughter, Patricia."
Blackmail. There was no other explanation. So he had found
out.
"That's right," she said casually. "I should have
mentioned that. I'll explain everything when you get back.
Have you any more news of the girl?"
"No, but she can't hide out for very long. The whole
country's looking for her."
"Let me hear from you as soon as she's found."
The line went dead.
Alan Tucker sat there, staring at the dead telephone in
his hand. She's a cool lady, he thought admiringly. I wonder
how she's going to feel about having a partner?
I made a mistake in sending him, Ellen Scott thought. Now
I'll have to stop him. And what was she going to do about the
girl? A nun! I won't judge her until I see her.
Her secretary buzzed her on the intercom.
"They're ready for you in the boardroom, Mrs. Scott."
"I'm coming."
Lucia and Rubio kept moving through the woods, stumbling
and slipping, fighting off tree limbs and bushes and insects,
and each step took them farther away from their pursuers.
Finally, Rubio said, "We can stop here. They won't find
us."
They were high in the mountains in the middle of a dense
forest.
Lucia lay down on the ground, fighting to catch her
breath. In her mind, she replayed the terrible scene she had
witnessed earlier. Tomás shot down without warning. And the
bastards intended to murder us all, Lucia thought. The only
reason she was still alive was because of the man sitting
beside her.
She watched Rubio as he got to his feet and scouted the
area around them.
"We can spend the rest of the night here, Sister."
"All right." She was impatient to get moving, but she knew
she needed to rest.
As though reading her mind, Rubio said, "We'll move on
again at dawn."
Lucia felt a gnawing in her stomach. Even as she was
thinking about it, Rubio said, "You must be hungry. I'll go
find some food for us. Will you be all right here by
yourself?"
"Yes. I'll be fine."
The big man crouched down beside her.
"Please try not to be frightened. I know how difficult it
must be for you to be out in the world again after all those
years in the convent. Everything must seem very strange to
you."
Lucia looked up at him and said tonelessly, "I'll try to
get used to it."
"You're very brave, Sister." He rose. "I'll be back soon."
She watched Rubio disappear into the trees. It was time to
make a decision, and she had two choices: She could escape
now, try to reach a nearby town and trade the gold cross for
a passport and enough money to get to Switzerland, or she
could stay with this man until they got farther away from the
soldiers. That will be safer, Lucia decided.
She heard a noise in the woods and swung around. It was
Rubio. He moved toward her, smiling. In his hand he held his
beret, which was bulging with tomatoes, grapes, and apples.
He sat down on the ground next to her. "Breakfast. A nice,
plump chicken was available, but the fire we would have
needed to cook it would have given us away. There is a farm
just down the mountainside."
Lucia stared at the contents of the beret. "It looks
great. I'm starving."
He handed her an apple. "Try this."
They had finished eating and Rubio was talking, but Lucia,
absorbed in her own thoughts, was not paying attention.
"Ten years, you said you were in the convent, Sister?"
Lucia was startled out of her reverie. "What?"
"You've been in the convent for ten years?"
"Oh. Yes."
He shook his head. "Then you have no idea what's been
happening in all that time."
"Uh—no."
"In the last ten years the world has changed a great deal,
Sister."
"Has it?"
"Sí." Rubio said earnestly, "Franco has died."
"No!"
"Oh, yes. Last year."
And named Don Juan Carlos his heir, she thought.
"You may find this very hard to believe, but a man walked
on the moon for the first time. That is the truth."
"Really?" Actually, two men, Lucia thought. What were
their names? Neil Armstrong and Buzz Something.
"Oh, yes. North Americans. And there is now a plane for
passengers that travels faster than sound."
"Incredible." I can't wait to ride the Concorde, Lucia
thought.
Rubio was childlike, so pleased to be bringing her up to
date on world events.
"There has been a revolution in Portugal, and in the
United States of America, their President Nixon was involved
in a big scandal and had to resign."
Rubio is really sweet, Lucia decided.
He took out a pack of Ducados cigarettes, the heavy black
tobacco of Spain. "I hope it won't offend you if I smoke,
Sister?"
"No," Lucia said. "Please go ahead."
She watched him light up, and the moment the smoke reached
her nostrils she was desperate to have a cigarette.
"Do you mind if I try one?"
He looked at her in surprise. "You wish to try a
cigarette?"
"Just to see what it's like," Lucia said quickly.
"Oh. Of course."
He held the pack toward her. She took out a cigarette, put
it between her lips, and he lit the end of it. Lucia inhaled
deeply, and as the smoke filled her lungs she felt wonderful.
Rubio was watching her, puzzled.
She coughed. "So that's what a cigarette tastes like."
"Do you like it?"
"Not really, but—"
Lucia took another deep, satisfying puff. God, how she had
missed this. But she knew she had to be careful. She did not
want to make him suspicious. So she put out the cigarette she
held clumsily in her fingers. She had been in the convent for
only a few months, and yet Rubio was right. It did seem
strange to be out in the world again. She wondered how Megan
and Graciela were doing. And what had happened to Sister
Teresa? Had she been captured by the soldiers?
Lucia's eyes were beginning to sting. It had been a long,
tension-filled night. "I think I may take a little nap."
"Don't worry. I will watch over you, Sister."
"Thank you," she said with a smile. Within moments she was
asleep.
Rubio Arzano looked down at her and thought: I have never
seen a woman like this one. She was spiritual, having
dedicated her life to God, and yet at the same time there was
an earthiness about her. And she had behaved this night as
bravely as any man. You are a very special woman, Rubio
Arzano thought as he watched her sleep. Little sister of
Jesus.
CHAPTER TWENTY
Colonel Fal Sostelo was on his tenth cigarette. I can't
put it off any longer, he decided. Bad news is best gotten
out of the way quickly. He took several deep breaths to calm
himself and then dialed a number. When he had Ramón Acoca on
the telephone, he said,"Colonel, we raided a terrorist camp
last night, where I was informed Jaime Miró was, and I
thought you should know about it."
There was a dangerous silence.
"Did you catch him?"
"No."
"You undertook this operation without consulting me?"
"There was no time to—"
"But there was time to let Miró escape." Acoca's voice was
filled with fury. "What led you to undertake this
magnificently executed operation?"
Colonel Sostelo swallowed. "We caught one of the nuns from
the convent. She led us to Miró and his men. We killed one of
them in the attack."
"But the others all escaped?"
"Yes, Colonel."
"Where is the nun now? Or did you let her get away, too?"
His tone was scathing.
"No, Colonel," Sostelo said quickly. "She is here at the
camp. We have been questioning her and—"
"Don't. I'll question her myself. I'll be there in one
hour. See if you can manage to hang on to her until I get
there." He slammed down the receiver.
Exactly one hour later, Colonel Ramón Acoca arrived at the
camp where they were holding Sister Teresa. With him were a
dozen of his men from the GOE.
"Bring the nun to me," Colonel Acoca ordered.
Sister Teresa was brought to the headquarters tent where
Acoca was waiting for her. He stood up politely when she
entered the tent and smiled.
"I am Colonel Acoca."
At last! "I knew you would come. God told me."
He nodded pleasantly."Did He? Good. Please sit down,
Sister."
Sister Teresa was too nervous to sit. "You must help me."
"We're going to help each other," the colonel assured her.
"You escaped from the Cistercian convent at Ávila, is that
correct?"
"Yes. It was terrible. All those men. They did godless
things and—" Her voice faltered.
And stupid things. We let you and the others escape. "How
did you get here, Sister?"
"God brought me here. He's testing me as He once tested—"
"Along with God, did some men also bring you here,
Sister?" Colonel Acoca asked patiently.
"Yes. They kidnapped me. I had to escape from them."
"You told Colonel Sostelo where he could find those men."
"Yes. The evil ones. Raoul is behind it all, you see. He
sent me a letter and said—"
"Sister, the man we're looking for in particular is Jaime
Miró. Have you seen him?"
She shivered. "Yes. Oh, yes. He—"
The colonel leaned forward. "Excellent. Now, you must tell
me where I can find him."
"He and the others are on their way to Èze."
He frowned, puzzled. "To Èze? To France?"
Her words were a wild babble. "Yes. Monique deserted
Raoul, and he sent the men to kidnap me because of the baby
so—"
He tried to control his growing impatience. "Miró and his
men are headed north. Èze is to the east."
"You must not let them take me back to Raoul. I don't want
to see him ever again. You can understand that. I couldn't
face him—"
Colonel Acoca said curtly, "I don't give a damn about this
Raoul. I want to know where I can find Jaime Miró."
"I told you. He is in Èze waiting for me. He wants to—"
"You're lying. I think you're trying to protect Miró. Now,
I don't want to hurt you, so I'm going to ask you once more.
Where is Jaime Miró?"
Sister Teresa stared at him helplessly. "I don't know."
she whispered. She looked around wildly. "I don't know."
"A moment ago you said he was in Èze." His voice was like
a whiplash.
"Yes. God told me."
Colonel Acoca had had enough. The woman was either
demented or a brilliant actress. Either way, she sickened him
with all her talk of God.
He turned to Patricko Arrieta, his aide. "The Sister's
memory needs prodding. Take her to the quartermaster's tent.
Perhaps you and your men can help her remember where Jaime
Miró is."
"Yes, Colonel."
Patricio Arrieta and the men with him had been part of the
group that had attacked the convent at Ávila. They felt
responsible for letting the four nuns escape. Well, we can
make up for that now, Arrieta thought.
He turned to Sister Teresa. "Come along with me, Sister."
"Yes." Dear blessed Jesus, thank You. She babbled on. "Are
we leaving now? You won't let them take me to Èze, will you?"
"No," Arrieta assured her. "You're not going to Èze."
The colonel is right, he thought. She is playing games
with us. Well, we'll show her some new games. I wonder if
she'll lie quietly, or if she'll scream?
When they reached the quartermaster's tent, Arrieta said,
"Sister, we're going to give you one last chance. Where is
Jaime Miró?"
Haven't they asked me that before? Or was that someone
else? Was it here or—it's all terribly confusing. "He
kidnapped me for Raoul because Monique deserted him and he
thought—"
"Bueno. If that's the way you want it," Arrieta said.
"We'll see if we can't refresh your memory for you."
"Yes. Please. Everything is so puzzling."
Half a dozen of Acoca's men had entered the tent, along
with some of Sostelo's uniformed soldiers.
Sister Teresa looked up. She blinked dazedly. "Are these
men going to take me to the convent now?"
"They're going to do better than that," Arrieta grinned.
"They're going to take you to heaven, Sister."
The men moved closer to her, surrounding her.
"That's a pretty dress you're wearing," a soldier said.
"Are you sure you're a nun, darling?"
"Oh, yes," she said. Raoul had called her darling. Was
this Raoul? "You see, we had to change clothes to escape from
the soldiers." But these were soldiers. Everything was
muddled.
One of the men pushed Teresa down on the cot. "You're no
beauty, but let's see what you look like underneath all those
clothes."
"What are you doing?"
He reached down and ripped off the top of her dress while
another man tore at her skirt.
"That's not a bad body for an old lady, is it, fellows?"
Teresa screamed. She looked up at the circle of men
surrounding her. God will strike them all dead. He will not
let them touch me, for I am His vessel. I am one with the
Lord, drinking from His fountain of purity.
One of the soldiers unfastened his belt. An instant later
she felt rough hands pushing her legs apart, and as the
soldier sprawled on top of her, she felt his hard flesh
penetrate her and again she screamed.
"Now, God! Punish them now."
She waited for the clap of thunder and the bright flash of
lightning that would destroy them all.
Another soldier climbed on top of her. A red haze came
over her eyes. Teresa lay there waiting for God to strike,
almost unaware of the men who were ravaging her. She no
longer felt the pain.
Lieutenant Arrieta was standing next to the cot. After
each man finished with Teresa, he said, "Have you had enough,
Sister? You can stop this at any time. All you have to do is
tell me where Jaime Miró is."
Sister Teresa did not hear him. She screamed in her mind:
Smite them down with Your power, Lord. Wipe them out as You
wiped out the other wicked ones at Sodom and Gomorrah.
Incredibly, He did not answer. It was not possible, for
God was everywhere. And then she knew. As the sixth man
entered her body, the epiphany suddenly came to her. God was
not listening to her because there was no God. All these
years she had deceived herself into worshiping a supreme
power and had served Him faithfully. But there was no supreme
power. If God exists, He would have saved me.
The red haze lifted from Sister Teresa's eyes and she got
a clear look at her surroundings for the first time. There
were at least a dozen soldiers in the tent waiting their turn
to rape her. Lieutenant Arrieta was standing at one side of
the bed watching. The soldiers in line were in full uniform,
not bothering to undress. As one soldier lifted himself from
Teresa, the next soldier squatted down over her and a moment
later penetrated her.
There is no God, but there is a Satan, and these are his
helpers, Sister Teresa thought. And they must die. All of
them.
As the soldier plunged into her, Sister Teresa grabbed the
pistol from his holster, and before anyone could react, she
turned it on Arrieta. The bullet hit him in the throat. She
then pointed the gun at the other soldiers and kept firing.
Four of them fell to the floor before the others came to
their senses and began to shoot at her. Because of the
soldier on top of her, they had difficulty aiming.
Sister Teresa and her last ravisher died at the same
moment.
CHAPTER TWENTY ONE
Jaime Miró came awake instantly, aroused by a movement at
the edge of the clearing. He slipped out of the sleeping bag
and rose, gun in hand. As he drew nearer he saw Megan on her
knees, praying. He stood there, studying her. There was an
unearthly beauty about the image of this lovely woman praying
in the forest in the middle of the night, and Jaime found
himself resenting it. If Felix Carpio hadn't blurted out that
we were headed for San Sebastian, I wouldn't have been
burdened with the sister in the first place.
It was imperative that he get to San Sebastian as quickly
as possible. Colonel Acoca and his men were all around them,
and it would have been difficult enough slipping through
their net alone. With the added burden of this woman to slow
him down, the danger was increased tenfold.
He walked over to Megan, angry, and his voice was harsher
than he had intended.
"I told you to get some sleep. I don't want you slowing us
down tomorrow."
Megan looked up and said quietly, "I'm sorry if I've
angered you."
"Sister, I save my anger for more important things. Your
kind just bore me. You spend your lives hiding behind stone
walls waiting for a free trip to the next world. You make me
sick to my stomach, all of you."
"Because we believe in the next world?"
"No, Sister. Because you don't believe in this one. You
ran away from it."
"To pray for you. We spend our lives praying for you."
"And you think that will solve the problems of the world?"
"In time, yes."
"There is no time. Your God can't hear your prayers
because of the noise of the cannons and the screams of
children being torn apart by bombs."
"When you have faith—"
"Oh, I have lots of faith, Sister. I have faith in what
I'm fighting for. I have faith in my men, and in my guns.
What I don't have faith in are people who walk on water. If
you think your God is listening now, tell him to get us to
the convent at Mendavia so I can be rid of you."
He was angry with himself for losing his temper. It wasn't
her fault that the Church had stood idly by while Franco's
Falangists had tortured and raped and murdered Basques and
Catalans. It wasn't her fault, Jaime told himself, that my
family was among the victims.
Jaime had been a young boy then, but it was a memory that
would be etched forever in his brain…
He had been awakened in the middle of the night by the
noise of the bombs falling. They fell from the sky like
deadly flowers of sound, planting their seeds of destruction
everywhere.
"Get up, Jaime. Hurry!"
The fear in his father's voice was more frightening to the
boy than the terrible roar of the aerial bombardment.
Guernica was a stronghold of the Basques and General
Franco had decided to make it an object lesson: "Destroy it."
The dreaded Nazi Condor Legion and half a dozen Italian
planes had mounted a concentrated attack, and they showed no
mercy. The townspeople tried to flee from the rain of death
pouring down from the skies, but there was no escape.
Jaime, his mother and father, and two older sisters fled
with the others.
"To the church," Jaime's father said. "They won't bomb the
church."
He was right. Everyone knew that the church was on the
side of the Caudillo, turning a blind eye to the savage
treatment of his enemies.
The Miró family headed for the church, fighting their way
through the panicky crowds, trying to flee.
The young boy held his father's hand in a fierce grip and
tried not to hear the terrible noises around him. He
remembered a time when his father was not frightened, was not
running away.
"Are we going to have a war, Papa?" he had once asked his
father.
"No, Jaime. That's just newspaper talk. All we're asking
is that the government give us a reasonable amount of
independence. The Basques and the Catalans are entitled to
have their own language and flag and holidays. We're still
one nation. And Spaniards will never fight against
Spaniards."
Jaime was too young then to understand it, but of course
there was more at stake than the issue of the Catalans and
Basques. It was a deep ideological conflict between the
Republican government and the right-wing Nationalists, and
what had started out as a spark of dissension quickly became
an uncontrollable conflagration that drew in a dozen foreign
powers.
When Franco's superior forces had defeated the Republicans
and the Nationalists were firmly in control of Spain, Franco
turned his attention to the intransigent Basques: "Punish
them."
And the blood continued to flow.
A hard core of Basque leaders had formed ETA, a movement
for a Basque Free State, and Jaime's father was asked to
join.
"No. It is wrong. We must gain what is rightfully ours by
peaceful means. War accomplishes nothing."
But the hawks proved stronger than the doves, and ETA
quickly became a powerful force.
Jaime had friends whose fathers were members of ETA, and
he listened to the stories of their heroic exploits.
"My father and a group of his friends bombed the
headquarters of the Guardia Civil," a friend would tell him.
Or: "Did you hear about the bank robbery in Barcelona? My
father did that. Now they can buy weapons to fight the
Fascists."
And Jaime's father was saying, "Violence is wrong. We must
negotiate."
"We blew up one of their factories in Madrid. Why isn't
your father on our side? Is he a coward?"
"Don't listen to your friends, Jaime," his father told
him. "What they are doing is criminal."
"Franco ordered a dozen Basques executed without even a
trial. We're staging a nationwide strike. Is your father
going to join us?"
"Papa—?"
"We are all Spaniards, Jaime. We must not let anyone
divide us."
And the boy was torn. Are my friends right? Is my father a
coward? Jaime believed his father.
And now—Armageddon. The world was collapsing around him.
The streets of Guernica were crowded with a screaming mob
trying to escape from the falling bombs. All around them
buildings and statues and sidewalks were exploding in showers
of concrete and blood.
Jaime and his mother and father and sisters had reached
the large church, the only building in the square still
standing. A dozen people were pounding on the door.
"Let us in! In the name of Jesus, open up!"
"What's going on?" cried Jaime's father.
"The priests have locked the church. They won't let us
in."
"Let's break the door in!"
"No!"
Jaime looked at his father in surprise.
"We don't break into God's house," his father said. "He
will protect us wherever we are."
Too late, they saw the squad of Falangists appear from
around the corner and open machine-gun fire on them, mowing
down the unarmed crowd of men, women, and children in the
square. Even as Jaime's father felt the bullets tear into
him, he grabbed his son and pushed him down to safety, his
own body shielding Jaime from the deadly hail of bullets.
An eerie silence seemed to blanket the world after the
attack. The sounds of guns and running feet and screams
vanished, a trick of magic. Jaime opened his eyes and lay
there for a long time, feeling the weight of his father's
body on him like a loving blanket. His father and mother and
sisters were dead, along with hundreds of others. And in
front of their bodies were the locked doors of the church.
Late that night, Jaime made his way out of the city, and
two days later when he reached Bilbao, he joined ETA.
The recruiting officer had looked at him and said, "You're
too young to join, son. You should be in school."
"You're going to be my school," Jaime Miró said quietly.
"You're going to teach me how to fight to avenge the murder
of my family."
He never looked back. He was battling for himself and for
his family, and his exploits became legendary. Jaime planned
and executed daring raids against factories and banks, and
carried out the executions of the oppressors. When any of his
men were captured, he conducted daredevil missions to rescue
them.
When Jaime heard about the GOE being formed to pursue
Basques, he smiled and said, "Good. They've noticed."
He never asked himself if the risks he took had anything
to do with the cries of "Your father is a coward," or if he
was trying to prove anything to himself and to others. It was
enough that he proved his bravery again and again, that he
was not afraid to risk his life for what he believed in.
Now, because one of his men had talked too freely, Jaime
found himself saddled with a nun.
It's ironic that her Church is on our side now. But it's
much too late, unless they can arrange a Second Coming and
include my mother and father and sisters, he thought
bitterly.
They walked through the woods at night, the white
moonlight dappling the forest around them. They avoided the
towns and main roads, alert for any sign of danger. Jaime
ignored Megan. He walked with Felix, talking about past
adventures, and Megan found herself intrigued. She had never
known anyone like Jaime Miró. He was filled with such
self-assurance.
If anyone can get me to Mendavia, Megan thought, this man
can.
There had been moments when Jaime had felt pity for the
sister, and even a reluctant admiration for the way she
handled herself on the arduous journey. He wondered how the
other men were getting along with their charges from God.
At least he had Amparo Jirón. At night Jaime found her a
great comfort.
She's as dedicated as I am, Jaime thought. She has even
more reason than I do to hate the government.
Amparo's entire family had been wiped out by the
Nationalist Army. She was fiercely independent, and filled
with a deep passion.
At dawn they were nearing Salamanca, on the banks of the
Tormes River.
"Students come here from all over Spain," Felix explained
to Megan, "to attend the university. It's probably the best
in all of Spain."
Jaime was not listening. He was concentrating on his next
move. If I were the hunter, where would I set my trap?
He turned to Felix. "We'll skip Salamanca. There's a
parador just outside town. We will stop there."
The parador was a small inn set away from the mainstream
of tourist traffic. Stone steps led to the lobby, which was
guarded by an ancient knight in armor.
As the group approached the entrance, Jaime said to the
two women, "Wait here." He nodded to Felix Carpio and the two
men disappeared.
"Where are they going?" Megan asked.
Amparo Jirón gave her a contemptuous look. "Maybe they
went looking for your God."
"I hope they find Him," Megan said evenly.
Ten minutes later the men were back.
"All clear," Jaime told Amparo. "You and the sister will
share a room. Felix will stay with me." He handed her a key.
Amparo said petulantly, "Querido, I want to stay with you,
not—"
"Do as I say. Keep an eye on her."
Amparo turned to Megan. "Bueno. Come along, Sister."
Megan followed Amparo into the parador and up the stairs.
The room was one of a dozen set in a row along the gray,
bare upstairs corridor. Amparo unlocked the door and the two
women entered. The room was small and drab and sparsely
furnished, with wooden floors, stucco walls, a bed, a small
cot, a battered dressing table, and two chairs.
Megan looked around the room and exclaimed, "It's lovely."
Amparo Jirón swung around in anger, thinking that Megan
was being sarcastic."Who the hell are you to complain
about—?"
"It's so large," Megan went on.
Amparo looked at her a moment, then laughed. Of course it
would seem large compared to the cells that the sisters lived
in.
Amparo started to get undressed.
Megan could not help staring at her. It was the first time
she had really looked at Amparo Jirón in the daylight. The
woman was beautiful, in an earthy way. She had red hair,
white skin, and was full-breasted, with a small waist and
hips that swayed as she moved.
Amparo saw her watching. "Sister—would you tell me
something? Why would anyone join a convent?"
It was a simple question to answer. "What could be more
wonderful than to devote oneself to the glory of God?"
"Offhand, I could think of a thousand things." Amparo
walked over to the bed and sat down. "You can sleep on the
cot. From what I've heard about convents, your God doesn't
want you to be too comfortable."
Megan smiled. "It doesn't matter. I'm comfortable inside."
In their room across the corridor, Jaime Miró was
stretching out on the bed. Felix Carpio was trying to get
settled on the small cot. Both men were fully dressed.
Jaime's gun was under his pillow. Felix's gun was on the
small, battered table next to him.
"What do you think makes them do it?" Felix wondered
aloud.
"Do what, amigo?"
"Lock themselves up in a convent all their lives like
prisoners."
Jaime Miró shrugged. "Ask the sister. I wish to hell we
were traveling alone. I have a bad feeling about this."
"Jaime, God will thank us for this good deed."
"Do you really believe that? Don't make me laugh."
Felix did not pursue the subject. It was not tactful to
discuss the Catholic Church with Jaime. The two men were
silent, each preoccupied with his own thoughts.
Felix Carpio was thinking: God put the sisters in our
hands. We must get them to a convent safely.
Jaime was thinking about Amparo. He wanted her badly now.
That damned nun. He started to pull up the covers when he
realized there was something he still had to do.
In the small, dark lobby downstairs, the room clerk sat
quietly, waiting until he was sure that the new guests were
asleep. His heart was pounding as he picked up the telephone
and dialed a number.
A lazy voice answered, "Police headquarters." The clerk
whispered into the telephone to his nephew, "Florian, I have
Jaime Miró and three of his people here. How would you like
the honor of capturing them?"
CHAPTER TWENTY TWO
Ninety miles to the east, in a wooded area along the way
to Penafiel, Lucia Carmine was asleep. Rubio Arzano sat
watching her, reluctant to awaken her. She sleeps like an
angel, he thought.
But it was almost dawn, time to be moving on.
Rubio leaned over and whispered gently in her ear, "Sister
Lucia…"
Lucia opened her eyes.
"It is time for us to go."
She yawned and stretched lazily. The blouse she was
wearing had become unbuttoned and part of her breast was
showing. Rubio hastily looked away.
I must guard my thoughts. She is the bride of Jesus.
"Sister…"
"Yes?"
"I—I wonder if I could ask a favor of you." He was almost
blushing.
"Yes?"
"I—it's been a long time since I prayed. But I was brought
up a Catholic. Would you mind saying a prayer?"
That was the last thing Lucia had expected.
How long has it been since I said a prayer! she wondered.
The convent did not count. While the others were praying, her
mind had been busy with plans to escape.
"I—I don't—"
"I'm sure it would make us both feel better."
How could she explain that she did not remember any
prayers? "I—er—" Yes. There was one she remembered. She had
been a little girl kneeling at her bedside and her father had
stood beside her, ready to tuck her into bed. Slowly, the
words of the Twenty-third Psalm started to come back to her.
"The Lord is my shepherd; I shall not want. He maketh me
to lie down in green pastures: he leadeth me beside the still
waters. He restoreth my soul: he leadeth me in the paths of
righteousness for his name's sake…"
Memories came flooding back.
She and her father had owned the world. And he had been so
proud of her.
You were born under a lucky star, faccia d'angelo.
And hearing that, Lucia had felt lucky and beautiful.
Nothing could ever hurt her. Was she not the beautiful
daughter of the great Angelo Carmine?
"Yea, though I walk through the valley of the shadow of
death, I will fear no evil…"
The evil ones were the enemies of her father and
brothers.
And she had made them pay.
"For thou art with me; thy rod and thy staff they comfort
me…"
Where was God when I needed comforting?
"Thou preparest a table before me in the presence of mine
enemies: thou anointest my head with oil; my cup runneth
over…"
She was speaking more slowly now, her voice a whisper.
What had happened, she wondered, to the little girl in the
white communion dress? The future had been so golden. Somehow
it had all gone wrong. Everything. I've lost my father and my
brothers and myself.
In the convent she had not thought about God. But now, out
here with this simple peasant…
Would you mind saying a prayer for us?
Lucia went on. "Surely goodness and mercy shall follow me
all the days of my life: and I will dwell in the house of the
Lord for ever."
Rubio was watching her, moved.
"Thank you, Sister."
Lucia nodded, unable to speak. What's the matter with me?
Lucia asked herself.
"Are you ready, Sister?"
She looked at Rubio Arzano and said, "Yes. I'm ready."
Five minutes later they were on their way.
They were caught in a sudden downpour and took shelter in
a deserted cabin. The rain beat against the roof and sides of
the cabin like angry fists.
"Do you think the storm will ever let up?"
Rubio smiled. "It's not a real storm, Sister. It's what we
Basques call a sirimiri. It will stop as quickly as it
started. The earth is dry right now. It needs this rain."
"Really?"
"Yes. I'm a farmer."
It shows, Lucia thought.
"Forgive me for saying this, Sister, but you and I have a
lot in common."
Lucia looked over at the bumbling hayseed and thought:
That will be the day. "We do?"
"Yes. I truly believe that in many ways being on a farm
must be much like being in a convent."
The connection eluded her. "I don't understand."
"Well, Sister, in a convent you think a lot about God and
His miracles. Is that not true?"
"Yes."
"In a sense a farm is God. One is surrounded by creation.
All the things that grow from God's earth, whether it's wheat
or olives or grapes—everything comes from God, does it not?
These are all miracles, and you watch them happen every day,
and because you help them grow, you are a part of the
miracle."
Lucia had to smile at the enthusiasm in his voice.
Suddenly the rain stopped.
"We can move on now, Sister."
"We will be coming to the Duero River soon," Rubio said.
"The Penafiel Falls is just ahead of us. We will go on to
Aranda de Duero and then Logrono, where we will meet the
others."
You'll be going to those places, Lucia thought. And good
luck to you. I'll be in Switzerland, my friend.
They heard the sound of the falls half an hour before they
reached them. The Penafiel Falls was a beautiful sight
cascading down into the swift-moving river. The roar of it
was almost deafening.
"I want to bathe," Lucia said. It seemed years since she
had last had a bath.
Rubio Arzano stared at her. "Here?"
No, you idiot, in Rome. "Yes."
"Be careful. The river is swollen because of the rain."
"Don't worry." She stood there, patiently waiting.
"Oh. I will go away while you undress."
"Stay nearby," Lucia said quickly. There were probably
wild animals in the woods.
As Lucia started to undress, Rubio hastily walked a few
yards away and turned his back.
"Don't go in too far, Sister," he called. "The river is
treacherous."
Lucia put down the wrapped cross where she could keep an
eye on it. The cool morning air felt wonderful on her naked
body. When she had stripped completely, she stepped into the
water. It was cold and invigorating. She turned and saw that
Rubio was steadfastly looking in the other direction, his
back turned to her. She smiled to herself. All the other men
she had known would be feasting their eyes.
She stepped in deeper, avoiding the rocks that were all
around, and splashed the water over herself, feeling the
rushing river tugging hard at her legs.
A few feet away a small tree was being swept downstream.
As Lucia turned to watch it, she suddenly lost her balance
and slipped, screaming. She fell hard, slamming her head
against a boulder.
Rubio turned and watched in horror as Lucia disappeared
downstream in the raging waters.
CHAPTER TWENTY THREE
When Sergeant Florian Santiago replaced the receiver in
the police station in Salamanca, his hands were trembling.
I have Jaime Miró and three of his people here. How would
you like the honor of capturing them?
The government had posted a large reward for the head of
Jaime Miró, and now the Basque outlaw was in his hands. The
reward money would change his whole life. He could afford to
send his children to a better school, he could buy a washing
machine for his wife and jewelry for his mistress. Of course,
he would have to share some of the reward money with his
uncle. I'll give him twenty percent, Santiago thought. Or
maybe ten percent.
He was well aware of Jaime Miró's reputation, and he had
no intention of risking his life trying to capture the
terrorist. Let others face the danger and give me the reward.
He sat at his desk deciding the best way to handle the
situation. Colonel Acoca's name immediately sprang to mind.
Everybody knew there was a blood vendetta between the colonel
and the outlaw. Besides, the colonel had the whole GOE at his
command. Yes, that was definitely the way to proceed.
He picked up the telephone, and ten minutes later he was
speaking to the colonel himself.
"This is Sergeant Florian Santiago calling from the police
station at Salamanca. I have tracked down Jaime Miró."
Acoca fought to keep his voice even. "Are you certain of
this?"
"Yes, Colonel. He is at the Parador Nacional Raimundo de
Borgon, just outside of town. He is spending the night. My
uncle is the room clerk. He telephoned me himself. There is
another man and two women with Miró."
"Your uncle is positive it is Miró?"
"Yes, Colonel. He and the others are sleeping in the two
back rooms on the second floor of the inn."
Acoca said, "Listen to me very carefully, Sergeant. I want
you to go to the parador immediately and stand watch outside
to make certain none of them leaves. I should be able to
reach there in an hour. You are not to go inside. And stay
out of sight. Is that clear?"
"Yes, sir. I will leave immediately." He hesitated.
"Colonel, about the reward money—"
"When we catch Miró, it's yours."
"Thank you, Colonel. I am most—"
"Go."
"Yes, sir."
Florian Santiago replaced the receiver. He was tempted to
call his mistress to tell her the exciting news, but that
could wait. He would surprise her later. Meanwhile, he had a
job to do.
He summoned one of the policemen on duty upstairs.
"Take over the desk. I have an errand to do. I'll be back
in a few hours." And I'll come back a rich man, he thought.
The first thing I'll buy will be a new car—a Seat. A blue
one. No, maybe it will be white.
Colonel Ramón Acoca replaced the receiver and sat still,
Setting his brain go to work. This time there would be no
slipup. It was the final move in the chess game between them.
He would have to proceed very carefully. Miró would have
sentries alert for trouble.
Acoca called in his aide-de-camp.
"Yes, Colonel?"
"Pick out two dozen of your best marksmen. See that
they're armed with automatic weapons. We're leaving for
Salamanca in fifteen minutes."
"Yes, sir."
There would be no escape for Miró. The colonel was already
planning the raid in his mind. The parador would be
completely surrounded by a cordon that would move in quickly
and quietly. A sneak attack before the butcher has a chance
to murder any more of my men. We'll kill them all in their
sleep.
Fifteen minutes later, his aide returned. "We're ready to
move, Colonel."
Sergeant Santiago lost no time in getting to the parodor.
Even without the colonel's warning, he had no intention of
going after the terrorists. But now, in obedience to Acoca's
orders, he stood in the shadows twenty yards away from the
inn, where he had a good view of the front door. There was a
chill in the night air, but the thought of the reward money
kept Santiago warm. He wondered whether the two women inside
were pretty and whether they were in bed with the men. Of one
thing Santiago was certain: In a few hours, they would all be
dead.
The army truck moved into town quietly and drove toward
the parador.
Colonel Acoca flicked on a flashlight and looked at his
map, and when they were a mile from the inn, he said, "Stop
here. We'll walk the rest of the way. Maintain silence."
Santiago was unaware of their approach until a voice in
his ear startled him with, "Who are you?"
He turned and found himself facing Colonel Ramón Acoca. My
God, he's frightening-looking, Santiago thought.
"I am Sergeant Santiago, sir."
"Has anyone left the inn?"
"No, sir. They're all inside, probably asleep by now."
The colonel turned to his aide. "I want half our men to
form a perimeter around the hotel. If anyone tries to escape,
they are to shoot to kill. The others will come with me. The
fugitives are in the two back bedrooms upstairs. Let's go."
Santiago watched as the colonel and his men entered the
front door of the parador, moving quietly. He wondered if
there would be a lot of shooting. And if there was, he
wondered if his uncle might be lulled in the cross fire. That
would be a pity. But on the other hand, there would be no one
he would have to share the reward money with.
When the colonel and his men reached the top of the
stairs, Acoca whispered, "Take no chances. Open fire as soon
as you see them."
His aide asked, "Colonel, would you like me to go ahead of
you?"
"No." He intended to have the pleasure of killing Jaime
Miró himself.
At the end of the hall were the two rooms where Miró and
his group were staying. Acoca silently motioned six of his
men to cover one door and the other six to cover the other
door.
"Now!" he screamed.
It was the moment he had been burning for. At his signal,
the soldiers kicked in both doors simultaneously and rushed
into the rooms, weapons ready. They stood there in the middle
of the empty rooms, staring at the rumpled beds.
"Spread out. Hurry! Downstairs!" Acoca shrieked.
The soldiers raced through every room in the hotel,
smashing doors open, waking up startled guests. Jaime Miró
and the others were nowhere to be found. The colonel stormed
downstairs to confront the room clerk. There was no one in
the lobby.
"Hello," he called out. "Hello." There was no response.
The coward was hiding.
One of the soldiers was staring at the floor behind the
desk. "Colonel…"
Acoca strode over to his side and stared down at the
floor. The bound and gagged body of the clerk was slumped
against the wall. A sign had been hung around his neck. It
read: PLEASE DO NOT DISTURB.
CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR
Rubio Arzano watched in horror as Lucia disappeared under
the rushing waters and was swept downstream. In a split
second he turned to race along the river bank, leaping over
small logs and bushes. At the first bend of the river, he
caught a glimpse of Lucia's body coming toward him. Diving
in, he swam frantically to reach her, struggling against the
powerful current. It was almost impossible. He felt himself
being pulled away. Lucia was only ten feet away from him, but
it seemed like miles. He made one last heroic effort and
grabbed her arm, his fingers almost slipping away. He held
her in a death grip as he grappled his way to the safety of
the shore.
When Rubio finally reached the river bank, he pulled Lucia
up on the grass and lay there, fighting for breath. She was
unconscious and not breathing. Rubio turned her over on her
stomach, straddled her, and began to apply pressure to her
lungs. A minute went by, then two, and just as he was
beginning to despair, a stream of water gushed out of her
mouth and she groaned. Rubio uttered a prayer of thanks.
He kept up the pressure, gentler now, until her heartbeat
was steady. When she began to shiver from the cold, Rubio
hurried over to a clump of trees and pulled down handfuls of
leaves. He carried them over to her and started to dry her
body with them. He was also wet and cold, and his clothes
were soaked, but he paid no attention. He had been panicky
with fear that Sister Lucia would die. Now, as he gently
rubbed her naked body with the dry leaves, unworthy thoughts
came into his mind.
She has the body of a goddess. Forgive me, Lord, she
belongs to You, and I must not think these wicked thoughts…
Lucia was gradually awakened by the gentle stroking of her
body. She was on the beach with Ivo, and his soft tongue was
moving down her body. Oh, yes, she thought. Oh, yes. Don't
stop, caro. She was aroused even before she opened her eyes.
When Lucia had fallen into the river, her last thought had
been that she was going to die. But she was alive, and she
found herself looking up at the man who had saved her.
Without even thinking, she reached out and pulled Rubio down
to her. There was a look of shocked surprise on his face.
"Sister—" he protested. "We can't—"
"Sh!"
Her lips were on his, fierce and hungry and demanding, and
her tongue was exploring his mouth. It was too much for
Rubio.
"Hurry," Lucia whispered. "Hurry."
She watched as Rubio nervously stripped off his wet
clothes. He deserves a reward, she thought. So do I.
As Rubio moved hesitantly toward her, he said, "Sister, we
shouldn't—"
Lucia was in no mood for conversation. She felt him join
his body to hers in a timeless, mindless ritual, and she gave
herself up to the glorious sensations that flooded her. It
was all the sweeter because of her close brush with death.
Rubio was a surprisingly good lover, both gentle and
fierce at the same time. He had a vulnerability that took
Lucia completely by surprise. And there was a look of such
tenderness in his eyes that she felt a sudden lump in her
throat.
I hope the big oaf isn't falling in love with me. He's so
eager to please me. When was the last time a man cared about
pleasing me? Lucia wondered. And she thought of her father.
And she wondered how he would have liked Rubio Arzano. And
then she wondered why she wondered whether her father would
have liked Rubio Arzano. I must be crazy. This man is a
farmer. I'm Lucia Carmine, the daughter of Angela Carmine.
Rubio's life has nothing to do with my life. We were thrown
together by a stupid accident of fate.
Rubio was holding her and saying over and over, "Lucia. My
Lucia."
And the shining in his eyes told her everything he felt.
He's so dear, she thought. And then: What is the matter with
me? Why am I even thinking about him like this? I'm running
away from the police and—She suddenly remembered the gold
cross and gasped. Oh, my God! How could I have forgotten it
even for a moment?
She sat up quickly. "Rubio, I left a—a package on the bank
of the river back there. Would you bring it to me, please?
And my clothes?"
"Of course. I'll be right back."
Lucia sat there waiting, frantic that something might have
happened to the cross. What if it was gone? What if someone
had come along and picked it up?
It was with an enormous feeling of relief that Lucia
watched Rubio return with the wrapped cross under his arm. I
mustn't let it out of my sight again, she thought. "Thank
you," she said to Rubio.
Rubio handed Lucia her clothes. She looked up at him and
said softly, "I won't need these right away."
The sun on her naked skin made Lucia feel lazy and warm,
and being in Rubio's arms was a wonderful comfort. It was as
though they had found a peaceful oasis. The dangers they had
been running away from seemed light-years away.
"Tell me about your farm," Lucia said idly.
His face lit up, and there was pride in his voice. "It was
a small farm outside a little village near Bilbao. It was in
my family for generations."
"What happened to it?"
His expression darkened. "Because I am Basque, the
government in Madrid punished me with extra taxes. When I
refused to pay, they confiscated the farm. That was when I
met Jaime Miró. I joined him to fight against the government
for what is right. I have a mother and two sisters, and one
day we will have our farm back, and I will run it again."
Lucia thought of her father and two brothers locked away
in a prison forever. "Are you close to your family?"
Rubio smiled warmly. "Of course. Families are our first
love, are they not?"
Yes, Lucia thought. But I will never see mine again.
"Tell me about your family, Lucia," he said. "Before you
joined the convent, were you close to them?"
The conversation was taking a dangerous turn. What can I
tell him? My father is a Mafioso. He and my two brothers are
in prison for murder. "Yes—we are very close."
"What does your father do?"
"He—he's a businessman."
"Do you have brothers and sisters?"
"I have two brothers. They work for him."
"Lucia, why did you enter the convent?"
Because the police are looking for me for murdering two
men. I've got to stop this conversation, Lucia thought. Aloud
she said, "I needed to get away." That's close enough to the
truth.
"You felt the world was—was too much for you?"
"Something like that."
"I have no right to say this, Lucia, but I am in love with
you."
"Rubio—"
"I want to marry you. In all my life, I have never said
that to another woman."
There was something so touching and earnest about him. He
doesn't know how to play games, she thought. I must be
careful not to hurt him. But the idea of Angelo Carmine's
daughter being a farmer's wife! Lucia almost laughed aloud.
Rubio misunderstood the smile on her face. "I will not
live in hiding forever. The government will have to make
peace with us. Then I will return to my farm. Querida— I want
to spend the rest of my life making you happy. We will have
many children and the girls will all look like you…"
I can't let him go on like this, Lucia decided. I should
stop him now. But somehow she could not bring herself to do
it. She listened to Rubio paint romantic pictures of their
life together, and she found herself almost wishing it could
happen. She was so tired of running away. It would be
wonderful to find a haven where she could be safe, taken care
of by someone who loved her. I must be losing my mind.
"Let's not talk about it now," Lucia said. "We should be
moving on."
They traveled northeast, following the winding banks of
the Duero River, with its hilly countryside and lush green
trees. They stopped at the picturesque village of Villalba de
Duero to buy bread, cheese, and wine, and had an idyllic
picnic in a grassy meadow.
Lucia felt content at Rubio's side. There was a quiet
strength about him that seemed to give her strength. He's not
for me, but he's going to make some lucky woman very happy,
she thought.
When they had finished eating, Rubio said, "The next town
is Aranda de Duero. It's a fairly large city. It would be
best if we skirted around it to avoid the GOE and the
soldiers."
It was the moment of truth, time to leave him. She had
been waiting for them to reach a large city. Rubio Arzano and
his farm were a dream; escaping to Switzerland was the
reality. Lucia knew how much she was going to hurt him, and
she could not bear to look into his eyes when she said,
"Rubio—I'd like us to go into town."
He frowned. "That could be dangerous, querida. The
soldiers—"
"They won't be looking for us there." She thought quickly.
"Besides, I—I need a change of clothes. I can't keep going on
in this."
The idea of entering the city disturbed Rubio, but all he
said was, "If that is what you wish."
In the distance, the walls and buildings of Aranda de
Duero loomed before them like a manmade mountain hewn out of
the earth.
Rubio tried one more time. "Lucia—you're sure you must go
into the city?"
"Yes. I'm sure."
The two of them crossed the long bridge that led to the
main street, Avenida Castilla, and headed for the center of
town. They passed a sugar factory and churches and poultry
shops, and the air was thick with a variety of smells. Shops
and apartment buildings lined the avenue. They walked slowly,
careful not to draw attention to themselves. Finally, to her
relief, Lucia saw what she had been looking for—a sign that
read CASA DE EMPENOS—a pawnshop. She said nothing.
They reached the village square, with its shops and
markets and bars, and they passed the Taberna Cueva, with its
long bar and wooden tables. There was a jukebox inside, and
hanging from the oak-beam ceiling were hams and strings of
garlic.
Lucia saw her opportunity. "I'm thirsty, Rubio," she said.
"Can we go in there?"
"Of course."
He took her arm and led her inside.
There were half a dozen men crowded around the bar. Lucia
and Rubio took a table in the corner.
"What would you like, querida?"
"Order a glass of wine for me, please. I'll be right back.
There's something I have to do."
She rose and walked out into the street, leaving Rubio
staring after her, puzzled.
Outside, Lucia turned and hurried back to the Casa de
Empenos, clutching her tightly wrapped package. Across the
street she saw a door with a black sign in white lettering
that read POLÍCIA. She stared at it a moment, her heart
skipping a beat, then skirted it and entered the pawnshop.
A shrunken man with a large head stood behind the counter,
barely visible.
"Buenos dias, senorita."
"'Buenos dias, senor. I have something I would like to
sell." She was so nervous, she had to press her knees
together to keep them from shaking.
"Sí?"
Lucia unwrapped the gold cross and held it out.
"Would—would you be interested in buying this?"
The pawnbroker took it in his hands, and Lucia watched the
light that came into his eyes.
"May I ask where you acquired this?"
"It was left to me by an uncle who just died." Her throat
was so dry she could hardly speak.
The man fingered the cross, turning it over in his hands
slowly. "How much are you asking for it?"
Her dream was coming to life. "I want two hundred fifty
thousand pesetas."
He frowned and shook his head. "No. It is worth only a
hundred thousand pesetas."
"I would sell my body first."
"Perhaps I could go as high as one hundred fifty thousand
pesetas."
"I would rather melt it down and let the gold run in the
streets."
"Two hundred thousand pesetas. That is my last offer."
Lucia took the gold cross from him. "You are robbing me
blind, but I will accept it."
She could see the excitement in his face. "Bueno,
senorita." He reached for the cross.
Lucia pulled it back. "There is a condition."
"What condition would that be, senorita?"
"My passport was stolen. I need a new one in order to get
out of the country to visit my stricken aunt."
He was studying her now, his eyes wise. He nodded. "I
see."
"If you can help me with my problem, then the cross is
yours."
He sighed."Passports are difficult to come by, senorita.
The authorities are very strict."
Lucia watched him, saying nothing.
"I don't see how I can help you."
"Thank you anyway, senor." She started toward the door.
He let her reach it before he said, "Momentito."
Lucia stopped.
"Something has just occurred to me. I have a cousin who is
sometimes involved in delicate matters like this. He is a
distant cousin, you understand."
"I understand."
"I could speak to him. When do you require this passport?"
"Today."
The large head nodded slowly. "And if I can do this thing,
we have a deal?"
"When I get my passport."
"Agreed. Come back at eight o'clock and my cousin will be
here. He will arrange to take the necessary photograph and
insert it in the passport."
Lucia could feel her heart pounding. "Thank you, senor."
"Would you like to leave the cross here for safekeeping?"
"It will be safe with me."
"Eight o'clock, then. Hasta luego."
She left the shop. Outside she carefully avoided the
police station and headed back to the taberna, where Rubio
was waiting. Her footsteps slowed. She had finally succeeded.
With the money from the cross, she would be able to get to
Switzerland and freedom. She should have been happy, but
instead she felt strangely depressed.
What's wrong with me? I'm on my way. Rubio will get over
me soon enough. He'll find someone else.
Then she remembered the look in his eyes when he had said,
"I want to marry you. In all my life, I have never said that
to another woman.'"
Damn the man, she thought. Well, he's not my problem.
CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE
The news media were in a feeding frenzy. The head-lines
tumbled over one another. There was the attack on the
convent, the wholesale arrest of the nuns for sheltering
terrorists, the escape of four nuns, the shooting of five
soldiers by one of the nuns before she was shot and killed.
The international news wires were on fire.
Reporters had arrived in Madrid from all over the world,
and Prime Minister Leopoldo Martinez, in an effort to cool
things down, had agreed to a press conference. Almost four
dozen reporters from all over the world were gathered in his
office. Colonels Ramón Acoca and Fal Sostelo were at his
side. The prime minister had seen that afternoon's headline
in the London Times:
TERRORISTS AND NUNS EVADE SPAIN'S ARMY AND POLICE.
A reporter from Paris Match was asking, "Mr. Prime
Minister, do you have any idea where the missing nuns are
now?"
Prime Minister Martinez replied, "Colonel Acoca is in
charge of the search operation. I will let him answer that."
Acoca said, "We have reason to believe that they are in
the hands of the Basque terrorists. I'm also sorry to say
there is evidence to indicate that the nuns are collaborating
with the terrorists."
The reporters were scribbling feverishly.
"What about the shooting of Sister Teresa and the
soldiers?"
"We have information that Sister Teresa was working with
Jaime Miró. Under the pretext of helping us find Miró, she
went into an army camp and shot five soldiers before she
could be stopped. I can assure you that the army and the GOE
are bending every effort to bring the criminals to justice."
"And the nuns who were arrested and taken to Madrid?"
"They are being interrogated," Acoca said.
The prime minister was anxious to end the meeting. It was
difficult for him to keep his temper in check. The failure to
locate the nuns or capture the terrorists made his
government—and himself—look inept and foolish, and the press
was taking full advantage of the situation.
"Can you tell us anything about the backgrounds of the
four nuns who escaped, Prime Minister?" asked a reporter from
Oggi.
"I'm sorry. I can give you no further information. I
repeat, ladies and gentlemen, the government is doing
everything in its power to find the nuns."
"Prime Minister, there have been reports about the
brutality of the attack on the convent at Ávila. Would you
respond to that?"
It was a sore point with Martinez because it was true.
Colonel Acoca had grossly exceeded his authority. But he
would deal with the colonel later. This was the time for a
show of unity.
He turned to the colonel and said smoothly, "Colonel Acoca
can respond to that."
Acoca said, "I too have heard those unfounded reports. The
facts are simple. We received reliable information that the
terrorist Jaime Miró and a dozen of his men were hiding in
the Cistercian convent and that they were heavily armed. By
the time we raided the convent, they had fled."
"Colonel, we heard that some of your men molested—"
"That is an outrageous accusation."
Prime Minister Martinez said, "Thank you, ladies and
gentlemen. That will be all. You will be informed of any
further developments."
When the reporters had left, the prime minister turned to
Colonels Acoca and Sostelo. "They're making us look like
savages in the eyes of the world."
Acoca had not the slightest interest in the prime
minister's opinion. What concerned him was a telephone call
he had received in the middle of the night.
"Colonel Acoca?"
It was a voice he was all too familiar with. He was
instantly wide awake.
"Yes, sir."
"We're disappointed in you. We had hoped to see some
results before this."
"Sir, I'm closing in on them." He found that he was
perspiring heavily. "I ask that you be a little more patient.
I won't disappoint you." He held his breath, waiting for a
response.
"You're running out of time."
The line went dead.
Colonel Acoca replaced the receiver and sat there,
frustrated. Where is that bastard Miró?
CHAPTER TWENTY SIX
I'm going to kill her, Ricardo Mellado thought. I could
strangle her with my bare hands, throw her off the mountain,
or simply shoot her. No, I think strangling her would give me
the greatest pleasure.
Sister Graciela was the most exasperating human being he
had ever encountered. She was impossible. In the beginning,
when Jaime Miró had assigned him to escort her, Ricardo
Mellado had been pleased. True, she was a nun, but she was
also the most ravishing beauty he had ever laid eyes on. He
was determined to get to know her, to find out why she had
decided to lock up all that exquisite beauty behind convent
walls for the rest of her life. Under the skirt and blouse
she was wearing, he could discern the rich, nubile curves of
a woman. It's going to be a very interesting trip, Ricardo
had decided.
But things had taken a totally unexpected turn. The
problem was that Sister Gracieia refused to speak to him. She
had not said one word since their journey began, and what
completely baffled Ricardo was that she did not appear to be
angry, frightened, or upset. Not at all. She simply retreated
into some remote part of herself and appeared totally
uninterested in him and in what was going on around her. They
had traveled at a good pace, walking along hot, dusty side
roads, past fields of wheat, rippling golden in the sunlight,
and fields of barley, oats, and grapevines. They skirted the
little villages along the way and went by fields of
sunflowers with their wide yellow faces following the sun.
When they crossed the Moros River, Ricardo asked, "Would
you like to rest awhile, Sister?"
Silence.
They were approaching Segovia before heading northeast to
the snow-capped Guadarrama mountains. Ricardo kept trying to
make polite conversation, but it was completely hopeless.
"We will be at Segovia soon, Sister."
No reaction.
What could I have done to offend her? "Are you hungry,
Sister?"
Nothing.
It was as though he were not there. He had never felt so
frustrated in his life. Perhaps the woman is retarded, he
thought. That must be the answer. God gave her an unearthly
beauty and then cursed her with a feeble mind. But he did not
believe it.
When they reached the outskirts of Segovia, Ricardo noted
that the town was crowded, which meant that the Guardia Civil
would be even more alert than usual.
As they approached the Plaza del Conde de Cheste, he saw
soldiers strolling in their direction. He whispered, "Hold my
hand, Sister. We must look like two lovers out for a stroll."
She ignored him.
Jesus, Ricardo thought. Maybe she's deaf and dumb,
He reached over and took her hand in his, and her sudden
fierce resistance surprised him. She pulled away as if she
had been stung.
The guards were getting closer.
Ricardo leaned toward Graciela. "You mustn't be angry," he
said loudly. "My sister feels the same way. After dinner last
night when she put the children to bed she was saying that it
would be much better if we men didn't sit around together
smoking smelly cigars and telling stories while you women
went off by yourselves. I'll bet—"
The guards had passed. Ricardo turned to look at Graciela.
Her face was expressionless. Mentally, Ricardo began to curse
Jaime, wishing he had given him one of the other nuns. This
one was made of stone, and there was no chisel hard enough to
penetrate that cold exterior.
In all modesty, Ricardo Mellado knew that he was
attractive
to women. Enough of them had told him so. He was
light-complexioned, tall, and well built, with a patrician
nose, an intelligent face, and perfect white teeth. He came
from one of the most prominent Basque families. His father
was a banker in the Basque country in the north and had seen
to it that Ricardo was well educated. He had gone to the
University of Salamanca, and his father had looked forward to
his son joining him in the family business.
When Ricardo returned home from college, he dutifully went
to work at the bank, but within a short period of time he
became involved with the problems of his people. He attended
meetings and rallies and protests against the government and
soon became one of the leaders of ETA. His father, after
learning about his son's activities, called him into his
huge, paneled office and lectured him.
"I am a Basque too, Ricardo, but I am also a businessman.
We cannot foul our own nest by encouraging a revolution in
the country where we make our living."
"None of us is trying to overthrow the government, Father.
All we're demanding is freedom. The government's oppression
of the Basques and the Catalans is intolerable."
The senior Mellado leaned back in his chair and studied
his son. "My good friend the mayor had a quiet word with me
yesterday. He suggested it would be to your benefit not to
attend any more rallies. It would be better if you expended
your energy on bank business."
"Father—"
"Listen to me, Ricardo. When I was young, my blood ran hot
too. But there are other ways to cool it off. You're engaged
to a lovely girl. I hope you will have many children." He
waved his hand at their surroundings. "And you have much to
look forward to in your future."
"But don't you see—?"
"I see more clearly than you, my son. Your prospective
father-in-law is also unhappy with your activities. I would
not want anything to happen that would prevent the wedding.
Do I make myself clear?"
"Yes, Father."
The following Saturday Ricardo Mellado was arrested while
leading a Basque rally in an auditorium in Barcelona. He
refused to let his father bail him out unless he also bailed
out the other demonstrators who had been arrested. His father
refused. Ricardo's career was ended and so was his
engagement. That had been five years earlier. Five years of
danger and narrow escapes. Five years filled with the
excitement of fighting for a cause he passionately believed
in. Now he was on the run, a fugitive from the police,
escorting a retarded and mute nun across Spain.
"We'll go this way," he said to Sister Graciela. He was
careful not to touch her arm.
They turned off the main street onto the Calle de San
Valentin. On the corner was a store that sold musical
instruments.
Ricardo said, "I have an idea. Wait here, Sister. I'll be
right back."
He entered the store and walked up to a young clerk
standing behind the counter.
"Buenos dias. May I help you?"
"Yes. I would like to buy two guitars."
The clerk smiled. "Ah, you are in luck. We just got in
some Ramirezes. They are the best."
"Perhaps something of not such a high quality. My friend
and I are only amateurs."
"As you wish, senor. What about these?" The clerk walked
over to a section of the store where a dozen guitars were on
display. "I can let you have two Konos for five thousand
pesetas apiece."
"I think not." Ricardo selected two inexpensive guitars.
"These will do nicely," he said.
A few moments later Ricardo walked back out to the street,
carrying the two guitars. He had half hoped Sister Graciela
would be gone, but she was standing there, patiently waiting.
Ricardo opened the strap on one of the guitars and held
out the instrument to her."Here, Sister. Put this over your
shoulder."
She stared at him.
"It isn't necessary for you to play it," Ricardo said
patiently. "It is only for effect."
He shoved the guitar at her, and she reluctantly took it.
They walked along the winding streets of Segovia under the
enormous viaduct built by the Romans centuries earlier.
Ricardo decided to try again. "You see this viaduct,
Sister? There is no cement between the stones. Legend has it
that it was built by the devil two thousand years ago, stone
piled on stone, with nothing but the devil's magic to hold it
together." He looked at her for some reaction.
Nothing.
To hell with her, Ricardo Mellado thought. I give up.
The members of the Guardia Civil were everywhere, and
whenever they passed them, Ricardo would pretend to be in
earnest conversation with Graciela, always careful to avoid
body contact.
The numbers of police and soldiers seemed to be
increasing, but Ricardo felt reasonably safe. They would be
looking for a nun in robes and a group of Jaime Miró's men,
and they would have no reason to suspect two young tourists
carrying guitars.
Ricardo was feeling hungry, and even though Sister
Graciela had said nothing, he was sure that she must be
hungry also. They came to a small cafe.
"We'll stop in here and have a bite to eat, Sister."
She stood there, watching him.
He sighed. "Right. Suit yourself."
He walked inside the cafe. A moment later Graciela
followed him.
When they were seated, Ricardo asked, "What would you like
to order, Sister?"
There was no response. She was infuriating.
Ricardo said to the waitress, "Two gazpachos and two
orders of chorizos."
When the soup and sausages came, Graciela ate what was put
in front of her. He noticed that she ate automatically,
without enjoyment, as though fulfilling some duty. The men
seated at other tables were staring at her, and Ricardo could
not blame them. It would take the young Goya to capture her
beauty, he thought.
In spite of Graciela's sullen behavior, Ricardo felt a
lump in his throat every time he looked at her, and he cursed
himself for a romantic fool. She was an enigma, buried behind
some kind of impenetrable wall. Ricardo Mellado had known
dozens of beautiful women, but none of them had ever affected
him this way. There was something almost mystical about her
beauty. The irony was that he had absolutely no idea what lay
behind the breathtaking facade. Was she intelligent or
stupid? Interesting or dull? Cold-blooded or passionate? I
hope she's stupid, dull, and cold-blooded, Ricardo thought,
or I won't be able to stand losing her. As though I could
ever have her. She belongs to God. He looked away, afraid
that she might sense what he was thinking.
When it was time to leave, Ricardo paid the check and they
rose. During the journey he had noticed that Sister Graciela
was limping slightly. I'll have to get us some kind of
transportation, he thought. We still have a long way to go.
They started down the street, and at the far end of town,
on the Manzanares el Real, they came upon a gypsy caravan.
There were four colorfully decorated wagons in the caravan,
pulled by horses. In the backs of the wagons were women and
children, all dressed in gypsy costumes.
Ricardo said, "Wait here, Sister. I'm going to try to get
us a ride."
He approached the driver of the lead wagon, a burly man in
full gypsy regalia, including earrings.
"Buenas tardes, senor. I would consider it a great
kindness if you could give my fiancee and me a ride."
The gypsy looked over to where Graciela was standing. "It
is possible. Where are you headed?"
"To the Guadarrama mountains."
"I can take you as far as Cerezo de Abajo."
"That would be of great value. Thank you."
Ricardo shook the gypsy's hand and put money in it.
"Get in the last wagon."
"Gracias."
Ricardo returned to where Graciela was waiting. "The
gypsies are going to take us as far as Cerezo de Abajo," he
told her. "We'll ride in the last wagon."
For an instant he was sure she was going to refuse. She
hesitated, then started toward the wagon.
There were half a dozen gypsies inside and they made room
for Ricardo and Graciela. As they climbed aboard, Ricardo
started to help the sister up, but the moment he touched her
arm, she pushed him away with a fierceness that took him by
surprise. All right, to hell with you. He caught a glimpse of
Graciela's bare leg as she lifted herself onto the wagon, and
he could not help thinking: She has the most beautiful legs
I've ever seen.
They made themselves as comfortable as possible on the
hard wooden floor of the wagon and the long journey began.
Graciela sat in a corner, her eyes closed and her lips moving
in prayer. Ricardo could not take his eyes off her.
As the day wore on, the sun became a hot furnace beating
down on them, baking the earth, and the sky was a deep,
cloudless blue. From time to time as the wagon crossed the
plains, huge birds soared overhead. Buitre leonado, Ricardo
thought. The lion-colored griffon vultures.
Late in the afternoon the gypsy caravan came to a stop and
the leader approached the last wagon.
"This is as far as we can take you," he told Ricardo.
"We're headed for Vinvelas."
Wrong direction. "This is fine," Ricardo assured him.
"Thank you."
He started to reach out a hand for Graciela and quickly
thought better of it.
Ricardo turned to the leader of the gypsies. "I would
consider it a kindness if you would sell some food to my
fiancee and me."
The chief turned to one of the women and said something in
a foreign tongue, and a few moments later two packages of
food were handed to Ricardo.
"Muchas gracias." He pulled out some money.
The gypsy chief studied him for a moment. "You and the
sister have already paid for the food."
You and the sister. So he knew. Yet Ricardo felt no sense
of danger. The gypsies were as oppressed by the government as
were the Basques and Catalans.
"Vayan con Dios."
Ricardo stood there watching the caravan move out of
sight, then turned to Graciela. She was watching him, silent,
impassive.
"You won't have to put up with my company much longer,"
Ricardo assured her. "Soon we will be in Logrono. You'll meet
your friends there and you'll be on your way to the convent
at Mendavia."
No reaction. He could have been talking to a stone wall. I
am talking to a stone wall.
They had been dropped off in a peaceful valley rich with
orchards of apple, pear, and fig trees. A few feet away from
them was the Duraton River, filled with fat trout. In the
past, Ricardo had fished there often. It would have been an
ideal place to stay and rest, but there was a long road to
travel.
He turned to study the Guadarrama mountains, the range
that lay ahead of them. Ricardo knew the area well. There
were several trails that wound through the length of the
mountains. Cobras, wild mountain goats, and wolves roamed the
passages, and Ricardo would have chosen the shortest route
had he been traveling alone. But with Sister Graciela at his
side, he decided on the safest.
"Well, we'd better get started," Ricardo said. "We have a
long climb ahead of us."
He had no intention of missing the rendezvous with the
others in Logrono. Let the silent sister become someone
else's headache.
Sister Graciela stood there waiting for Ricardo to lead
the way. He turned and began to climb. As they started up the
steep mountain path, Graciela slipped on some loose pebbles
and Ricardo instinctively reached out to help her. She jerked
away from his hand and righted herself. Fine, he thought
angrily. Break your neck.
They kept moving upward, heading toward the majestic peak
high above. The trail started to get steeper and narrower and
the chilled air became thinner. They were heading east,
passing through a forest of pine trees. Ahead of them lay a
village that was a haven for skiers and mountain climbers.
There would be hot food and warmth and rest there, Ricardo
knew. It was tempting. Too dangerous, he decided. It would be
a perfect place for Acoca to set a trap.
He turned to Sister Graciela. "We'll skirt the village.
Can you go on a little farther before we rest?"
She looked at him and, as her answer, turned and began to
walk.
The unnecessary rudeness offended him, and he thought:
Thank heavens at Logrono I will be rid of her. Why in the
name of God do I have mixed feelings about that?
They skirted the village, walking along the edge of the
forest, and soon they were on the path again, climbing
upward. It was getting more difficult to breathe, and the
path grew steeper. As they rounded a bend, they came upon an
empty eagle's nest. They skirted another mountain village,
quiet and peaceful in the afternoon sun, and rested outside
it, stopping at a mountain stream where they drank the icy
water.
By dusk they had reached a rugged area that was famous for
its caves. After that the trail would start downward.
From now on, Ricardo thought, it will be easy. The worst
is over.
He heard a faint buzzing sound overhead. He looked up,
searching for the source of it. An army plane appeared
suddenly over the top of the mountain, flying toward them.
"Down!" Ricardo shouted. "Down!"
Graciela kept walking. The plane circled and began to
swoop lower.
"Get down!" Ricardo yelled again.
He jumped on her and pushed her down to the ground, his
body on top of hers. What happened next took him completely
by surprise. Without any warning, Graciela began yelling
hysterically, fighting him. She was kicking him in the groin,
clawing at his face, trying to rip at his eyes. But the most
astonishing thing was what she was saying. She was screaming
out a string of obscenities that sent Ricardo into shock, a
verbal torrent of filth that assailed him. He could not
believe that these words were coming from that beautiful,
innocent mouth.
He tried to grab her hands to protect himself from her
raking nails. She was like a wildcat under him.
"Stop it!" he shouted. "I'm not going to hurt you. It's an
army scout plane. They may have seen us. We've got to get out
of here."
He held her down until her frantic struggling finally
ceased. Strange, strangled sounds were coming from her, and
he realized that she was sobbing. Ricardo, with all his
experience with women, was completely baffled. He was
straddled atop a hysterical nun who had the vocabulary of a
truck driver, and he had no notion of what to do next.
He made his voice as calm and as reasonable as possible.
"Sister, we have to find a place to hide quickly. The plane
may have reported us and in a few hours there could be
soldiers swarming all over the place. If you ever want to
reach the convent, you'll get up and come with me."
He waited a moment, then carefully raised himself off her
and sat alongside her until the sobs subsided. Finally
Graciela sat up. Her face was smudged from the dirt, her hair
was mussed, her eyes were red from crying, and yet her beauty
made Ricardo ache.
He said quietly, "I'm sorry I frightened you. I don't seem
to know how to behave around you. I promise to try to be more
careful in the future."
She looked up at him with her luminous black eyes filled
with tears, and Ricardo had no idea what she was thinking. He
sighed and rose. She followed suit.
"There are dozens of caves around here," Ricardo told her.
"We'll hide in one of them for the night. By dawn we can be
on our way again."
His face was raw and bleeding where she had clawed at him,
but in spite of what had happened, he felt a defenselessness
about her, a fragility that touched him, that made him want
to say something to reassure her. But now he was the one who
was silent. He could not think of a single thing to say.
The caves had been carved out by eons of winds and floods
and earthquakes, and they came in an infinite variety. Some
of them were mere indentations in the mountain rocks, others
were endless tunnels never explored by man.
A mile from where they had spotted the plane, Ricardo
found a cave that was to his satisfaction. The low entrance
was almost covered by underbrush.
"Stay here," he said.
He ducked into the entrance and walked into the cave, it
was dark inside, with only faint light spilling through the
opening. There was no telling what the length of the cave
was, but it did not matter, for there was no reason to
explore it.
He went back outside to Graciela.
"It looks safe," Ricardo said. "Wait inside, please. I'll
gather some branches to cover up the mouth of the cave. I'll
be back in a few minutes."
He watched Graciela as she went silently into the cave,
and he wondered whether she would be there when he returned.
He realized that he desperately wanted her to be.
Inside the cave, Graciela watched him leave, then sank to
the cold ground in despair.
I can't stand any more, she thought. Where are You, Jesus?
Please release me from this hell.
And it had been hell. From the beginning, Graciela had
been fighting the attraction she felt toward Ricardo. She
thought of the Moor. I'm afraid of myself. Of the evil in me.
I want this man, and I must not.
And so she had built a barrier of silence between them,
the silence she had lived with in the convent. But now,
without the discipline of the convent, without the prayers,
without the crutch of the rigid routine, Graciela found
herself unable to banish her inner darkness. She had spent
years fighting the Satanic urges of her body, trying to shut
out the remembered sounds, the moans and sighs that had come
from her mother's bed.
The Moor was looking at her naked body.
You're just a child. Get your clothes on and get out of
here…
I'm a woman!
She had spent so many years trying to forget the feel of
the Moor inside her, trying to push out of her mind the
rhythm of their bodies moving together, filling her, giving
her a feeling of being alive at last.
Her mother screaming: You bitch!
And the doctor saying: Our chief surgeon decided to sew
you up himself. He said you were too beautiful to have scars.
All the years of praying had been to purge herself of
guilt. And they had failed.
The first time Graciela looked at Ricardo Mellado, the
past had come flooding back. He was handsome and gentle and
kind. When Graciela was a little girl, she had dreamed of
someone like Ricardo. And when he was near her, when he
touched her, her body was instantly aflame and she was filled
with a deep shame. I am the bride of Christ, and my thoughts
are a betrayal of God. I belong to You, Jesus. Please help me
now. Cleanse my mind of impure thoughts.
Graciela had tried desperately to keep the wall of silence
between them, a wall that no one but God could penetrate, a
wall to keep out the devil. But did she want to keep the
devil out? When Ricardo had jumped on her and pushed her to
the ground, it was the Moor making love to her, and the friar
trying to rape her, and in her surging panic it was them she
had been fighting off. No, she admitted to herself, that's
not the truth. It was her own deep desire she was fighting.
She was torn between her spirit and the cravings of her
flesh. I must not give in. I must get back to the convent.
He'll be back any minute. What should I do?
Graciela heard a low mewing from the back of the cave and
quickly turned. There were four green eyes staring at her in
the dark, moving toward her. Graciela's heart began to beat
faster.
Two baby wolf cubs trotted up to her on soft, padded feet.
She smiled and extended her hand to them. There was a sudden
rustle from the entrance of the cave. Ricardo is back, she
thought.
The next instant, an enormous gray wolf was flying at her
throat.
CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN
Lucia Carmine paused outside the taberna in Aranda de
Duero and took a deep breath. Through the window she could
see Rubio Arzano seated inside, waiting for her.
I must not let him suspect, she thought. At eight o'clock
I'll have a new passport and be on my way to Switzerland.
She forced a smile and entered the taberna. Rubio grinned
in relief when he saw her, and as he rose, the look in his
eyes gave Lucia a pang.
"I was very worried, querida. When you were gone for so
long, I was afraid something terrible had happened to you."
Lucia put her hand over his. "Nothing happened." Except
that I've bought my way to freedom. I'll be out of the
country tomorrow.
Rubio sat there looking into her eyes, holding her hand,
and there was such an intense feeling of love coming from him
that Lucia felt uneasy. Doesn't he know it could never work?
No. Because I haven't the courage to tell him. He's not in
love with me. He's in love with the woman he thinks I am.
He'll be much better off without me.
She turned away and looked around the room for the first
time. It was filled with locals. Most of them seemed to be
staring at the two strangers.
One of the young men in the cafe started to sing and
others joined in. A man walked over to the table where Lucia
and Rubio were sitting.
"You're not singing, senor. Join us."
Rubio shook his head. "No."
"What's the problem, amigo?"
"It's your song." Rubio saw the puzzled expression on
Lucia's face, and explained. "It is one of the old songs
praising Franco."
Other men began to gather around the table. It was obvious
that they had been drinking.
"You were against Franco, senor?"
Lucia saw Rubio's fists clench. Oh, God, not now. He
mustn't start anything that will attract attention.
She said to him warningly, "Rubio…"
And, thank God, he understood.
He looked up at the young men and said pleasantly, "I have
nothing against Franco. I just don't know the words."
"Ah. Then we'll all hum the song together."
They stood there waiting for Rubio to refuse.
He glanced at Lucia. "Bueno."
The men began to sing again, and Rubio hummed loudly.
Lucia could feel the tension in him as he held himself under
control. He's doing this for me.
When the song ended, a man slapped him on the back. "Not
bad, old man. Not bad at all."
Rubio sat there, silently willing them to go away.
One of the men saw the package in Lucia's lap.
"What are you hiding there, querida?"
His companion said, "I'll bet she's got something better
than that up her skirt."
The men laughed.
"Why don't you pull your panties down and show us what
you've got there?"
Rubio sprang to his feet and grabbed one of the men by the
throat. He punched him so hard that he flew across the room,
breaking a table.
"No!" Lucia screamed. "Don't!"
But it was too late. In an instant it became a
free-for-all, with everybody eagerly joining in. A wine
bottle shattered the glass behind the bar. Chairs and tables
were knocked over as men went flying through the air,
screaming curses. Rubio knocked down two men and a third ran
toward him and hit him in the stomach. He gave a grunt of
pain.
"Rubio! Let's get out of here!" Lucia screamed.
He nodded. He was clutching his stomach. They pushed their
way through the melee and found themselves outside on the
street.
"We've got to get away," Lucia said.
You will have your passport tonight. Come back after eight
o'clock.
She had to find a place to hide until then. Damn him! Why
couldn't he have controlled himself?
They turned down Calle Santa Maria, and the noises of the
fight behind them gradually diminished. Two blocks away they
came to a large church, the Iglesia Santa Maria.
Lucia ran up the steps, opened the door, and peered
inside. The church was deserted.
"We'll be safe in here," she said.
They walked into the dimness of the church, Rubio still
holding his stomach.
"We can rest for a while."
"Yes."
Rubio let his hand fall away from his stomach, and blood
came gushing out.
Lucia felt sick. "My God! What happened?"
"A knife," Rubio whispered. "He used a knife." He slumped
to the floor.
Lucia knelt at his side, panicky. "Don't move."
She removed his shirt and pressed it against his stomach,
trying to stem the flow of blood. Rubio's face was chalk
white.
"You shouldn't have fought them, you idiot," Lucia said
angrily.
His voice was a slurred whisper. "I could not let them
speak to you that way."
I could not let them speak to you that way.
Lucia was touched as she had never been touched before.
She stood there staring at him and thought: How many times
has this man risked his life for me!
"I won't let you die," she said fiercely. "I'm not going
to let you die." She stood up abruptly. "I'll be right back."
She found water and towels in the priest's changing room
in the rear of the church and she bathed Rubio's wound. His
face was hot to the touch, and his body was soaked in
perspiration. Lucia put cold towels on his forehead. Rubio's
eyes were closed and he seemed to be asleep. She cradled his
head in her arms and talked to him. It did not matter what
she said. She was talking to keep him alive, forcing him to
hold on to the thin thread of his existence. She babbled on,
afraid to stop for even a second.
"We'll work your farm together, Rubio. I want to meet your
mother and sisters. Do you think they'll like me? I want them
to, so much. And I'm a good worker, caro. You'll see. I've
never worked on a farm, but I'll learn. We'll make it the
best farm in all of Spain."
She spent the afternoon talking to him, bathing his
fevered body, changing the dressing. The bleeding had almost
stopped.
"You see, caro! You're getting better. You're going to be
well. I told you. You and I will have such a wonderful life
together, Rubio. Only, please don't die. Please!"
She found that she was weeping.
Lucia watched the afternoon shadows paint the church walls
through the stained-glass windows and slowly fade away. The
setting sun dimmed the sky and finally it was dark. She
changed Rubio's bandage again and, so close that it startled
her, the church bell began to ring. She held her breath and
counted. One… three… five… seven… eight. Eight o'clock. It
was calling her, telling her it was time to return to the
Casa de Empenos. Time to escape from this nightmare and save
herself.
She knelt down beside Rubio and felt his forehead again.
He was burning with fever. His body was soaked with
perspiration and his breathing was shallow and rasping. She
could see no sign of bleeding, but that could mean he was
bleeding internally. Goddamn it. Save yourself, Lucia.
"Rubio… darling…"
He opened his eyes, only half conscious.
"I have to leave for a little while," Lucia said.
He gripped her hand. "Please…"
"It's all right," she whispered. "I'll be back."
She rose and took a long last look at him. I can't help
him, she thought.
She picked up the gold cross and turned and hurried out
the church door, her eyes filled with tears. She stumbled out
onto the street and began to walk rapidly, heading toward the
pawnshop. The man and his cousin would be there waiting for
her with her passport to freedom. In the morning, when church
services begin, they'll find Rubio and get him to a doctor.
They'll treat him and he'll get well. Except that he will not
live through the night, Lucia thought. Well, that's not my
problem.
The Casa de Empenos was just ahead. She was only a few
minutes late. She could see that the lights were on in the
shop. The men were waiting for her.
She began to walk faster, then she was running. She
crossed the street and burst through the open door.
Inside the police station, a uniformed officer was behind
the desk. He looked up as Lucia appeared.
"I need you," Lucia cried. "A man has been stabbed. He may
be dying."
The policeman did not ask questions. He picked up a
telephone and spoke into it. When he put the phone down, he
said, "Someone will be with you in a moment."
Two detectives appeared almost immediately.
"Someone has been stabbed, senorita!"
"Yes. Please follow me. Hurry!"
"We'll pick up the doctor on the way," one of the
detectives said. "Then you can take us to your friend."
They picked up the doctor at his home and Lucia hurried
the group to the church.
When they entered the church the doctor walked over to the
still figure on the floor and knelt beside him.
A moment later he looked up. "He's alive, but barely. I'll
call for an ambulance."
Lucia sank to her knees and said silently, Thank you, God.
I've done all I can. Now let me get away safely and I'll
never bother you again.
One of the detectives had been staring at Lucia all the
way to the church. She looked so familiar. And then he
suddenly realized why. She bore an uncanny resemblance to the
picture in the Red, the top-priority circulation from
Interpol.
The detective whispered something to his companion and
they both turned to study her. Then the two of them walked
over to Lucia.
"Excuse me, senorita. Would you be good enough to come
back to the station with us? We have a few questions we wish
to ask you."
CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT
Ricardo Mellado was a short distance away from the
mountain cave when suddenly he saw a large gray wolf trotting
toward the entrance. He froze for a single instant, then
moved as he had never moved in his life. He raced toward the
mouth of the cave and burst through the entrance. "Sister!"
In the dim light he saw the huge, gray shape leaping
toward Graciela. Instinctively, he reached for his pistol and
fired. The wolf let out a yelp of pain and turned toward
Ricardo. He felt the sharp fangs of the wounded beast tearing
at his clothing and smelled the animal's fetid breath. The
wolf was stronger than he had expected, heavily muscled and
powerful. Ricardo tried to fight free, but it was impossible.
He felt himself begin to lose consciousness. He was dimly
aware of Graciela coming toward him and he yelled, "Get
away!"
Then he saw Graciela's hand raised above his head, and as
it started to descend toward him, he glimpsed a huge rock in
it and thought: She's going to kill me.
An instant later the rock swept past him and smashed into
the wolfs skull. There was a last savage gasp and the animal
lay still on the ground. Ricardo was huddled on the floor,
fighting for breath. Graciela knelt at his side.
"Are you all right?" Her voice was trembling with concern.
He managed to nod. He heard a whimpering sound behind him
and turned to see the cubs huddled in a corner. He lay there,
gathering his strength. Then he rose with difficulty.
They staggered out into the clean mountain air, shaken.
Ricardo stood there, taking deep, lung-filling breaths until
his head cleared. The physical and emotional shock of their
close brush with death had taken a severe toll on both of
them.
"Let's get away from this place. They may come looking for
us here."
Graciela shuddered at the reminder of how much danger they
were still in.
They traveled along the steep mountain path for the next
hour, and when they finally reached a small stream, Ricardo
said, "Let's stop here."
With no bandages or antiseptic, they cleaned the scratches
as best they could, bathing them in the clean, cold spring
water. Ricardo's arm was so stiff, he had trouble moving it.
To his surprise, Graciela said, "Let me do it."
He was even more surprised by the gentleness with which
she performed the task.
Then, without warning, Graciela began to tremble violently
in the aftermath of shock.
"It's all right," Ricardo said. "It's all over."
She could not stop shaking.
He took her in his arms and said soothingly, "Shh. It's
dead. There's nothing more to fear."
He was holding her closely, and he could feel her thighs
pressing against his body, and her soft lips were on his, and
she was holding him close, whispering things he could not
understand.
It was as though he had known Graciela always. And yet he
knew nothing about her. Except that she's God's miracle, he
thought.
Graciela was also thinking of God. Thank You, God, for
this joy. Thank You for finally letting me feel what love is.
She was experiencing emotions for which she had no words,
beyond anything she had ever imagined.
Ricardo was watching her, and her beauty still took his
breath away. She belongs to me now, he thought. She doesn't
have to go back to a convent. We'll get married and have
beautiful children—strong sons.
"I love you," he said. "I'll never let you go, Graciela."
"Ricardo—"
"Darling, I want to marry you. Will you marry me?"
And without even thinking, Graciela said, "Yes. Oh, yes."
And she was in his arms again, and she thought: This is
what I wanted and thought I would never have.
Ricardo was saying, "We'll live in France for a while,
where we'll be safe. This fight will be over soon, and we'll
return to Spain."
She knew that she would go anywhere with this man, and
that if there was danger, she wanted to share it with him.
They talked of so many things. Ricardo told her of how he
had first become involved with Jaime Miró, and of the broken
engagement, and of his father's displeasure. But when Ricardo
waited for Graciela to speak about her past, she was silent.
She looked at him and thought: I can't tell him. He'll
hate me. "Hold me," Graciela begged.
They slept and woke up at dawn to watch the sun creep over
the ridge of the mountain, bathing the hills in a warm red
glow.
Ricardo said, "We'll be safer hiding out here today. We'll
start traveling when it gets dark."
They ate from the sack of food that the gypsies had given
them, and planned their future.
"There are wonderful opportunities here in Spain," Ricardo
said. "Or there will be when we have peace. I have dozens of
ideas. We'll own our own business. We'll buy a beautiful home
and raise handsome sons."
"And beautiful daughters."
"And beautiful daughters." He smiled. "I never knew I
could be so happy."
"Nor I, Ricardo."
"We'll be in Logrono in two days and meet the others,"
Ricardo said. He took her hand. "We'll tell them you won't be
returning to the convent."
"I wonder if they'll understand." Then she laughed. "I
don't really care. God understands. I loved my life in the
convent," she said softly, "but—" She leaned over and kissed
him.
Ricardo said, "I have so much to make up to you."
She was puzzled. "I don't understand."
"Those years you were in the convent, shut away from the
world. Tell me, darling—does it bother you that you've lost
all those years?"
How could she make him see? "Ricardo—I didn't lose
anything. Have I really missed so much?"
He thought about it, not knowing where to begin. He
realized that events he thought of as important would not
really have mattered to the nuns in their isolation. Wars,
like the Arab-Israeli war? The Berlin Wall? Assassinations of
political leaders such as the American President John Kennedy
and his brother, Robert Kennedy? And of Martin Luther King,
Jr., the great black leader of the nonviolence movement for
black equality? Famines? Floods? Earthquakes? Strikes and
demonstrations protesting man's inhumanity to man?
In the end, how deeply would any of those things have
affected her personal life? Or the personal lives of the
majority of people on this earth?
Finally, Ricardo said, "In one sense, you haven't missed
much. But in another sense, yes. Something important has been
going on. Life. While you were shut away all those years,
babies have been born and have grown up, lovers have married,
people have suffered and been happy, people have died, and
all of us out here were a part of that, a part of the
living."
"And you think I never was?" Graciela asked. And the words
came tumbling out before she could stop them. "I was once a
part of that life you are talking about, and it was a living
hell. My mother was a whore, and every night I had a
different uncle. When I was fourteen years old I gave my body
to a man because I was attracted to him and jealous of my
mother and what she was doing." The words were coming in a
torrent now. "I would have become a whore too if I had stayed
there to be part of the life you think is so precious. No, I
don't believe I ran away from anything. I ran to something. I
found a safe world that is peaceful and good."
Ricardo was staring at her, horrified. "I—I'm sorry," he
said. "I didn't mean to—"
She was sobbing now, and he took her in his arms and said,
"Shh! It's all right. That's over. You were a child. I love
you."
And it was as though Ricardo had given her absolution. She
had told him about the awful things she had done in the past,
and still he forgave her. And—wonder of wonders—loved her.
He held her very close. "There is a poem by Federico
Garcia Lorca:
The night does not wish to come so that you cannot come
and I cannot go…
But you will come with your tongue burned by the salt
rain.
The day does not wish to come so that you cannot come and
I cannot go…
But you will come through the muddy sewers of darkness.
Neither night nor day wishes to come so that I may die for
you and for me."
And suddenly she thought of the soldiers who were hunting
them and she wondered if she and her beloved Ricardo were
going to live long enough to have a future together.
CHAPTER TWENTY NINE
There was a link missing, a clue to the past, and Alan
Tucker was determined to find it. There had been no mention
in the newspaper of a baby being abandoned, but it should be
easy enough to find out the date it was brought to the
orphanage. If the date coincided with the time of the plane
crash, Ellen Scott would have some interesting explaining to
do. She couldn't be that stupid, Alan Tucker thought. To risk
pretending that the Scott heiress was dead, and then leave
her on the doorstep of a farmhouse. Risky. Very risky. On the
other hand, look at the reward: Scott Industries. Yes, she
could have pulled it off. If it is a skeleton in her closet,
it's a live one, and it's going to cost her plenty.
Tucker knew that he had to be very careful. He had no
illusion about whom he was dealing with. He was confronting
raw power. He knew he had to have all the evidence in hand
before he made his move.
His first stop was another visit with Father Berrendo.
"Father—I would like to speak to the farmer and his wife,
where Patricia—Megan was dropped off."
The old priest smiled. "I hope your conversation with them
will not take place for a long time."
Tucker stared at him. "You mean—?"
"They died many years ago."
Damn. But there had to be other avenues to explore. "You
said the baby was taken to a hospital with pneumonia?"
"Yes."
There would be records there. "Which hospital was it?"
"It burned down in 1961. There is a new hospital now." He
saw the look of dismay on his visitor's face. "You must
remember, senor, that the information you are seeking goes
back twenty-eight years. Many things have changed."
Nothing's going to stop me, Tucker thought. Not when I've
come this close. There must be a file on her somewhere.
There was still one place left to investigate: the
orphanage.
He was reporting daily now to Ellen Scott.
"Keep me informed of every development. I want to know the
moment the girl is found."
And Alan Tucker wondered about the urgency in her voice.
She seems in an awful big rush over something that
happened all those years ago. Why? Well, that can wait. First
I have to get the proof I'm looking for.
That morning Alan Tucker visited the orphanage. He looked
around the dreary community room where a noisy, chattering
group of children were playing, and he thought: This is where
the heiress to the Scott dynasty grew up, while that bitch in
New York kept all the money and all the power. Well, she's
going to share some of that with yours truly. Yes, sir, we'll
make a great team, Ellen Scott and me.
A young woman came up to him and said, "May I help you,
senor?"
He smiled. Yeah. You can help me to about a billion
dollars. "I'd like to talk to whoever's in charge here."
"That would be Senora Angeles."
"Is she here?"
"Sí, senor. I will take you to her."
He followed the woman through the main hall to a small
office at the rear of the building.
"Go in, please."
Alan Tucker entered the office. The woman seated behind
the desk was in her eighties. She had once been a very large
woman, but her frame had shrunk, so she looked as though her
body had at one time belonged to someone else. Her hair was
gray and thin, but her eyes were bright and clear.
"Good morning, senor. May I help you? You have come to
adopt one of our lovely children? We have so many delightful
ones to choose from."
"No, senora. I have come to inquire about a child who was
left here many years ago."
Mercedes Angeles frowned. "I do not understand."
"A baby girl was brought in here,"—he pretended to consult
a piece of paper—"in October of 1948."
"That is so long ago. She would not be here now. You see,
we have a rule, senor, that at the age of fifteen—"
"No, senora. I know she's not here. What I wish to know is
the exact date she was brought here."
"I'm afraid I cannot help you, senor."
His heart sank.
"You see, so many children are brought in here. Unless you
know her name—"
Patricia Scott, he thought. Aloud, he said, "Megan. Her
name is Megan."
Mercedes Angeles's face lit up. "No one could forget that
child. She was a devil, and everyone adored her. Do you know
that one day she—"
Alan Tucker had no time for anecdotes. His instincts told
him how close he was to getting hold of a piece of the Scott
fortune. And this gabby old woman was the key to it. I must
be patient with her. "Senora Angeles—I don't have much time.
Would you have that date in your files?"
"Of course, senor. We are commanded by the state to keep
very accurate records."
Tucker's heart lifted. I should have brought a camera to
take a picture of the file. Never mind. I'll have it
photocopied. "Could I see that file, senora?"
She frowned. "I don't know. Our records are confidential
and—"
"Of course," Tucker said smoothly, "and I certainly
respect that. You said you were fond of little Megan, and I
know you'd want to do anything you could to help her. Well,
that's why I'm here. I have some good news for her."
"And for this you need the date she was brought in here?"
He said glibly, "That's just so I'll have the proof that
she's the person I think she is. Her father died and left her
a small inheritance, and I want to make sure she gets it."
The woman nodded wisely. "I see."
Tucker pulled a roll of bills from his pocket. "And to
show my appreciation for the trouble I've put you to, I'd
like to contribute a hundred dollars to your orphanage."
She was looking at the roll of bills, an uncertain
expression on her face.
He peeled off another bill. "Two hundred."
She frowned.
"All right. Five hundred."
Mercedes Angeles beamed. "That is very generous of you,
senor. I will go get the file."
I've done it, he thought jubilantly. Jesus Christ, I've
done it! She stole Scott Industries for herself. If it hadn't
been for me, she would have gotten away with it.
When he confronted Ellen Scott with his evidence, there
was no way she could deny it. The plane crash happened on
October 1. Megan was in the hospital for ten days. So she
would have been brought into the orphanage around October 11.
Mercedes Angeles returned to the office holding a file in
her hands. "I found it," she said proudly.
It was all Alan Tucker could do to keep from grabbing it
out of her hands. "May I look at it?" he asked politely.
"Certainly. You have been so generous." She frowned. "I
hope you will not mention this to anyone. I should not be
doing this at all."
"It will be our secret, senora."
She handed him the file.
He took a deep breath and opened it. At the top it said:
"Megan. Baby girl. Parents unknown." And then the date. But
there was some mistake.
"It says here that Megan was brought in here on June 14,
1948."
"Sí, senor."
"That's impossible!" He was almost screaming. The plane
crash happened on October 1, four months later.
There was a puzzled expression on her face. "Impossible,
senor! I do not understand."
"Who—who keeps these records?"
"I do. When a child is left here, I put down the date and
whatever information is given to me."
His dream was collapsing. "Couldn't you have made a
mistake? About the date, I mean—couldn't it have been October
tenth or eleventh?"
"Senor," she said indignantly. "I know the difference
between June fourteenth and October eleventh."
It was over. He had built a dream on too flimsy a
foundation. So Patricia Scott had really died in the plane
crash. It was a coincidence that Ellen Scott was searching
for a girl who had been born around the same time.
Alan Tucker rose heavily and said, "Thank you, senora."
"De nada, senor."
She watched him leave. He was such a nice man. And so
generous. His five hundred dollars would buy many things for
the orphanage. So would the hundred-thousand-dollar check
sent by the kind lady who had telephoned from New York.
October eleventh was certainly a lucky day for our orphanage.
Thank You, Lord.
Alan Tucker was reporting.
"Still no hard news, Mrs. Scott. They're rumored to be
heading north. As far as I know, the girl is safe."
The tone of his voice has completely changed, Ellen Scott
thought. The threat is gone. So he's visited the orphanage.
He's back to being an employee. Well, after he finds
Patricia, that will change too.
"Report in tomorrow."
"Yes, Mrs. Scott."
CHAPTER THIRTY
"Preserve me, O God, for in Thee I take refuge. Thou art
my Lord; I have no good apart from Thee. I love Thee, O Lord,
my strength. The
Lord is my rock and my fortress and my deliverer…"
Sister Megan glanced up to see Felix Carpio watching her,
a concerned expression on his face.
She's really frightened, he thought.
Ever since they started their journey, he had seen Sister
Megan's deep anxiety. Of course. It's only natural. She's
been locked up in a convent for God only knew how many years,
and now she's suddenly thrown out into a strange, terrifying
world. We'll have to be very gentle with the poor girl.
Sister Megan was indeed frightened. She had been praying
hard ever since she left the convent.
Forgive me, Lord, for I love the excitement of what is
happening to me, and I know that it is wicked of me.
But no matter how hard Sister Megan prayed, she could not
help thinking, I don't remember when I've had such a good
time. It was the most amazing adventure she had ever had. In
the orphanage she had often planned daring escapes, but that
was child's play. This was the real thing. She was in the
hands of terrorists, and they were being pursued by the
police and the army. But instead of being terrified, Sister
Megan felt strangely exhilarated.
After traveling all night they stopped at dawn. Megan and
Amparo Jirón stood by as Jaime Miró and Felix Carpio huddled
over a map.
"It's four miles to Medina del Campo," Jaime said. "Let's
avoid it. There's a permanent army garrison stationed there.
We'll keep heading northeast to Valladolid. We should reach
it by early afternoon."
Easily, Sister Megan thought happily.
It had been a long and grueling night, without rest, but
Megan felt wonderful. Jaime was deliberately pushing the
group, but Megan understood what he was doing. He was testing
her, waiting for her to crack. Well, he's in for a surprise,
she thought.
As a matter of fact, Jaime Miró found himself intrigued
with Sister Megan. Her behavior was not at all what he would
have expected of a nun. She was miles away from her convent,
traveling through strange territory, being hunted, and she
seemed to be actually enjoying it. What kind of nun is she?
Jaime Miró wondered.
Amparo Jirón was less impressed. I'll be glad to be rid of
her, she thought. She stayed close to Jaime, letting the nun
walk with Felix Carpio.
The countryside was wild and beautiful, caressed by the
soft fragrance of the summer wind. They passed old villages,
some of them deserted and forlorn, and saw an ancient
abandoned castle high on a hill.
Amparo seemed to Megan like a wild animal—gliding
effortlessly over hills and valleys, never seeming to tire.
When, hours later, Valladolid finally loomed up in the
distance, Jaime called a halt.
He turned to Felix. "Everything is arranged?"
"Yes."
Megan wondered exactly what had been arranged, and found
out very quickly.
"Tomás is instructed to contact us at the bullring."
"What time does the bank close?"
"Five o'clock. There will be plenty of time."
Jaime nodded. "And today there should be a fat payroll."
Good Lord, they're going to rob a bank, Megan thought.
"What about a car?" Amparo was asking.
"No problem," Jaime assured her.
They're going to steal one, Megan thought. It was a little
more excitement than she had bargained for. God isn't going
to like this.
When the group reached the outskirts of Valladolid, Jaime
warned, "Stay with the crowds. Today is bullfight day and
there will be thousands of people. Let's not get separated."
Jaime Miró had been right about the crowds. Megan had
never seen so many people. The streets were swarming with
pedestrians and automobiles and motorcycles, for the
bullfight had drawn not only tourists but citizens from all
the neighboring towns. Even the children on the street were
playing at bullfighting.
Megan was fascinated by the crowds, the noise, and the
bustle around her. She looked into the faces of passersby and
wondered what their lives were like. Soon enough I'll be back
in the convent where I won't be allowed to look at anyone's
face again. I might as well take advantage of this while I
can.
The sidewalks were filled with vendors displaying
trinkets, religious medals and crosses, and everywhere was
the pungent smell of fritters frying in boiling oil.
Megan suddenly realized how hungry she was.
It was Felix who said, "Jaime, we're all hungry. Let's try
some of those fritters."
Felix bought four of them and handed one to Megan. "Try
this, Sister. You'll like it."
It was delicious. For so many of her years, food was meant
not to be enjoyed, but to sustain the body for the glory of
the Lord. This one's for me, Megan thought irreverently.
"The arena is this way," Jaime said.
They followed the crowds past the park in the middle of
town to the Plaza Poinente, which flowed into the Plaza de
Toros. The arena itself was inside an enormous adobe
structure, three stories high. There were four ticket windows
at the entrance. Signs on the left said SOL, and on the
right, SOMBRA. Sun or shade. There were hundreds of people
standing in the lines waiting to purchase tickets.
"Wait here," Jaime ordered.
They watched him as he walked over to where half a dozen
scalpers were hawking tickets.
Megan turned to Felix. "Are we going to watch a
bullfight?"
"Yes, but don't worry, Sister," Felix reassured her. "You
will find it exciting."
Worry? Megan was thrilled by the idea. At the orphanage,
one of her fantasies had been that her father had been a
great torero, and Megan had read every book on bullfighting
that she could get her hands on.
Felix told her, "The real bullfights are held in Madrid
and Barcelona. The bullfight here will be by novilleros,
instead of professionals. They are amateurs. They have not
been granted the alternativa."
Megan knew that the alternativa was the accolade given
only to the top-ranked matadors.
"The ones we will see today fight in rented costumes,
instead of the gold-encrusted suit of lights, against bulls
with filed, dangerous horns that the professionals refuse to
fight."
"Why do they do it?"
Felix shrugged."El hombre hace mas dano que los cuernos.
Hunger is more painful than horns."
Jaime returned holding four tickets. "We're all set," he
said. "Let's go in."
Megan felt a growing sense of excitement.
As they approached the entrance to the huge arena, they
passed a poster plastered to the wall. Megan stopped and
stared at it.
"Look!"
There was a picture of Jaime Miró, and under it:
WANTED FOR MURDER
JAIME MIRÒ
ONE MILLION PESETAS REWARD FOR HIS CAPTURE DEAD OR ALIVE.
Suddenly it brought back to Megan the sober realization of
the kind of man she was traveling with, the terrorist who
held her life in his hands.
Jaime was studying the picture. Brazenly he pulled off his
hat and dark glasses and faced his portrait. "Not a bad
likeness." He ripped the poster off the wall, folded it, and
put it in his pocket.
"What good will that do?" Amparo said. "They must have
posted hundreds of them."
Jaime grinned. "This particular one is going to bring us a
fortune, querida." He put his hat and glasses back on.
What a strange remark, Megan thought. She could not help
admiring his coolness. There was an air of solid competence
about Jaime Miró that Megan found reassuring. The soldiers
will never catch him, she thought.
"Let's go inside."
There were twelve widely spaced entrances to the building.
The red iron doors had been flung open, each one numbered.
Inside the entrance there were puestos selling Coca-Cola and
beer, and next to them were small toilet cubicles. In the
stands, each section and seat was numbered. The tiers of
stone benches made a complete circle, and in the center was
the large arena covered with sand. There were commercial
signs everywhere: BANCO CENTRAL… BOUTIQUE CALZADOS…
SCHWEPPES… RADIO POPULAR…
Jaime had purchased tickets for the shady side, and as
they sat down on the stone benches, Megan looked around in
wonder. It was not at all as she had imagined it. When she
was a young girl, she had seen romantic color photographs of
the bullring in Madrid, huge and elaborate. This was a
makeshift ring. The arena was rapidly filling up with
spectators.
A trumpet sounded. The bullfight began.
Megan leaned forward in her seat, her eyes wide. A huge
bull charged into the ring, and a matador stepped out from
behind a small wooden barrier at the side of the ring and
began to tease the animal.
"The picadors will be next," Megan said excitedly.
Jaime Miró looked at her in wonder. He had been concerned
that the bullfight would make her ill and that she would
attract attention to them. Instead, she seemed to be having a
wonderful time. Strange.
A picador was approaching the bull, riding a horse covered
with a heavy blanket. The bull lowered its head and charged
at the horse, and as it buried its horns in the blanket, the
picador drove an eight-foot lance into the bull's shoulder.
Megan was watching, fascinated. "He's doing that to weaken
the bull's neck muscles," she explained, remembering the
well-loved books she had read all those years ago.
Felix Carpio blinked in surprise. "That's right, Sister."
Megan watched as the pairs of colorfully decorated
banderillas were slammed into the bull's shoulders.
Now it was the matador's turn. He stepped into the ring
holding at his side a red cape with a sword inside it. The
bull turned and began to charge.
Megan was getting more excited. "He will make his passes
now," she said. "First the pase verónica, then the
media-verónica, and last the rebolera."
Jaime could contain his curiosity no longer. "Sister—
where did you learn all this?"
Without thinking, Megan said, "My father was a
bullfighter. Watch!"
The action was so swift, Megan could barely follow it. The
maddened bull kept charging at the matador, and each time he
neared him, the matador swung his red cape to the side and
the bull followed the cape. Megan was concerned.
"What happens if the bullfighter gets hurt?"
Jaime shrugged. "In a place like this, the town barber
will take him over to the barn and sew him up."
The bull charged again, and this time the matador leaped
out of the way. The crowd booed.
Felix Carpio said apologetically, "I am sorry this is not
a better fight, Sister. You should see the great ones. I have
seen Manolete and el Córdobes and Ordónez. They made
bullfighting a spectacle never to be forgotten."
"I have read about them," Megan said.
Felix asked, "Have you ever heard the wonderful story
about Manolete?"
"Which story?"
"At one time, the story goes, Manolete was just another
bullfighter, no better and no worse than a hundred others. He
was engaged to a beautiful young girl, but one day when
Manolete was in the ring, a bull gored him in the groin and
the doctor patched him up and told him that he would no
longer be able to have children. Manolete loved his fiancée
so much that he didn't tell her, because he was afraid she
wouldn't marry him. They married and a few months later she
proudly told Manolete that she was going to have a baby.
Well, of course he knew that it wasn't his baby, and he left
her. The heartbroken girl killed herself. Manolete reacted
like a madman. He had no more desire to live, so he went into
the bullring and did things that no matador had ever done
before. He kept risking his life, hoping to be killed, and he
became the greatest matador in the world. Two years later he
fell in love again and married a young lady. A few months
after the wedding she came to him and proudly announced that
she was going to have his baby. And that's when Manolete
discovered that the doctor had been wrong."
Megan said, "How awful."
Jaime laughed aloud. "That's an interesting story. I
wonder if there is any truth to it."
"I would like to think so," Felix said.
Amparo was listening, her face impassive. She had watched
Jaime's growing interest in the nun with resentment. The
sister had better watch her step.
Aproned food vendors were moving up and down the aisles
calling out their wares. One of them approached the row where
Jaime and the others were seated.
"Empanadas," he called out. "Empanadas caliente."
Jaime raised a hand. "Aqui."
The vendor skillfully tossed a wrapped package across the
crowd into Jaime's hands. Jaime handed ten pesetas to the man
next to him to be passed to the vendor. Megan watched as
Jaime lowered the wrapped empanada to his lap and carefully
opened it. Inside the wrapping was a piece of paper. He read
it, then read it again, and Megan saw his jaw tighten.
Jaime slipped the paper into his pocket. "We're leaving,"
he said curtly. "One at a time." He turned to Amparo. "You
first. We'll meet at the gate."
Wordlessly, Amparo got up and made her way across to the
aisle.
Jaime then nodded to Felix, and Felix rose and followed
Amparo.
"What is happening?" Megan asked. "Is something wrong?"
"We're leaving for Logrono." He rose. "Watch me, Sister.
If I'm not stopped, go to the gate."
Megan watched, tense, as Jaime made his way to the aisle
and started toward the exit. No one seemed to pay any
attention to him. When Jaime had disappeared from sight,
Megan rose and started to leave. There was a roar from the
crowd and she turned to look back at the bullring. A young
matador was lying on the ground being gored by the savage
bull. Blood was pouring onto the sand. Megan closed her eyes
and offered up a silent prayer: Oh, blessed Jesus, have mercy
on this man. He shall not die, but he shall live. The Lord
has chastened him sorely, but he has not given him over to
death. Amen. She opened her eyes, turned, and hurried out.
Jaime, Amparo, and Felix were waiting for her at the
entrance.
"Let's move," Jaime said.
They started walking.
"What's wrong?" Felix asked Jaime.
"The soldiers shot Tomás," he said tersely. "He's dead.
And the police have Rubio. He was stabbed in a bar fight."
Megan crossed herself. "What's happened to Sister Teresa
and Sister Lucia?" she asked anxiously.
"I don't know about Sister Teresa. Sister Lucia has also
been detained by the police." Jaime turned to the others. "We
have to hurry." He looked at his watch. "The bank should be
busy."
"Jaime, maybe we should wait," Felix suggested. "It's
going to be dangerous for just the two of us to hold up the
bank now."
Megan listened to what he was saying and thought: That
won't stop him. She was right.
The three of them were headed for the huge parking lot
behind the arena. When Megan caught up with them, Felix was
examining a blue Seat sedan. "This should do," he said.
He fumbled with the lock on the door for a moment, opened
it, and put his head inside. He crouched down under the
wheel, and a moment later the engine started. "Get in," Jaime
told them.
Megan stood there uncertainly. "You're stealing a car?"
"For Christ's sake," Amparo hissed. "Stop acting like a
nun and get in the car."
The two men were in the front seat, with Jaime at the
wheel. Amparo scrambled into the back. "Are you coming or
not?" Jaime demanded. Megan took a deep breath and got into
the car next to Amparo. They started off. She closed her
eyes. Dear Lord, where are You leading me?
"If it makes you feel any better, Sister," Jaime said,
"we're not stealing this car. We're confiscating it in the
name of the Basque army."
Megan started to say something, then stopped. There was
nothing she could say that would make him change his mind.
She sat there in silence as Jaime drove toward the center of
town.
He's going to rob a bank, Megan thought, and in the eyes
of God, I'll be as guilty as he is. She crossed herself and
silently began to pray.
The Banco de Bilbao was on the ground floor of a
nine-story apartment building on the Calle de Cervantes at
the Plaza de Circular.
When the car pulled up in front of the building, Jaime
said to Felix, "Keep the engine running. If there's any
trouble, take off and meet the others in Logrono."
Felix stared at him in surprise. "What are you talking
about? You're not going in there alone? You can't. The odds
are too great, Jaime. It's too dangerous."
Jaime slapped him on the shoulder. "If they get hurt, they
get hurt," he said with a grin. He stepped out of the car.
They watched as Jaime walked into a leather-goods shop
several doors down from the bank. A few minutes later he
emerged carrying an attaché case. He nodded to the group in
the car and entered the bank.
Megan could hardly breathe. She began to pray:
Prayer is a calling.
Prayer is a listening.
Prayer is a dwelling.
Prayer is a presence.
Prayer is a lamp aflame with Jesus.
I am calm and filled with peace.
She was not calm and filled with peace.
Jaime Miró walked through the two sets of doors that led
to the marble lobby of the bank. Inside the entrance, mounted
high on the wall, he noted a security camera. He gave it a
casual glance, then looked the room over. Behind the counters
a staircase led to a second floor, where bank officers were
working at desks. It was near closing time and the bank was
filled with customers eager to finish transacting their
business. There were lines of people in front of the three
tellers' cages, and Jaime noticed that several of the
customers were carrying packages. He stepped into a line and
patiently waited his turn.
When he reached the teller's cage, he smiled pleasantly
and said, "Buenas tardes."
"'Buenas tardes, senor. What can we do for you today?"
Jaime leaned against the window and pulled out the folded
wanted poster. He handed it to the teller. "Would you take a
look at this, please?"
The teller smiled. "Certainly, senor.."
He unfolded it, and when he saw what it was, his eyes
widened. He looked up at Jaime, and panic was in his eyes.
"It's a nice likeness, isn't it?" Jaime said softly. "As
you can tell from that, I have killed many people, so one
more really won't make a difference to me. Do I make myself
understood?"
"P-perfectly, senor. P-perfectly. I have a family. I beg
of you—"
"I respect families, so I will tell you what I want you to
do to save your children's father." Jaime pushed the attaché
case toward the teller. "I want you to fill this for me. I
want you to do it quickly and quietly. If you truly believe
that the money is more important than your life, then go
ahead and raise the alarm."
The teller shook his head. "No, no, no."
He began to pull money out of the cash drawer and stuff it
into the attaché case. His hands were trembling.
When the attaché case was full, the teller said, "There
you are, senor. I—I promise you I won't raise any alarm."
"That's very wise of you," Jaime said. "I'll tell you why,
amigo." He turned around and pointed to a middle-aged woman
standing near the end of the line carrying a package wrapped
in brown paper. "Do you see that woman? She is one of us.
There is a bomb in that package. If the alarm should sound,
she will set off the bomb instantly."
The teller turned even paler. "No, please!"
"You will wait until ten minutes after she leaves the bank
before you make a move," Jaime warned.
"On my children's life," the teller whispered.
"Buenos tardes."
Jaime took the attaché case and moved toward the door. He
felt the teller's eyes riveted on him.
He stopped beside the woman with the package.
"I must compliment you," Jaime said. "That is a most
becoming dress you are wearing."
She blushed. "Why thank you, senor—gracias."
"De nada."
Jaime turned to nod to the teller, then strolled out of
the bank. It would be at least fifteen minutes before the
woman finished her business and left. By that time, he and
the others would be long gone.
As Jaime came out of the bank and walked toward the car,
Megan almost fainted with relief.
Felix Carpio grinned. "The bastard got away with it." He
turned to Megan. "I beg your pardon, Sister."
Megan had never been so glad to see anyone in her life. He
did it, she thought. And all by himself. Wait until I tell
the sisters what happened. And then she remembered. She could
never tell this to anyone. When she went back to the convent,
there would be only silence for the rest of her life. It gave
her an odd feeling.
Jaime said to Felix, "Move over, amigo. I'll drive." He
tossed the attaché case into the backseat.
"Everything went well?" Amparo asked.
Jaime laughed. "Couldn't have gone better. I must remember
to thank Colonel Acoca for his calling card."
The car started down the street. At the first corner,
Calle de Tudela, Jaime made a left turn. Suddenly, appearing
out of nowhere, a policeman moved in front of the car and
held out a hand signaling him to stop. Jaime stepped on the
brake. Megan's heart began to pound.
The policeman walked over to the car.
Jaime asked calmly, "What's the problem, Officer?"
"The problem, senor, is that you are driving the wrong way
down a one-way street. Unless you can prove you are legally
blind, you are in trouble." He pointed to the sign at the
entrance. "The street is clearly marked. Motorists are
expected to respect a sign like that. That is the reason it
has been placed there."
Jaime said apologetically, "A thousand pardons. My friends
and I were in such a serious discussion that I did not see
the sign."
The policeman was leaning into the driver's window. He was
studying Jaime, a puzzled expression on his face.
"You will be so good as to let me see your registration,
please."
"Of course," Jaime said.
He reached down for the revolver that was under his
jacket. Felix was ready to spring into action. Megan held her
breath.
Jaime pretended to be searching his pockets. "I know I
have it here somewhere."
At that moment from across the plaza came a loud scream
and the policeman turned to look. A man on the street corner
was beating a woman, hitting her about the head and shoulders
with his fists.
"Help!" she cried. "Help me! He's killing me!"
The policeman hesitated for only an instant. "Wait here,"
he commanded.
He raced back down the street toward the man and woman.
Jaime put the car in gear and slammed down on the
accelerator. The car shot down the one-way street, scattering
traffic headed toward them, horns angrily blaring at them.
When they reached the corner, Jaime made another turn toward
the bridge that led out of town on the Avenida Sanchez de
Arjona.
Megan looked at Jaime and crossed herself. She could
hardly breathe.
"Would you—would you have killed the policeman if that man
had not attacked the woman?"
Jaime did not bother to answer.
"The woman wasn't being attacked, Sister," Felix
explained. "Those were our people. We are not alone. We have
many friends."
Jaime's face was grim. "We're going to have to get rid of
this car."
They were leaving the outskirts of Valladolid. Jaime
turned onto N620, the highway to Burgos, on the way to
Logrono. He was careful to stay within the speed limit.
"We'll get rid of the car as soon as we get past Burgos,"
he announced.
I can't believe this is happening to me, Megan thought. I
escaped from the convent, I'm running away from the army, and
I'm riding in a stolen car with terrorists who just robbed a
bank. Lord, what else do You have in mind for me?
CHAPTER THIRTY ONE
Colonel Ramón Acoca and half a dozen members of the GOE
were in the middle of a strategy meeting. They were studying
a large map of the countryside.
The scarred giant said, "It's obvious that Miró is heading
north toward Basque country."
"That could mean Burgos, Vitoria, Logrono, Pamplona, or
San Sebastian."
San Sebastian, Acoca thought. But I have to catch him
before he reaches there.
He could hear the voice on the phone: You're running out
of time. He could not afford to fail.
They were driving through the rolling hills that heralded
the approach to Burgos.
Jaime was quiet behind the wheel. When he finally spoke,
he said, "Felix, when we get to San Sebastian, I want to make
arrangements to get Rubio away from the police."
Felix nodded. "It will be a pleasure. It will drive them
crazy."
Megan said, "What about Sister Lucia?"
"What?"
"Didn't you say that she had been captured too?"
Jaime said wryly, "Yes, but your Sister Lucia turned out
to be a criminal wanted by the police for murder."
The news shook Megan. She remembered how Lucia had taken
charge and persuaded them to hide in the hills. She liked
Sister Lucia.
She said stubbornly, "As long as you're going to rescue
Rubio, you should save them both."
What the devil kind of nun is this? Jaime wondered.
But she was right. Smuggling Rubio and Lucia out from
under the nose of the police would be wonderful propaganda
and would make headlines.
Amparo had sunk into a sullen silence.
Suddenly, in the distance on the road ahead of them were
three army trucks filled with soldiers.
"We'd better get off this road," Jaime decided.
At the next intersection he turned off the highway and
headed east.
"Santo Domingo de la Calzada is up ahead. There's an old
deserted castle there. We can spend the night in it."
Before long they could see its outline from the distance,
high on a hill. Jaime took a side road, avoiding the town,
and the castle loomed larger and larger as they approached
it. A few hundred yards from it was a lake.
Jaime stopped the car. "Everybody out, please."
When they were all out of the car, Jaime pointed the
steering wheel down the hill toward the lake, jammed the
accelerator down, released the hand brake, and jumped clear.
They stood there watching as the car disappeared into the
water.
Megan was about to ask him how they were going to get to
Logrono. She stopped herself. Foolish question. He will steal
another car, of course.
The group turned to examine the abandoned castle. There
was a huge stone wall circling it, and it had crumbling
turrets on each corner.
"In the old days," Felix told Megan, "princes used these
castles as prisons for their enemies."
And Jaime is an enemy of the state, and if he is caught,
there will be no prison for him. Only death, Megan thought.
He has no fear. She remembered his words: I have faith in
what I'm fighting for. I have faith in my men, and in my
guns.
They walked up the stone steps that led to the front gate,
which was made of iron. It had rusted away so badly that they
were able to push it open and squeeze through into a
courtyard paved in stone.
The inside of the castle seemed enormous to Megan. There
were narrow passageways and rooms everywhere, and facing the
outside were gunports, from which the defenders of the castle
could repel attackers.
Stone steps led to a second floor, where there was another
claustro, an inner patio. The stone steps narrowed as they
walked up to a third floor, and then a fourth. The castle was
deserted.
"Well, at least there are plenty of places to sleep here."
Jaime said. "Felix and I will go forage for food. Pick out
your rooms."
The two men started downstairs again.
Amparo turned to Megan. "Come on, Sister."
They walked down the hall and the rooms all looked alike
to Megan. They were empty stone cubicles, cold and austere,
some larger than others.
Amparo picked out the largest. "Jaime and I will sleep
here." She looked at Megan and asked slyly, "Would you like
to sleep with Felix?"
Megan looked at her and said nothing.
"Or perhaps you'd rather sleep with Jaime." Arnparo
stepped closer to Megan. "Don't get any ideas, Sister. He's
much too much man for you."
"You don't have to concern yourself. I'm not interested."
And even as she said it, Megan wondered whether Jaime Miró
was much too much man for her.
When Jaime and Felix returned to the castle an hour later,
Jaime was clutching two rabbits and Felix was carrying
firewood. Felix bolted the front door behind them. Megan
watched as the men made a fire in the large fireplace. Jaime
skinned and cooked the rabbits on a spit over the fire.
"Sorry we can't offer you ladies a real feast," Felix
said, "but we'll eat well in Logrono. Meanwhile—enjoy."
When they had finished their meager meal, Jaime said,
"Let's get to sleep. I want to get an early start in the
morning."
Amparo said to Jaime, "Come, querido. I have our bedroom
picked out."
"Bueno. Let's go."
Megan watched them go upstairs, hand in hand.
Felix turned to Megan. "Do you have your bedroom, Sister?"
"Yes, thank you."
"All right, then."
Megan and Felix walked up the stairs together.
"Good night," Megan said.
He handed Megan a sleeping bag."Good night, Sister."
Megan wanted to ask Felix about Jaime, but she hesitated.
Jaime might think she was prying, and for some reason, Megan
wanted very much for him to have a good opinion of her.
That's really odd, Megan thought. He's a terrorist, a
murderer, a bank robber, and heaven only knows what else, and
I'm worried about whether the man thinks well of me.
But even as Megan thought it, she knew that there was
another side to it. He's a freedom fighter. He robs banks to
finance his cause. He risks his life for what he believes in.
He's a brave man.
As Megan passed their bedroom, she heard Jaime and Amparo
inside laughing. She walked into the small, bare room where
she was to sleep and knelt on the cold stone floor. "Dear
God, forgive me for—" Forgive me for what? What have I done!
For the first time in her life, Megan was unable to pray.
Was God up there listening?
She crawled into the sleeping bag Felix had given her, but
sleep was as remote as the cold stars she could see through
the narrow window.
What am I doing here! Megan wondered. Her thoughts drifted
back to the convent… the orphanage. And before the orphanage?
Why was I left there? I don't really believe that my father
was a brave soldier or a great bullfighter. But wouldn't it
be wonderful to know! It was almost dawn before Megan drifted
off to sleep.
At the prison in Aranda de Duero, Lucia Carmine was a
celebrity.
"You're a big fish in our little pond," the guard told
her."The Italian government is sending someone to escort you
home. I'd like to escort you to my house, puta bonita. What
bad thing did you do?"
"I cut off a man's balls for calling me puta bonita. Tell
me—how is my friend?"
"He's going to live."
Lucia said a silent prayer of gratitude. She looked around
the stone walls of her grim, gray cell and thought: How the
hell do I get out of here!
CHAPTER THIRTY TWO
The report of the bank robbery was handled through regular
police channels, and it was not until two hours after the
robbery occurred that a police lieutenant notified Colonel
Acoca about it.
An hour later, Acoca was in Valladolid. He was furious at
the delay.
"Why wasn't I informed immediately?"
"I'm sorry, Colonel, but it never occurred to us that—"
"You had him in your hands and you let him get away!"
"It wasn't our—"
"Send in the bank teller."
The teller was filled with a sense of self-importance. "It
was my window he came to. I could tell he was a killer by the
look in his eye. He—"
"There is no doubt in your mind that the man who held you
up was Jaime Miró?"
"None. He even showed me a wanted poster of himself. It
was—"
"Did he come into the bank alone?"
"Yes. He pointed to a woman in the line and he said she
was a member of his gang, but after Miró left I recognized
her. She's a secretary who's a regular customer and—"
Colonel Acoca said impatiently, "When Miró left, did you
see in which direction he went?"
"Out the front door."
The interview with the traffic policeman was no more
helpful.
"There were four of them in the car, Colonel. Jaime Miró
and another man and two women in the back."
"In what direction were they headed?"
The policeman hesitated. "They could have gone in any
direction, sir, once they got off the one-way street." His
face brightened. "I can describe the car, though."
Colonel Acoca shook his head in disgust. "Don't bother."
She was dreaming, and in her dream there were the voices
of a mob, and they were coming for her to burn her at the
stake for robbing a bank. It wasn't for me. It was for the
cause. The voices grew louder.
Megan opened her eyes and sat up, staring at the
unfamiliar castle walls. The sound of voices was real. It was
coming from outside.
Megan rose and hurried over to the narrow window. Directly
below, in front of the castle, was an encampment of soldiers.
She was filled with a sudden panic. They've caught us. I have
to find Jaime.
She hurried to the room where he and Amparo had slept and
looked inside. It was empty. She ran down the steps to the
reception hall on the main floor. Jaime and Amparo were
standing near the bolted front door, whispering.
Felix ran up to them. "I checked the back. There's no
other way out of here."
"What about the back windows?"
"Too small. The only way out is through the front door."
Where the soldiers are, Megan thought. We're trapped.
Jaime was saying, "It's just our damned bad luck that they
picked this place to camp."
"What are we going to do?" Amparo whispered.
"There's nothing we can do. We'll have to stay here until
they leave. If—"
And at that moment there was a loud knock at the front
door. An authoritative voice called out, "Open up in there."
Jaime and Felix exchanged a quick look, and without a word
drew their guns.
The voice called out again,"We know there's someone in
there. Open up."
Jaime said to Amparo and Megan, "Get out of the way."
It's hopeless, Megan thought as Amparo moved behind Jaime
and Felix. There must be two dozen armed soldiers out there.
We haven't got a chance.
Before the others could stop her, Megan moved swiftly to
the front door and opened it.
"Thank the Lord you've come!" Megan exclaimed. "You must
help me."
CHAPTER THIRTY THREE
The army officer stared at Megan. "Who are you? What are
you doing in there? I'm Captain Rodriguez, and we're looking
for—"
"You're just in time, Captain." She grabbed his arm. "My
two little sons have typhoid fever, and I have to get them to
a doctor. You must come in and help me with them."
"Typhoid fever?"
"Yes." Megan was pulling on his arm. "It is terrible. They
are burning up. They are covered with sores and are very
sick. Bring your men in and help me carry them out to—"
"Senora! You must be mad. That is highly contagious."
"Never mind that. They need your help. They may be dying."
She was pulling on his arm.
"Let go of me."
"You can't leave me. What will I do?"
"Get back inside and stay there until we can notify the
police to send an ambulance or a doctor."
"But—"
"That's an order, senora. Get inside."
He called out, "Sergeant, we're moving out of here."
Megan closed the front door and leaned against it,
drained.
Jaime was staring at her in stunned amazement. "My God,
that was brilliant. Where did you learn to lie like that?"
Megan turned to him and sighed. "When I was in the
orphanage, we had to learn to defend ourselves. I hope God
will forgive me."
"I wish I could have seen the look on that captain's
face." Jaime burst into laughter. "Typhoid fever! Jesus
Christ!" He saw the look on Megan's face. "I beg your pardon,
Sister."
From outside they could hear the sounds of the soldiers
packing their tents and moving out.
When the troops had departed, Jaime said, "The police will
be here soon. Anyway, we have an appointment in Logrono."
Fifteen minutes after the soldiers had departed, Jaime
said, "It should be safe to leave now." He turned to Felix.
"See what you can pick up in town. Preferably a sedan."
Felix grinned. "No problem."
Half an hour later they were in a beat-up gray sedan
heading east.
To Megan's surprise, she was seated next to Jaime. Felix
and Amparo were in the backseat. Jaime glanced at Megan, a
grin on his face.
"Typhoid fever," he said, and burst out laughing.
Megan smiled. "He did seem eager to get away, didn't he?"
"Did you say you were in an orphanage, Sister?"
"Yes."
"Where?"
"In Ávila."
"You don't look Spanish."
"So I've been told."
"It must have been hell for you in the orphanage."
She was startled by the unexpected concern. "It could have
been," she said. "But it wasn't." I wouldn't let it be, she
thought.
"Do you have any idea who your parents were?"
Megan recalled her fantasies. "Oh, yes. My father was a
brave Englishman who drove an ambulance for the Loyalists in
the Spanish Civil War. My mother was killed in the fighting
and I was left on the doorstep of a farmhouse." Megan
shrugged. "Or my father was a foreign prince who had an
affair with a peasant girl and abandoned me to avoid a
scandal."
Jaime glanced at her, saying nothing.
"I—" she stopped abruptly. "I don't know who my parents
were."
They drove on in silence for a while.
"How long were you behind the walls of the convent?"
"About fifteen years."
Jaime was astonished. "Jesus!" Hastily he added, "I beg
your pardon, Sister. But it's like talking to someone from
another planet. You have no idea what's happened in the world
in the past fifteen years."
"I'm sure that whatever changed is only temporary. It will
change again."
"Do you still want to go back to a convent?"
The question took Megan by surprise.
"Of course."
"Why?" Jaime made a sweeping gesture. "I mean— there is so
much that you must miss behind the walls. Here we have music
and poetry. Spain gave the world Cervantes and Picasso,
Lorca, Pizarro, de Soto, Cortés. This is a magical country."
There was a surprising mellowness about this man, a soft
fire.
Unexpectedly, Jaime said, "I'm sorry for wanting to desert
you earlier, Sister. It was nothing personal. I have had bad
experiences with your Church."
"That is difficult to believe."
"Believe it." His voice was bitter.
In his mind's eye he could see the buildings and statues
and streets of Guernica exploding in showers of death. He
could still hear the screams of the bombs mingling with the
screams of the helpless victims being torn apart. The only
place of sanctuary was the church.
The priests have locked the church. They won't let us in.
And the deadly hail of bullets that had murdered his
mother and father and sisters. No. Not the bullets, Jaime
thought. The Church.
"Your Church stood behind Franco and allowed unspeakable
things to be done to innocent civilians."
"I'm sure the Church protested," Megan said.
"No. It wasn't until nuns were being raped by his
Falangists and priests were being murdered and churches were
being burned that finally the pope broke with Franco. But
that didn't bring my mother or father or sisters back to
life."
The passion in his voice was frightening.
"I'm sorry. But that was long ago. The war is over."
"No. Not for us it isn't. The government will still not
permit us to fly the Basque flag or celebrate our national
holidays or speak our own language. No, Sister. We're still
being oppressed. We'll keep on fighting until we gain our
independence. There are half a million Basques in Spain and a
hundred fifty thousand more in France. We want our
independence—but your God is too busy to help us."
Megan said earnestly, "God cannot take sides, for He is in
all of us. We are all a part of Him, and when we try to
destroy Him, we destroy ourselves."
To Megan's surprise, Jaime smiled. "We are a lot alike,
you and I, Sister."
"We are?"
"We may believe in different things, but we believe with a
passion. Most people go through life without caring deeply
about anything. You devote your life to God; I devote my life
to my cause. We care."
And Megan thought: Do I care enough? And if I do, why am I
enjoying being with this man? I should be thinking only of
returning to a convent. There was a power in Jaime Miró that
was like a magnet. Is he like Manolete? Risking his life
taking daring chances because he has nothing to lose?
"What will they do to you if the soldiers catch you?"
Megan asked.
"Execute me." He said it so matter-of-factly that for a
moment Megan thought she had misunderstood.
"Aren't you afraid?"
"Of course I'm afraid. We're all afraid. None of us wants
to die, Sister. We'll meet your God soon enough. We don't
want to rush it."
"Have you done such terrible things?"
"That depends on your point of view. The difference
between a patriot and a rebel depends on who is in power at
the moment. The government calls us terrorists. We call
ourselves freedom fighters. Jean Jacques Rousseau said that
freedom is the power to choose our own chains. I want that
freedom." He studied her a moment. "But you don't have to
concern yourself with any of these things, do you? Once
you're back in the convent, you'll no longer be interested in
the world outside."
Was that true? Being out in the world again had turned her
life upside down. Had she given up her freedom? There was so
much she wanted to know, so much she had to learn. She felt
like an artist with a blank canvas about to start sketching a
new life. If I go back to a convent, she thought, I will be
shut away from life again. And even as she thought it, Megan
was appalled by the word if. When I go back, she corrected
herself hastily. Of course I'm going back. I have nowhere
else to go.
They camped that night in the woods.
Jaime said, "We're about thirty miles from Logrono and we
aren't supposed to meet the others for two days. It will be
safer for us to stay on the move until then. So tomorrow we
will head toward Vitoria. The next day we'll go into Logrono
and just a few hours after that, Sister, you'll be at the
convent in Mendavia."
Forever. "Will you be all right?" Megan asked.
"Are you worried about my soul, Sister, or my body?"
Megan found herself blushing.
"Nothing will happen to me. I'll cross the border into
France for a while."
"I will pray for you," Megan told him.
"Thank you," he said gravely. "I will think of you praying
for me and it will make me feel safer. Get some sleep now."
As Megan turned to lie down, she saw Amparo staring at her
from the far end of the clearing. There was a look of naked
hatred on her face.
No one takes my man from me. No one.
CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR
Early the following morning, they reached the outskirts of
Nanclares, a small village west of Vitoria. They came to a
filling station with a garage, where a mechanic was working
on a car. Jaime pulled into the garage.
"Buenos días," the mechanic said. "What is the problem?"
"If I knew," Jaime replied, "I would fix it myself and
charge for it. This car is as useless as a mule. It sputters
like an old woman and has no energy."
"It sounds like my wife," the mechanic grinned. "I think
you may have a carburetor problem, senor."
Jaime shrugged. "I know nothing about cars. All I know is
that I have a very important appointment in Madrid tomorrow.
Can you have it fixed by this afternoon?"
The mechanic said, "I have two jobs ahead of you, senor,
but—" He let the rest of the sentence hang in the air.
"I will be glad to pay you double."
The mechanic's face brightened. "Will two o'clock be all
right?"
"Wonderful. We'll get something to eat and come back at
two."
Jaime turned to the others, who had been listening to the
conversation in amazement. "We're in luck," Jaime said. "This
man is going to fix the car for us. Let's go eat."
They got out of the car and followed Jaime down the
street.
"Two o'clock," the mechanic said.
"Two o'clock."
When they were out of earshot, Felix said, "What are you
doing? There's nothing wrong with the car."
Except that by now the police will be looking for it,
Megan thought. But they'll be looking on the road, not in a
garage. It's a clever way to get rid of it.
"By two o'clock we'll be gone, won't we?" Megan asked.
Jaime looked at her and grinned. "I have to make a phone
call. Wait here."
Amparo took Jaime's arm. "I'll go with you."
Megan and Felix watched them walk off.
Felix looked at Megan and said, "You and Jaime are getting
along well, yes?"
"Yes." She suddenly felt shy.
"He is not an easy man to know. But he is a man of great
honor and great bravery. He is a very caring man. There is no
one like him. Did I tell you how he saved my life, Sister?"
"No. I would like to hear."
"A few months ago the government executed six freedom
fighters. In revenge, Jaime decided to blow up the dam at
Puente la Reina, south of Pamplona. The town below was
headquarters for the army. We moved in at night, but someone
tipped off the GOE, and Acoca's men caught three of us. We
were sentenced to die. It would have taken an army to storm
our prison, but Jaime figured out a way. He set the bulls
loose in Pamplona, and in the confusion got two of us away.
The third one was beaten to death by Acoca's men. Yes,
Sister, Jaime Miró is very special."
When Jaime and Amparo returned, Felix asked, "What is
happening?"
"Friends are picking us up. We'll have a ride into
Vitoria."
Half an hour later, a truck appeared. The back of it was
covered by canvas.
"Welcome," the driver said cheerfully. "Hop in."
"Thank you, amigo."
"It's a pleasure to be of assistance to you, senor. It's
good that you called. The damned soldiers are swarming around
like fleas. It is not safe for you and your friends to be out
in the open."
They climbed into the back of the truck, and the huge
vehicle headed northeast.
"Where will you be staying?" the driver asked.
"With friends," Jaime said.
And Megan thought: He doesn't trust anyone. Not even
someone who is helping him. But how can he? His life is in
danger. And she thought of how terrible it must be for Jaime
to be living under that shadow, running from the police and
the army. And all because he believed in an ideal so much
that he was willing to die for it. What was it he had said?
The difference between a patriot and a rebel depends on who
is in power at the moment.
The ride was a pleasant one. The thin canvas cover offered
security, and Megan realized how much fear she had felt when
they were out in the open fields, knowing that they were all
being hunted. And Jaime lives with that tension constantly.
How strong he is.
She and Jaime talked, and the conversation flowed easily,
as though they had known each other forever. Amparo Jirón sat
listening to them, saying nothing, her face impassive.
"When I was a boy," Jaime told Megan, "I wanted to be an
astronomer."
Megan was curious. "What made you—?"
"I had seen my mother and father and sisters shot down,
and friends murdered, and I couldn't face what was happening
here on this bloody earth. The stars were an escape. They
were millions of light years away, and I used to dream of
going to them one day and getting away from this awful
planet."
She was watching him, silent.
"But there is no escape, is there? In the end, we all have
to face up to our responsibilities. So I came back down to
earth. I used to believe that one person could not make a
difference. But I know now that that is not true. Jesus made
a difference, and Mohammed and Gandhi and Einstein and
Churchill." He smiled wryly. "Don't misunderstand, Sister.
I'm not comparing myself to any of them. But in my small way,
I do what I can. I think we must all do what we can."
And Megan wondered whether his words were meant to have a
special meaning for her.
"When I got the stars out of my eyes, I studied to be an
engineer. I learned to build buildings. Now I blow them up.
And the irony is that some of the buildings I've blown up are
ones that I've built."
They reached Vitoria at dusk.
"Where shall I take you?" the truck driver asked.
"You can drop us off here, at the corner, amigo."
The truck driver nodded. "Right. Keep up the good fight."
Jaime helped Megan down from the truck. Amparo watched,
her eyes blazing. She allowed her man to touch no other
woman. She's a whore, Amparo thought. And Jaime is horny for
that bitch of a nun. Well, that won't last. He will soon find
that her milk is thin. He needs a real woman.
The group took to the side streets, keeping a wary eye out
for trouble. Twenty minutes later, they arrived at a
one-story house nestled in a narrow street and surrounded by
a high fence.
"This is it," Jaime said. "We will stay here tonight and
leave tomorrow when it is dark."
They entered through the front gate and went to the door.
It took Jaime but a moment to slip the lock, and they all
went inside.
"Whose house is this?" Megan asked.
"You ask too many questions," Amparo said. "Just be
grateful we've kept you alive."
Jaime looked at Amparo a moment. "She's proved her right
to ask questions." He turned to Megan. "It's the house of a
friend. You're in Basque country now. From here on our
journey will be easier. There will be comrades everywhere,
watching and protecting us. You'll be at the convent the day
after tomorrow."
And Megan felt a small chill that was almost a sorrow.
What is the matter with me! she wondered. Of course I want to
go back. Forgive me, Lord. I asked that You bring me home to
Your safety, and You are.
"I'm starved," Felix said. "Let's check out the kitchen."
It was completely stocked.
Jaime said, "He left plenty of food for us. I will make us
a wonderful dinner." He smiled at Megan. "I think we deserve
it, don't you?"
Megan said, "I didn't know men cooked."
Felix laughed. "Basque men take pride in their cooking.
You are in for a treat. You will see."
Handing Jaime the ingredients he asked for, they watched
as he prepared a piperade of fresh roasted green peppers,
sliced white onions, tomatoes, eggs, and ham sauteed
together.
As it started to cook, Megan said, "It smells delicious."
"Ah, that's just the appetizer. I'm going to make a famous
Basque dish for you—polio al chilindrón."
He didn't say "for us," Amparo noted. He said, "for you."
For the bitch.
Jaime cut chicken into strips, sprinkled salt and pepper
over them, and browned them in hot oil while in a separate
pan he started to cook onions, garlic, and tomatoes. "We'll
let it simmer for half an hour."
Felix had found a bottle of red wine. He passed out
glasses. "The red wine of La Rioja. You will like this." He
offered a glass to Megan. "Sister?"
The last time Megan had tasted wine had been at communion.
"Thank you," she said.
Slowly she raised the glass to her lips and took a sip. It
was delicious. She took another sip and she could feel a
warmth moving down her body. It felt wonderful. I must enjoy
all this while I can, Megan thought. It will be over soon.
During dinner, Jaime seemed unusually preoccupied.
"What's troubling you, amigo?" Felix asked.
Jaime hesitated. "We have a traitor in the movement."
There was a shocked silence.
"What—what makes you think that?" Felix demanded.
"Acoca. He keeps getting too close to us."
Felix shrugged. "He's the fox and we're the rabbits."
"It's something more than that."
"What do you mean?" Amparo asked.
"When we were going to blow up the dam at Puente la Reina,
Acoca was tipped off." He looked at Felix. "He set a trap and
caught you and Ricardo and Zamora. If I hadn't been delayed,
I would have been captured with you. And look what happened
at the parador."
"You heard the clerk telephoning the police," Amparo
pointed out.
Jaime nodded. "Right. Because I had a feeling that
something was wrong."
Amparo's face was somber. "Who do you think it is?"
Jaime shook his head. "I'm not sure. Someone who knows all
our plans."
"Then let's change our plans," Amparo said. "We'll meet
the others at Logrono and skip Mendavia."
Jaime glanced at Megan. "We can't do that. We have to get
the sisters to their convent."
Megan looked at him and thought: He's already done enough
for me. I mustn't put him in greater danger than he's already
in.
"Jaime, I can—"
But he knew what she was going to say. "Don't worry,
Megan. We're all going to get there safely."
He's changed, Amparo thought. In the beginning he wanted
nothing to do with any of them. Now he's willing to risk his
life for her. And he calls her Megan. It's no longer Sister.
Jaime was going on. "There are at least fifteen people who
know our plans."
"We have to find out which one it is," Amparo insisted.
"How do we do that?" Felix asked. He was nervously picking
at the edges of the tablecloth.
Jaime said, "Paco is in Madrid doing some checking for me.
I've arranged for him to telephone me here." He looked at
Felix for a moment, then looked away.
What he had not said was that no more than half a dozen
people knew the exact route that the three groups were
taking. It was true that Felix Carpio had been imprisoned by
Acoca. It was also true that that would have provided a
perfect alibi for Felix. At the propitious moment, an escape
could have been planned for him. Except that I got him out
first, Jaime thought. Paco is checking on him. I hope he
calls soon.
Amparo rose and turned to Megan. "Help me with the
dishes."
The two women began to clear the table and the men went
into the living room.
"The nun—she's holding up well," Felix said.
"Yes."
"You like her, don't you?"
Jaime found it difficult to look at Felix. "Yes. I like
her." And you would betray her along with the rest of us.
"What about you and Amparo?"
"We're cut from the same cloth. She believes in the cause
as much as I do. Her entire family was killed by Franco's
Falangists." Jaime rose and stretched. "Time to turn in."
"I don't think I'm going to be able to sleep tonight. Are
you certain there's a spy?"
Jaime looked at him and said, "I'm certain."
When Jaime came downstairs for breakfast in the morning,
Megan did not recognize him. His face had been darkened, he
was wearing a wig and a moustache, and he was dressed in
scruffy clothes. He looked ten years older.
"Good morning," he said. His voice coming out of that body
startled her.
"Where did you—?"
"This is a house I use from time to time. I keep an
assortment of things here that I need."
He said it casually, but it gave Megan a sudden insight
into the kind of life he led. How many other houses and
disguises did he need to stay alive? How many other close
calls had he had that she knew nothing about? She remembered
the ruthlessness of the men who had attacked the convent and
thought: If they catch Jaime, they'll show him no mercy. I
wish I knew how to protect him.
Megan's mind was filled with thoughts she had no right to
be thinking.
Amparo prepared breakfast: bacalao—steamed, salted
codfish—goat's milk, cheese, and thick, hot chocolate with
churros.
As they were eating, Felix asked, "How long are we going
to stay here?"
Jaime replied casually, "We'll leave when it gets dark."
But he had no intention of letting Felix use that
information.
"I have some errands to do," he told Felix. "I'll need
your help."
"Right."
Jaime called Amparo aside. "When Paco calls, tell him I'll
be back shortly. Take a message."
She nodded. "Be careful."
"Don't worry." He turned to Megan. "Your last day.
Tomorrow you'll be at the convent. You must be eager to get
there."
She looked at him a long moment. "Yes." Not eager, Megan
thought. Anxious. I wish I weren't anxious. I'm going to shut
myself away from this, but for the rest of my life I'm going
to wonder what happened to Jaime and Felix and the others.
Megan stood there watching as Jaime and Felix left. She
sensed a tension between the two men that she did not
understand.
Amparo was studying her, and Megan remembered her words:
Jaime is much too much man for you.
Amparo said curtly, "Make up the beds. I'll prepare
lunch."
"All right."
Megan went toward the bedrooms. Amparo stood there
watching her, then walked into the kitchen.
For the next hour, Megan worked, busily concentrating on
cleaning and dusting and polishing, trying not to think,
trying to keep her mind off what was bothering her.
I must put him out of my mind, she thought.
It was impossible. He was like a force of nature, taking
over everything in his path.
She polished harder.
When Jaime and Felix returned, Amparo was waiting for them
at the door. Felix looked pale.
"I'm not feeling too well. I think I'll lie down for a
bit."
They watched him disappear into a bedroom.
"Paco called," Amparo said excitedly.
"What did he say?"
"He has some information for you, but he didn't want to
discuss it on the phone. He's sending someone to meet you.
This person will be at the village square at noon."
Jaime frowned, thoughtful. "He didn't say who it is?"
"No. Just that it was urgent."
"Damn it. I—never mind. All right. I'll go meet him. I
want you to keep an eye on Felix."
She looked at him, puzzled. "I don't un—?"
"I don't want him using the telephone."
A flash of understanding crossed her face. "You think that
Felix is—?"
"Please. Just do as I ask." He looked at his watch. "It's
almost noon. I'll leave now. I should be back in an hour.
Take care, querida."
"Don't worry."
Megan heard their voices.
I don't want him using the telephone.
You think that Felix is—?
Please. Just do as I ask.
So Felix is the traitor, Megan thought. She had seen him
go into his bedroom and close the door. She heard Jaime
leave.
Megan walked into the living room.
Amparo turned. "Have you finished?"
"Not quite. I—" She wanted to ask where Jaime had gone,
what they were going to do with Felix, what was going to
happen next, but she did not want to discuss that with this
woman. I'll wait until Jaime returns.
"Finish up," Amparo said.
Megan turned and went back into the bedroom. She thought
about Felix. He had seemed so friendly, so warm. He had asked
her many questions, but now that seeming act of friendliness
took on a different meaning. The bearded man was looking for
information that he could pass on to Colonel Acoca. All their
lives were in danger.
Amparo may need help, Megan thought. She started toward
the living room, then stopped.
A voice was saying, "Jaime just left. He will be alone on
a bench in the main plaza. He's disguised in a wig and
mustache. Your men should have no trouble picking him up."
Megan stood there, frozen.
"He's walking, so it should take him about fifteen minutes
to get there."
Megan listened with growing horror.
"Remember our deal, Colonel," Amparo said into the
telephone. "You promised not to kill him."
Megan backed into the hallway. Her mind was in a turmoil.
So Amparo was the traitor. And she had sent Jaime into a
trap.
Backing away quietly so Amparo would not hear her, Megan
turned and ran out the back door. She had no idea how she was
going to help Jaime. She knew only that she had to do
something. She stepped outside the gate and started down the
street, moving as fast as she could without attracting
attention, heading toward the center of the city.
Please, God. Let me be on time, Megan prayed.
The walk to the village square was a pleasant one, with
side streets shaded by towering trees, but Jaime was unaware
of his surroundings. He was thinking about Felix. He had been
like a brother to him, had given him his full trust. What had
turned him into a traitor willing to put all their lives in
jeopardy? Perhaps Paco's messenger would have the answer. Why
couldn't Paco have discussed it on the telephone? Jaime
wondered.
He was approaching the village square. In the middle of
the plaza was a fountain and shade trees with benches
scattered around. Children were playing tag. A couple of old
men were playing boule. Half a dozen men were seated on the
benches, enjoying the sunshine, reading, dozing, or feeding
the pigeons. Jaime crossed the street, slowly moving along
the path, and took a seat on one of the benches. He looked at
his watch just as the tower clock began to chime noon. Paco's
man should be coming.
Out of the corner of his eye, Jaime saw a police car pull
up at the far end of the square. He looked in the other
direction. A second police car arrived. Officers were getting
out, moving toward the park. His heart began to beat faster.
It was a trap. But who had set it? Was it Paco, who sent the
message, or Amparo, who delivered it? She had sent him to the
park. But why? Why?
There was no time to worry about that now. He had to
escape. But Jaime knew that the moment he tried to make a run
for it, they would shoot him down. He could try to bluff it
out, but they knew he was there.
Think of something. Fast!
A block away, Megan was hurrying toward the park. As it
came into view, she took in the scene at a glance. She saw
Jaime seated on a bench, and the policemen closing in on the
park from both sides.
Megan's mind was racing. There was no way for Jaime to
escape.
She was walking past a grocer's shop. Ahead of her,
blocking her path, a woman was pushing a baby carriage. The
woman stopped, set the carriage against the wall of the
store, and went inside to make a purchase. Without a moment's
hesitation, Megan grabbed the handle of the baby carriage and
moved across the street into the park.
The police were walking along the benches now, questioning
the men seated there. Megan elbowed her way past a policeman
and went up to Jaime, pushing the baby carriage ahead of her.
She yelled, "Madre de Dios! There you are, Manuel! I've
been looking everywhere for you. I've had enough! You
promised to paint the house this morning, and here you are
sitting in the park like some millionaire. Mother was right.
You're a good-for-nothing bum. I never should have married
you in the first place!"
It took Jaime less than a fraction of a second. He got to
his feet. "Your mother is an expert on bums. She married one.
If she—"
"Who are you to talk? If not for my mother, our baby would
starve to death. You certainly don't bring any bread into the
house…"
The policemen had stopped, taking in the argument.
"If that one was my wife," one of them muttered, "I'd send
her back to her mother."
"I'm damned tired of your nagging, woman," Jaime roared.
"I've warned you before. When we get home, I'm going to teach
you a lesson."
"Good for him," one of the policemen said.
Jaime and Megan noisily quarreled their way out of the
park, pushing the baby carriage before them. The policemen
turned their attention back to the men seated on the benches.
"Identification, please?"
"What's the problem, Officer?"
"Never mind. Just show me your papers."
All over the park, men were pulling out wallets and
extracting bits of paper to prove who they were. In the midst
of this, a baby began to cry. One of the policemen looked up.
The baby carriage had been abandoned at the corner. The
quarreling couple had vanished.
Thirty minutes later, Megan walked through the front door
of the house. Amparo was nervously pacing up and down.
"Where have you been?" Amparo demanded. "You shouldn't
have left the house without telling me."
"I had to go out to take care of something."
"What?" Amparo asked suspiciously. "You don't know anyone
here. If you—"
Jaime walked in, and the blood drained from Amparo's face.
But she quickly regained her composure.
"What—what happened?" she asked. "Didn't you go to the
park?"
Jaime said quietly, "Why, Amparo?"
And she looked into his eyes and knew it was over.
"What made you change?"
She shook her head. "I haven't changed. You have, I've
lost everyone I loved in this stupid war you're fighting. I'm
sick of all the bloodshed. Can you stand hearing the truth
about yourself, Jaime? You're as bad as the government you're
fighting. Worse, because they're willing to make peace, and
you're not. You think you're helping our country? You're
destroying it. You rob banks and blow up cars and murder
innocent people, and you think you're a hero. I loved you,
and I believed in you once, but—" Her voice broke. "This
bloodshed has to end."
Jaime walked up to her, and his eyes were ice. "I should
kill you."
"No," Megan gasped. "Please! You can't."
Felix had come into the room and was listening to the
conversation. "Jesus Christ! So she's the one. What do we do
with the bitch?"
Jaime said, "We'll have to take her with us and keep an
eye on her." He took Amparo by the shoulders and said softly,
"If you try one more trick, I promise you you'll die." He
shoved her away and turned to Megan and Felix. "Let's get out
of here before her friends arrive."
CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE
"You had Miró in your hands and you let him escape?"
"Colonel—with all due respect—my men—"
"Your men are assholes. You call yourselves policemen?
You're a disgrace to your uniforms."
The chief of police stood there, cringing under the
withering scorn of Colonel Acoca. There was nothing else he
could do, for the colonel was powerful enough to have his
head. And Acoca was not yet through with him.
"I hold you personally responsible. I'll see that you're
relieved from duty."
"Colonel—"
"Get out. You make me sick to my stomach."
Colonel Acoca was boiling with frustration. There had not
been enough time for him to reach Vitoria and catch Jaime
Miró. He had had to entrust that to the local police. And
they had bungled it. God alone knew where Miró had gone to
now.
Colonel Acoca went to the map spread out on a table in
front of him. They will be staying in Basque country, of
course. That could be Burgos or Logrono or Bilbao or San
Sebastian. I'll concentrate on the northeast. They'll have to
surface somewhere.
He recalled his conversation with the prime minister that
morning.
"Your time is running out, Colonel. Have you read the
morning papers? The world press is making us look like
clowns. Miró and those nuns have made us a laughingstock."
"Prime Minister, you have my assurance—"
"King Juan Carlos has ordered me to set up an official
inquiry board into the whole matter. I can't hold it off any
longer."
"Delay the inquiry for just a few more days. I'll have
Miró and the nuns by then."
There was a pause. "Forty-eight hours."
It was not the prime minister whom Colonel Acoca was
afraid of disappointing, nor was it the king. It was the OPUS
MUNDO. When he had been summoned to the paneled office of one
of Spain's leading industrialists, his orders had been
explicit: "Jaime Miró is creating an atmosphere harmful to
our organization. Stop him. You will be well rewarded."
And Colonel Acoca knew what the unspoken part of the
conversation was: Fail and you will be punished. Now his
career was in jeopardy. And all because some stupid policemen
had let Miró walk away under their noses. Jaime Miró might
hide anywhere. But the nuns… A wave of excitement coursed
through Colonel Acoca. The nuns! They were the key. Jaime
Miró might hide anywhere, but the sisters could find
sanctuary only in another convent. And it would almost
certainly be in a convent of the same order.
Colonel Acoca turned to study the map again. And there it
was: Mendavia. There was a convent of the Cistercian order at
Mendavia. That's where they're headed, Acoca thought
triumphantly. Well, so am I.
Only I'll be there first, waiting for them.
The journey for Ricardo and Graciela was coming to an end.
The last few days had been the happiest Ricardo had ever
known. He was being hunted by the military and the police,
his capture meant certain death, and yet none of that seemed
to matter. It was as though he and Graciela had carved out an
island in time, a paradise where nothing could touch them.
They had turned their desperate journey into a wonderful
adventure that they shared together.
They talked endlessly, exploring and explaining, and their
words were tendrils that drew them even closer together. They
spoke of the past, the present, and the future. Particularly
the future.
"We'll be married in church," Ricardo said. "You'll be the
most beautiful bride in the world…"
And Graciela could visualize the scene and was thrilled by
it.
"And we'll live in the most beautiful house…"
And she thought: I've never had a house of my own, or a
real room of my own.
There was the little casa she had shared with her mother
and all the uncles, and then the convent cell, living with
the sisters.
"And we'll have handsome sons and beautiful daughters…"
And I will give them all the things I never had. They will
be so loved.
And Graciela's heart soared.
But there was one thing troubling her. Ricardo was a
soldier fighting for a cause he passionately believed in.
Would he be content living in France, withdrawing from the
battle? She knew she had to discuss this with him.
"Ricardo—how much longer do you think this revolution is
going to go on?"
It's already gone on too long, Ricardo thought. The
government had made peace overtures, but ETA had done worse
than reject them. It had responded to the offers with a
series of increased terrorist attacks. Ricardo had tried to
discuss it with Jaime.
"They're willing to compromise, Jaime. Shouldn't we meet
them halfway?"
"Their offer is a trick—they want to destroy us. They're
forcing us to go on fighting."
And because Ricardo loved Jaime and believed in him, he
continued to support him. But the doubts refused to die. And
as the bloodshed increased, so did his uncertainty. And now
Graciela was asking, How much longer do you think this
revolution is going to go on?
"I don't know," Ricardo told her. "I wish it were over.
But I will tell you this, my darling. Nothing will ever come
between us—not even a war. There will never be words enough
to tell you how much I love you." And they went on dreaming.
They traveled during the night, making their way through
the fertile, green countryside, past El Burgo and Soria. At
dawn, from the top of a hill, they saw Logrono in the far
distance. To the left of the road was a stand of pine trees
and beyond that a forest of electric-power lines. Graciela
and Ricardo followed the winding road down to the outskirts
of the bustling city.
"Where are we going to meet the others?" Graciela asked.
Ricardo pointed to a poster on a building they were
passing. It read:
CIRQUE JAPON!
THE WORLD'S MOST
SENSATIONAL CIRCUS FRESH FROM JAPAN!
JULY 24TH
FOR ONE WEEK
AVENTOA CLUB DEPORTTVO.
"There," Ricardo told her. "We'll meet them there this
afternoon."
In another part of the city, Megan, Jaime, Amparo, and
Felix were also looking at a circus poster. There was a
feeling of enormous tension in the group. Amparo was never
out of their sight. Ever since the incident at Vitoria, the
men treated Amparo as an outcast, ignoring her most of the
time and speaking to her only when necessary.
Jaime looked at his watch. "The circus should be
starting," he said. "Let's go."
At police headquarters in Logrono, Colonel Ramón Acoca was
finalizing his plans.
"Are the men deployed around the convent?"
"Yes, Colonel. Everything is in place."
"Excellent."
Acoca was in an expansive mood. The trap he had set was
foolproof, and there would be no bungling policemen to spoil
his plans this time. He was personally conducting the
operation. The OPUS MUNDO was going to be proud of him. He
went over the details with his officers once again.
"The nuns are traveling with Miró and his men. It's
important that we catch them before they walk into the
convent. We'll be spread out in the woods around it. Don't
move until I give the signal to close in."
"What are our orders if Jaime Miró resists?"
Acoca said softly, "I hope he does try to resist."
An orderly came into the room. "Excuse me, Colonel. There
is an American here who would like to speak to you."
"I have no time now."
"Yes, sir." The orderly hesitated. "He says it's about one
of the nuns."
"Oh? An American, did you say?"
"Yes, Colonel."
"Send him in."
A moment later, Alan Tucker was ushered in.
"I'm sorry to disturb you, Colonel. I'm Alan Tucker. I'm
hoping you can help me."
"Yes? How, Mr. Tucker?"
"I understand that you're looking for one of the nuns from
the Cistercian convent—a Sister Megan."
The colonel sat back in his chair, studying the American.
"How does that concern you?"
"I'm looking for her too. It's very important that I find
her."
Interesting, Colonel Acoca thought. Why is it so important
for this American to find a nun? "You have no idea where she
is?"
"No. The newspapers—"
The goddamn press again. "Perhaps you could tell me why
you are looking for her."
"I'm afraid I can't discuss that."
"Then I'm afraid I can't help you."
"Colonel—could you let me know if you find her?"
Acoca gave him a thin smile. "You'll know."
The whole country was following the hegira of the nuns.
The press had reported the narrow escape of Jaime Miró and
one of the nuns in Vitoria.
So they're heading north, Alan Tucker thought. Their best
bet to get out of the country is probably San Sebastian. I've
got to get hold of her. He sensed that he was in trouble with
Ellen Scott. I handled that badly, he thought. I can make up
for it by bringing her Megan.
He placed a call to Ellen Scott.
The Cirque Japon was held in a huge tent in an outlying
district of Logrono. Ten minutes before the circus was to
begin, the tent was filled to capacity. Megan, Jaime, Amparo,
and Felix made their way down the crowded aisle to their
reserved seats. There were two empty seats next to Jaime.
He stared at them and said, "Something's wrong. Ricardo
and Sister Graciela were supposed to be here." He turned to
Amparo. "Did you—?"
"No. I swear it. I know nothing about it."
The lights dimmed and the show began. There was a roar
from the crowd, and they turned to look at the arena. A
bicycle rider was circling the ring, and as he pedaled an
acrobat leaped onto his shoulder. Then, one by one, a swarm
of other performers jumped on, clinging to the front and back
and sides of the bicycle until it was invisible. The audience
cheered.
A trained-bear act was next, and then a tightrope walker.
The audience was enjoying the show tremendously, but Jaime
and the others were too nervous to pay any attention. Time
was running out.
"We'll wait another fifteen minutes," Jaime decided. "If
they're not here by then—"
A voice said, "Excuse me—are these seats taken?"
Jaime looked up to see Ricardo and Graciela, and grinned.
"No. Please sit down." And then, in a relieved whisper, "I'm
damned glad to see you."
Ricardo nodded at Megan and Amparo and Felix. He looked
around. "Where are the others?"
"Haven't you seen the newspapers?"
"Newspapers? No. We've been in the mountains."
"I have bad news," Jaime said. "Rubio is in a prison
hospital."
Ricardo stared at him. "How—?"
"He was stabbed in a bar fight. The police picked him up."
"Mierda!" Ricardo was silent a moment, then sighed. "We'll
just have to get him out, won't we?"
"That's my plan," Jaime agreed.
"Where's Sister Lucia?" Graciela asked. "And Sister
Teresa?"
It was Megan who answered. "Sister Lucia has been
arrested. She was—she was wanted for murder. Sister Teresa is
dead."
Graciela crossed herself. "Oh, my Lord."
In the arena a clown was walking a tightrope, carrying a
poodle under each arm and two Siamese cats in his capacious
pockets. As the dogs tried to reach the cats, the wire swayed
wildly and the clown pretended to be fighting to keep his
balance. The audience was roaring. It was difficult to hear
anything over the noise of the crowd. Megan and Graciela had
so much to tell each other. Almost simultaneously, they began
to talk in the sign language of the convent. The others
looked on in astonishment.
Ricardo and I are going to marry…
That's wonderful…
What has been happening to you?
Megan started to reply and realized there were no signs to
convey the things she wanted to say. It would have to wait.
"Let's move," Jaime said. "There's a van outside waiting
to take us to Mendavia. We'll drop the sisters off there and
be on our way."
They started up the aisle, Jaime holding Amparo's arm.
When they were outside in the parking lot, Ricardo said,
"Jaime, Graciela and I are getting married."
A grin lit up Jaime's face. "That's wonderful!
Congratulations." He turned to Graciela. "You couldn't have
picked a better man."
Megan put her arms around Graciela. "I'm very happy for
you both." And she thought: Was it easy for her to make the
decision to leave the convent? Am I wondering about Graciela?
Or am I wondering about myself?
Colonel Acoca was receiving an excited report from an
aide.
"They were seen at the circus less than an hour ago. By
the time we could bring up reinforcements, they had gone.
They left in a blue and white van. You were right, Colonel.
They are headed for Mendavia."
So it's finally over, Acoca thought. The chase had been an
exciting one, and he had to admit that Jaime Miró had been a
worthy opponent. The OPUS MUNDO will have even bigger plans
for me now.
Through a pair of high-powered Zeiss binoculars, Acoca
watched the blue and white van appear over the crest of a
hill and head for the convent below. Heavily armed troops
were hidden among the trees along both sides of the road and
around the convent itself. There was no way anyone could
escape.
As the van approached the entrance to the convent and
braked to a stop, Colonel Acoca barked into his
walkie-talkie, "Close in! Now!"
The maneuver was executed perfectly. Two squads of
soldiers armed with automatic weapons swung into position,
blocking the road and surrounding the van. Acoca stood
watching the scene for an instant, savoring his moment of
glory. Then he slowly approached the van, gun in hand.
"You're surrounded," he called out. "You haven't got a
chance. Come out with your hands up. One at a time. If you
try to resist, you'll all die."
There was a long moment of silence, and then the van door
slowly opened and three men and three women emerged,
trembling, their hands raised high above their heads.
They were strangers.
CHAPTER THIRTY SIX
High on a hill above the convent, Jaime and the others
observed Acoca and his men move in on the van. They saw the
terrified passengers get out, hands raised, and watched the
scene played out in pantomime.
Jaime could almost hear the dialogue: Who are you?
We work at a hotel outside Logrono. What are you doing
here?
A man gave us five thousand pesetas to deliver this van to
the convent. What man?
I don't know. I never saw him before. Is this his picture?
Yes. That's him.
"Let's get out of here," Jaime said.
They were in a white station wagon, heading back to
Logrono. Megan was looking at Jaime in wonder.
"How did you know?"
"That Colonel Acoca would be waiting for us at the
convent? He told me."
"What?"
"The fox has to think like the hunter, Megan. I put myself
in Acoca's place. Where would he set a trap for me? He did
exactly what I would have done."
"And if he had not shown up?"
"Then it would have been safe to take you into the
convent."
"What happens now?" Felix asked.
It was the question uppermost in all their minds.
"Spain isn't safe for any of us for a while," Jaime
decided. "We'll head directly for San Sebastian and into
France." He looked at Megan. "There are Cistercian convents
there."
It was more than Amparo could bear.
"Why don't you give yourself up? If you keep on this way,
there will be more blood spilled and more lives taken—"
"You've lost the right to speak," Jaime said curtly. "Just
be grateful you're still alive." He turned to Megan. "There
are ten mountain passes across the Pyrenees leading from San
Sebastian to France. We'll cross there."
"It's too dangerous," Felix objected. "Acoca's going to be
looking for us in San Sebastian. He'll be expecting us to
cross the border into France."
"If it's that dangerous—" Graciela began.
"Don't worry," Jaime assured her. "San Sebastian is Basque
country."
The station wagon was approaching the outskirts of Logrono
again.
"All the roads to San Sebastian will be watched," Felix
warned. "How do you plan for us to get there?"
Jaime had already decided. "We'll take the train."
"The soldiers will be searching the trains," Ricardo
objected.
Jaime gave Amparo a thoughtful look. "No. I don't think
so. Our friend here is going to help us. Do you know how to
reach Colonel Acoca?"
She hesitated. "Yes."
"Good. You're going to call him."
They stopped at one of the telephone booths along the
highway. Jaime followed Amparo into the booth and closed the
door. He was holding a pistol to her side.
"You know what to say?"
"Yes."
He watched her dial a number, and when a voice answered,
she said, "This is Amparo Jirón. Colonel Acoca is expecting
my call… Thank you." She looked up at Jaime. "They're putting
me through." The gun was pressing against her. "Do you have
to—?"
"Just do as you were told." His voice was ice.
A moment later, Jaime heard Acoca's voice come over the
phone. "Where are you?"
The gun pressed against her harder. "I—I'm—we're just
leaving Logrono."
"Do you know where our friends are going?"
"Yes."
Jaime's face was inches from hers, his eyes hard.
"They've decided to reverse themselves to throw you off.
They're on their way to Barcelona. He's driving a white Seat.
He'll be taking the main highway."
Jaime nodded at her. "I—I have to go now. The car is
here." Jaime pressed down the receiver. "Very good. Let's go.
We'll give him half an hour to call off his men here."
Thirty minutes later they were at the railroad station.
There were three classes of trains from Logrono to San
Sebastian: The TALGO was the luxury train; the second-class
train was the TER; and the worst and cheapest trains,
uncomfortable and dirty, were misnamed the expresos— they
stopped at every little station from Logrono to San
Sebastian.
Jaime said, "We'll take the expreso. By now all of Acoca's
men will be busy stopping every white Seat on the road to
Barcelona. We'll buy our tickets separately and meet in the
last car of the train." Jaime turned to Amparo. "You go
first. I'll be right behind you."
She knew why, and hated him for it. If Colonel Acoca had
set a trap, she would be the bait. Well, she was Amparo
Jirón. She would not flinch.
She walked into the station while Jaime and the others
watched. There were no soldiers.
They're all out covering the highway to Barcelona. It's
going to be a madhouse, Jaime thought wryly. Every other car
is a white Seat.
One by one the group purchased their tickets and headed
for the train. They boarded without incident. Jaime took the
seat next to Megan. Amparo sat in front of them, next to
Felix. Across the way Ricardo and Graciela sat together.
Jaime said to Megan, "We'll reach San Sebastian in three
hours. We'll spend the night there and in the early morning
we'll cross over into France."
"And after we get to France?"
She was thinking of what would happen to Jaime, but when
he replied, he said, "Don't worry. There's a Cistercian
convent just a few hours across the border." He hesitated.
"If that's what you still want."
So he had understood her doubts. Is that what I want? They
were coming to more than a border that divided two countries.
This border would divide her old life from her future life…
which would be… what? She had been desperate to return to a
convent, but now she was filled with doubts. She had
forgotten how exciting the world outside the walls could be.
I've never felt so alive. Megan looked over at Jaime and
admitted to herself: And Jaime Miró is a part of it.
He caught her glance and looked into her eyes, and Megan
thought: He knows it.
The expreso stopped at every hamlet and village along the
track. The train was packed with farmers and their wives,
merchants and salesmen, and at each stop passengers noisily
embarked and disembarked.
The expreso made its way slowly through the mountains,
fighting the steep grades.
When the train finally pulled into the station in San
Sebastian, Jaime said to Megan, "The danger is over. This is
our city. I've arranged for a car to be here for us."
A large sedan was waiting in front of the station. A
driver wearing a chapella, the big, wide-brimmed beret of the
Basques, greeted Jaime with warm hugs, and the group got into
the car.
Megan noticed that Jaime stayed close to Amparo, ready to
grab her if she tried to make a move. What's he going to do
to her? Megan wondered.
"We were worried about you, Jaime," the driver said.
"According to the press, Colonel Acoca is conducting a big
hunt for you."
Jaime laughed. "Let him keep hunting, Gil. I am out of
season."
They drove down the Avenida Sancho el Sabio, toward the
beach. It was a cloudless summer day and the streets were
crowded with strolling couples bent on pleasure. The harbor
was awash with yachts and smaller craft. The distant
mountains formed a picturesque backdrop for the city.
Everything seemed so peaceful.
"What are the arrangements?" Jaime asked the driver.
"The Hotel Niza. Largo Cortez is waiting for you."
"It will be good to see the old pirate again."
The Niza was a medium-class hotel in the Plaza Juan de
Oiezabal, off the Calle de San Martín on the corner of a busy
square. It was a white building with brown shutters and a big
blue sign at the top. The rear of the hotel backed onto a
beach.
When the car pulled up in front of the hotel, the group
got out and followed Jaime into the lobby.
Largo Cortez, the hotel owner, ran up to greet them. He
was a large man. He had only one arm as the result of a
daring exploit, and he moved awkwardly, as though
off-balance.
"Welcome," he said, beaming. "I have been expecting you
for a week now."
Jaime shrugged. "We had a few delays, amigo."
Largo Cortez grinned. "I read about them. The papers are
full of nothing else." He turned to look at Megan and
Graciela. "Everyone is rooting for you, Sisters. I have your
rooms all prepared."
"We'll be staying overnight," Jaime told him. "We'll leave
first thing in the morning and cross into France. I want a
good guide who knows all the passes—either Cabrera Infante or
José Cebrián."
"I will arrange it," the hotel owner assured him."There
will be six of you?"
Jaime glanced at Amparo. "Five."
Amparo looked away.
"I suggest that none of you registers," Cortez said. "What
the police don't know won't hurt them. Why don't you let me
take you to your rooms, where you can refresh yourselves?
Then we'll have a magnificent supper."
"Amparo and I are going to the bar to have a drink," Jaime
said. "We'll join you later."
Largo Cortez nodded. "As you wish, Jaime."
Megan was watching Jaime, puzzled. She wondered what he
planned to do with Amparo. Is he going to coldbloodedly —?
She could not bear even to think about it.
Amparo was wondering too, but she was too proud to ask.
Jaime led her into the bar at the far end of the lobby and
took a table in the corner.
When the waiter approached them, Jaime said, "A glass of
wine, por favor."
"One?"
"One."
Amparo watched as Jaime took out a small packet and opened
it. It contained a fine, powdery substance.
"Jaime—" There was desperation in Amparo's voice. "Please
listen to me! Try to understand why I did what I did. You're
tearing the country apart. Your cause is hopeless. You must
stop this insanity."
The waiter reappeared and set a glass of wine on the
table. When he walked away, Jaime carefully poured the
contents of the packet into the glass and stirred it. He
pushed the glass in front of Amparo.
"Drink it."
"No!"
"Not many of us are privileged to choose the way we die,"
Jaime said quietly. "This way will be quick and painless. If
I turn you over to my people, I can't make any such promise."
"Jaime—I loved you once. You must believe me. Please—"
"Drink it." His voice was implacable.
Amparo looked at him for a long moment, then picked up the
glass. "I'll drink to your death."
He watched as Arnparo put the glass to her lips and
swallowed the wine in one gulp.
She shuddered. "What happens now?"
"I'll help you upstairs. I'll put you to bed. You'll
sleep."
Amparo's eyes filled with tears. "You're a fool," she
whispered. "Jaime—I'm dying, and I tell you that I loved you
so—" Her words were beginning to slur.
Jaime rose and helped Amparo to her feet. She stood up,
unsteady. The room seemed to be rocking.
"Jaime—"
He guided her out the door and into the lobby, holding her
up. Largo Cortez was waiting for him with a key.
"I'll take her to her room," Jaime said. "See that she's
not disturbed."
"Right."
Cortez watched as Jaime half-carried Amparo up the stairs.
In her room, Megan was thinking how strange it felt to be
by herself in a hotel in a resort town. San Sebastian was
filled with people on vacation, honeymooners, lovers enjoying
themselves in a hundred other hotel rooms. And suddenly Megan
wished Jaime were there with her, and wondered what it would
be like to have him make love to her. All the feelings that
she had been suppressing for so long came flooding into her
mind in a wild torrent of emotions.
But what did Jaime do to Amparo? Could he possibly have…
but no, he could never have done that. Or could he? I want
him, she thought. Oh, Lord, what's happening to me? What can
I do?
Ricardo was whistling as he dressed. He was in a wonderful
mood. I'm the luckiest man in the world, he thought. We'll be
married in France. There's a beautiful church across the
border in Bayonne. Tomorrow…
In her room, Graciela was taking a bath, luxuriating in
the warm water, thinking of Ricardo. She smiled to herself
and thought: I'm going to make him so happy. Thank You, God.
Felix Carpio was thinking about Jaime and Megan. A blind
man can see the electricity between them, he thought. It is
going to bring bad luck. Nuns belong to God. It's bad enough
that Ricardo has taken Sister Graciela from her calling. But
Jaime had always been reckless. What was he going to do about
this one?
The five of them met for supper in the hotel dining room.
No one mentioned Amparo.
Looking at Jaime, Megan felt suddenly embarrassed, as
though he could read her mind.
It's better not to ask questions, she decided. I know he
could never do anything brutal.
They found that Largo Cortez had not exaggerated about the
supper. The meal began with gazpacho—the thick cold soup made
from tomatoes, cucumbers, and water-soaked bread—followed by
a salad of fresh greens, a huge dish of paella—rice, shrimp,
chicken, and vegetables in a wonderful sauce—and ended with a
delicious flan. It was the first hot meal Ricardo and
Graciela had had in a long time.
When the meal was over, Megan rose. "I should be getting
to bed."
"Wait," Jaime said. "I have to talk to you." He escorted
her to a deserted corner of the lobby. "About tomorrow…"
"Yes?"
And she knew what he was going to ask. What she did not
know was what she was going to answer. I've changed, Megan
thought. I was so sure about my life before. I believed I had
everything I wanted.
Jaime was saying, "You don't really want to go back to a
convent, do you?"
Do I?
He was waiting for an answer.
I have to be honest with him, Megan thought. She looked
into his eyes and said, "I don't know what I want, Jamie. I'm
confused."
Jaime smiled. He hesitated, choosing his words carefully.
"Megan—this fight will be over soon. We'll get what we want
because the people are behind us. I can't ask you to share
the danger with me now, but I would like you to wait for me.
I have an aunt living in France. You would be safe with her."
Megan looked at him a long time before she answered.
"Jaime—give me time to think about it."
"Then you're not saying no?"
Megan said quietly, "I'm not saying no."
None of the group slept that night. They had too much to
think about, too many conflicts to resolve.
Megan stayed awake reliving the past. The years in the
orphanage, and the sanctuary of the convent. Then the sudden
expulsion into a world she had given up forever. Jaime Miró
was risking his life fighting for what he believed in. And
what do I believe in? Megan asked herself. How do I want to
spend the rest of my life?
She had made a choice once. Now she was forced to choose
again. She would have to have an answer by morning.
Graciela was thinking about the convent too. They were
such happy, peaceful years. I felt so close to God. Will I
miss that?
Jaime was thinking about Megan. She mustn't go back. I
want her at my side. What will her answer be?
Ricardo was too excited to sleep, busily making plans for
the wedding. The church at Bayonne…
Felix was wondering how to dispose of Amparo's body. Let
Largo Cortez take care of it.
Early the following morning, the group met in the lobby.
Jaime approached Megan.
"Good morning."
"Good morning."
"Have you thought about our conversation?"
She had thought of nothing else all night."Yes, Jaime."
He looked into her eyes, trying to read the answer there.
"Will you wait for me?"
"Jaime—"
At that moment Largo Cortez hurried up to them. With him
was a leathery-looking man in his fifties.
"I'm afraid there won't be any time for breakfast," Cortez
said. "You should be leaving. This is José Cebrián, your
guide. He will take you across the mountains into France.
He's the best guide in San Sebastian."
"I'm glad to see you, José," Jaime said. "What's your
plan?"
"We're going to take the first part of the journey by
foot," José Cebrián told the group. "On the other side of the
border, I've arranged for cars to be waiting for us. We
should hurry. Come along, please."
The group moved out into the street, which was painted
yellow by the rays of the bright sun.
Largo Cortez came out of the hotel to see them off. "Safe
journey," he said.
"Thank you for everything," Jaime replied. "We'll be back,
amigo. Sooner than you think."
"We go this way," José Cebrián ordered.
The group started to turn toward the square. And at that
moment, soldiers and members of the GOE suddenly materialized
at both ends of the street, sealing it off. There were at
least a dozen of them, all heavily armed. Colonels Ramón
Acoca and Fal Sostelo were leading them.
Jaime glanced quickly toward the beach, looking for an
escape route. Another dozen soldiers were approaching from
that direction. There was no escape. They would have to
fight. Jaime instinctively reached for his gun.
Colonel Acoca called out, "Don't even think about it,
Miró, or we'll shoot all of you down where you're standing."
Jaime's mind was racing furiously, looking for a way out.
How had Acoca known where to find him? Jaime turned and saw
Amparo standing in the doorway, a look of profound sorrow on
her face.
Felix said, "What the bloody hell! I thought you—"
"I gave her sleeping pills. They should have knocked her
out until we got across the border."
"The bitch!"
Colonel Acoca walked toward Jaime. "It's over." He turned
to one of his men. "Disarm them."
Felix and Ricardo were looking toward Jaime for guidance,
ready to follow his lead. Jaime shook his head. Reluctantly,
he handed over his gun, and Felix and Ricardo followed suit.
"What are you going to do with us?" Jaime asked.
Several passersby stopped to watch the proceedings.
Colonel Acoca's voice was curt. "I'm taking you and your
gang of murderers back to Madrid. We'll give you a fair
military trial and then hang you. If I had my way, I'd hang
you here now."
"Let the sisters go," Jaime said. "They had nothing to do
with this."
"They're accomplices. They're as guilty as you are."
Colonel Acoca turned and gave a signal. The soldiers
motioned to the growing crowd of onlookers to move aside and
let three army tracks drive up.
"You and your assassins will ride in the middle truck,"
the colonel informed Jaime. "My men will be in front of you
and in back of you. If any of you makes one false move, they
have orders to kill all of you. Do you understand?"
Jaime nodded.
Colonel Acoca spat into Jaime's face. "Good. Into the
truck."
There was an angry murmur from the now sizable crowd.
Amparo watched impassively from the doorway as Jaime,
Megan, Graciela, Ricardo, and Felix climbed into the truck,
surrounded by soldiers with automatic weapons.
Colonel Sostelo walked up to the driver of the first
truck. "We'll head straight for Madrid. No stops along the
way."
"Yes, Colonel."
By now, many people had gathered at both ends of the
street to watch what was happening. Colonel Acoca started to
climb into the first truck. He called out to those in front
of the truck, "Clear the way."
From the side streets more people began to emerge.
"Move along," Acoca ordered. "Out of the way."
And still they came, the men wearing the wide Basque
chapellas. It was as though they were responding to some
invisible signal. Jaime Miró is in trouble. They came from
shops and homes. Housewives dropped what they were doing and
moved out into the street. Shopkeepers about to open for
business heard the news and hurried to the hotel. And still
they came. Artists and plumbers and doctors, mechanics and
salesmen and students, many carrying shotguns and rifles,
axes and scythes. They were Basques, and this was then
homeland. It started with a few, and then a hundred, and
within minutes it had swollen to more than a thousand,
filling the sidewalks and streets, completely surrounding the
army trucks. They were ominously silent.
Colonel Acoca observed the huge crowd in desperation. He
screamed, "Everybody get out of the way or we'll start
shooting."
Jaime called out, "I wouldn't advise it. These people hate
you for what you're trying to do to them. A word from me and
they'll tear you and your men to pieces. There's one thing
you forgot, Colonel. San Sebastian is a Basque town. It's my
town." He turned to his group. "Let's get out of here."
Jaime helped Megan down from the truck, and the others
followed. Acoca watched helplessly, his face tight with fury.
The crowd was waiting, hostile and silent. Jaime walked up
to the colonel. "Take your trucks and get back to Madrid."
Acoca looked around at the still growing mob. "I—you won't
get away with this, Miró."
"I have gotten away with it. Now get out of here." He spat
in Acoca's face.
The colonel stared at him for a long, murderous moment. It
can't end this way, he thought desperately. I was so close.
It was checkmate. But he knew that it was worse than a defeat
for him. It was a death sentence. The OPUS MUNDO would be
waiting for him in Madrid. He looked at the sea of people
surrounding him. He had no choice.
He turned to his driver, and his voice was choked with
fury. "We're moving out."
The crowd stepped back, watching as the soldiers climbed
into the trucks. A moment later, the trucks began to roll
down the street, and the crowd began to cheer wildly. It
started out as a cheer for Jaime Miró, and it grew louder and
louder, and soon they were cheering for their freedom, and
their fight against tyranny, and their coming victory, and
the streets reverberated with the noise of their celebration.
Two teenagers were screaming themselves hoarse. One turned
to the other. "Let's join ETA."
An elderly couple held each other, and the woman said,
"Now maybe they'll give us back our farm."
An old man stood alone in the crowd, silently watching the
army trucks leave. When he spoke, he said, "They'll be back
one day."
Jaime took Megan's hand and said, "It's over. We're free.
We'll be across the border in an hour. I'll take you to my
aunt."
She looked into his eyes. "Jaime—"
A man pushed his way toward them through the crowd and
hurried up to Megan.
"Excuse me," he said breathlessly. "Are you Sister Megan?"
She turned to him. "Yes."
He breathed a sigh of relief. "I've had quite a time
finding you. My name is Alan Tucker. I wonder if I could
speak to you for a moment?"
"Yes."
"Alone."
"I'm sorry. I'm just leaving for—"
"Please. This is very important. I've come all the way
from New York to find you."
She looked at him, puzzled. "To find me? I don't
understand. Why—?"
"I'll explain it to you, if you'll give me a moment."
The stranger took her arm and walked her down the street,
talking rapidly. She glanced back once at where Jaime Miró
stood waiting for her.
Megan's conversation with Alan Tucker turned her world
upside down.
"The woman I represent would like to see you."
"I don't understand. What woman? What does she want with
me?"
I wish I knew the answer to that, Alan Tucker thought.
"I'm not at liberty to discuss that. She's waiting for you in
New York."
It made no sense. There must be some mistake. "Are you
sure you have the right person—Sister Megan?"
"Yes. But your name isn't Megan, It's Patricia."
And in a sudden, blinding flash, Megan knew. After all
these years, her fantasy was about to come true. She was
finally going to learn who she was. The very idea of it was
thrilling… and terrifying.
"When—when would I have to leave?" Her throat was suddenly
so dry, she could barely speak the words.
I want you to find out where she is and bring her back as
quickly as possible,
"Right away. I'll arrange a passport for you."
She turned and saw Jaime standing in front of the hotel,
waiting.
"Excuse me a moment."
Megan walked back to Jaime in a daze, and she felt as
though she were living a dream.
"Are you all right?" Jaime asked. "Is that man bothering
you?"
"No. He's—no."
He took Megan's hand. "I want you to come with me now. We
belong together, Megan."
Your name isn't Megan. It's Patricia.
She looked at Jaime's strong, handsome face, and thought:
I want us to be together. But we'll have to wait. First I
have to find out who I am.
"Jaime—I want to be with you. But there is something I
have to do first."
He studied her, his face troubled. "You're going to
leave?"
"For a little while. But I'll be back."
He looked at her for a long time, then slowly nodded. "All
right. You can reach me through Largo Cortez."
"I'll come back to you. I promise."
And she meant it. But that was before the meeting with
Ellen Scott.
CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN
"Deus Israel conjungat vos; et ipse sit vobiscum, qui,
misertus est duobus unicis… plenius benedicere te… The God of
Israel join you together, and He be with you… and now, Lord,
make them bless Thee more fully. Blessed are all they that
love the Lord, that walk in His ways. Glory…"
Ricardo looked away from the priest and glanced at
Graciela standing at his side. I was right. She is the most
beautiful bride in the world.
Graciela was still, listening to the words of the priest
echo through the cavernous, vaulted church. There was such a
sense of peace in this place. It seemed to Graciela to be
filled with the ghosts of the past, all the thousands of
people who had come there generation after generation to find
forgiveness, fulfillment, and joy. It reminded her so much of
the convent. I feel as though I've come home again, Graciela
thought. As though I belong.
"Exaudi nos, omnipotens et misericors Deus; ut, quod
nostro ministratur officio, tua benedictione potius impleatur
Per Dominum… Hear us, Almighty and merciful God, that what is
done by our ministry may be abundantly fulfilled with Thy
blessing…"
He has blessed me, more than I deserve. Let me be worthy
of Him.
"In te speravi, domine: dixi: Tu es Deus meus: in manibus
tuis tempora mea…"
"In Thee, O Lord, have I hoped; I said: Thou art my God;
my times are in Thy hands…"
My times are in Thy hands. I took a solemn vow to devote
the rest of my life to Him.
"Suscipe, quaesumus, Domine, pro sacra connubii lege munus
oblatum…"
"Receive, we beseech Thee, O Lord, the offering we make to
Thee on behalf of the holy bond of wedlock…"
The words seemed to reverberate in Graciela's head. She
felt as though time had stopped.
"Deus qui potestate virtutis tuae de nihilo cuncta
fecisti…"
"Oh, God, who by the mighty power didst make all things
out of nothing…"
"Oh, God, who has hallowed wedlock to foreshadow the union
of Christ with the Church… look in Thy mercy upon this, Thy
handmaid, who is to be joined in wedlock and entreats
protection and strength from Thee…"
But how can He show me mercy when I am betraying , Him?
Graciela was suddenly finding it difficult to breathe. The
walls seemed to be closing in on her.
"Nihil in ea ex actibus suis ille auctor praevaricationis
usurpet…"
"Let the author of sin work none of his evil deeds in
her…"
That was the moment when Graciela knew. She felt as though
a great burden had been lifted from her. She was filled with
an exalted, ineffable joy.
The priest was saying, "May she win the peace of the
kingdom of heaven. We ask Thee to bless this marriage, and—"
"I'm already married," Graciela said aloud.
There was a moment of shocked silence. Ricardo and the
priest were staring at her. Ricardo's face was pale.
"Graciela, what are you—?"
She took his arm and said gently, "I'm sorry, Ricardo."
"I—I don't understand. Have—have you stopped loving me?"
She shook her head. "I love you more than my life. But my
life doesn't belong to me anymore. I gave it to God a long
time ago."
"No! I can't let you sacrifice your—"
"Darling Ricardo… It is not a sacrifice. It's a blessing.
In the convent I found the first peace I had ever known.
You're a part of the world I gave up—the best part. But I did
give it up. I must return to my world."
The priest was standing there listening, silent.
"Please forgive me for the pain I am causing you, but I
can't go back on my vows. I would be betraying everything I
believe in. I know that now. I could never make you happy,
because I could never be happy. Please understand."
Ricardo stared at her, shaken, and no words would come. It
was as though something in him had died.
Graciela looked at his stricken face, and her heart went
out to him. She kissed him on the cheek. "I love you," she
said softly. Her eyes filled with tears. "I will pray for
you. I will pray for us both."
CHAPTER THIRTY EIGHT
Late on a Friday afternoon, a military ambulance drove up
to the emergency entrance of the hospital at Aranda de Duero.
An ambulance attendant accompanied by two uniformed policemen
went through the swinging doors and approached the supervisor
behind the desk.
"We have an order here to pick up a Rubio Arzano," one of
the policemen said. He handed over the document.
The supervisor looked at it and frowned. "I don't think I
have the authority to release him. It should be handled by
the administrator."
"Fine. Get him."
The supervisor hesitated. "There's a problem. He's away
for the weekend."
"It's not our problem. There's our release order, signed
by Colonel Acoca. Do you want to call him and tell him you
won't honor it?"
"No," he said hastily. "That won't be necessary. I'll have
them get the prisoner ready."
Half a mile away, in front of the city jail, two
detectives emerged from a police car and entered the
building. They approached the desk sergeant.
One of the men showed his badge. "We're here to pick up
Lucia Carmine."
The sergeant looked at the two detectives in front of him
and said, "No one told me anything about this."
One of the detectives sighed. "Goddamned bureaucracy. The
left hand never tells the right hand what it's doing."
"Let me see that release order."
The detectives handed it to him.
"Colonel Acoca signed it, huh?"
"That's right."
"Where are you taking her?"
"Madrid. The colonel is going to question her himself."
"Is he? Well, I think I'd better check it out with him."
"There's no need to do that," the detective protested.
"Mister, we've got orders to keep a tight grip on this
lady. The Italian government is having an orgasm over getting
her back. If Colonel Acoca wants her, he's going to have to
tell me himself."
"You're wasting time, and—"
"I have a lot of time, amigo. What I don't have is another
ass if I lose mine over this." He picked up the phone and
said, "Get me Colonel Acoca in Madrid."
"Jesus Christ!" the detective said. "My wife is going to
kill me if I'm late for dinner again. Besides, the colonel's
probably not even in, and—"
The phone on the desk rang. The sergeant reached for it.
A voice said, "I have the colonel's office on the line."
The sergeant gave the detectives a triumphant look.
"Hello. This is the desk sergeant at the police station in
Aranda de Duero. It is important that I speak to Colonel
Acoca."
One of the detectives looked at his watch impatiently.
"Mierda! I have better things to do than stand around and—"
"Hello. Colonel Acoca?"
The voice boomed out over the phone. "Yes. What is it?"
"I have two detectives here, Colonel, who want me to
release a prisoner into your custody."
"Lucia Carmine?"
"Yes, sir."
"Did they show you an order signed by me?"
"Yes, sir. They—"
"Then what the fuck are you bothering me for? Release
her."
"I just thought—"
"Don't think. Follow orders."
The line went dead.
The sergeant swallowed. "He—er—"
"He has a short fuse, hasn't he?" the detective grinned.
The sergeant rose, trying to retain his dignity. "I'll
have her brought out."
In the alley in back of the police station, a small boy
was watching a man on the telephone pole disconnect a clamp
from a wire and climb down.
"What are you doing?" the boy asked.
The man ruffled his hand through the boy's hair. "Helping
out a friend, muchacho. Helping out a friend."
Three hours later, at an isolated farmhouse to the north,
Lucia Carmine and Rubio Arzano were reunited.
Acoca was awakened by the telephone at three A.M. The
familiar voice said, "The Committee would like to meet with
you."
"Yes, sir. When?"
"Now, Colonel. A limousine will pick you up in one hour.
Be ready, please."
"Yes, sir."
He replaced the receiver and sat on the edge of the bed,
then lit a cigarette and let the smoke bite deep into his
lungs.
A limousine will pick you up in one hour. Be ready,
please.
He would be ready.
He went into the bathroom and examined his image in the
mirror. He was looking into the eyes of a defeated man.
I was so close, he thought bitterly. So close.
Colonel Acoca began to shave, very carefully, and when he
was finished, he took a long, hot shower, then selected the
clothes he was going to wear.
Exactly one hour later, he walked to the front door and
took a last look at the home he knew he would never see
again. There would be no meeting, of course. They would have
nothing further to discuss with him.
There was a long, black limousine waiting in front of the
house. A door opened as he approached the car. There were two
men in front and two in back.
"Get in, Colonel."
He took a deep breath and entered the car. A moment later,
it sped away into the black night.
It's like a dream, Lucia thought. I'm looking out the
window at the Swiss Alps. I'm actually here.
Jaime Miró had arranged for a guide to see that she
reached Zurich safely. She had arrived late at night.
In the morning, I'll go to the Bank Leu.
The thought made her nervous. What if something had gone
wrong? What if the money was no longer there? What if… ?
As the first light of dawn inched over the mountains,
Lucia was still awake.
A few minutes before nine, she left the Baur au Lac hotel
and stood in front of the bank, waiting for it to open.
A kindly-looking middle-aged man unlocked the door. "Come
in, please. I hope you haven't been waiting long?"
Only a few months, Lucia thought. "No. Not at all."
He ushered her inside. "What can we do for you?"
Make me rich. "My father has an account here. He asked me
to come in and—and take it over."
"Is it a numbered account?"
"Yes."
"May I have the number, please?"
"B2A149207."
He nodded. "One moment, please."
She watched him disappear toward a vault in back. The bank
was beginning to fill with customers. It's got to be there,
Lucia thought. Nothing must go—
The man was approaching her. She could read nothing in his
face.
"This account—you say it was in your father's name?"
Her heart sank. "Yes. Angelo Carmine."
He studied her a moment. "The account carries two names."
Did that mean she would not be able to touch it? "What—"
She could scarcely get the words out. "What's the other
name?"
"Lucia Carmine."
And in that instant, she owned the world.
The account amounted to a little more than thirteen
million dollars.
"How would you like it handled?" the banker asked.
"Could you transfer it to one of your associated banks in
Brazil? Rio?"
"Certainly. We'll send you the documentation by messenger
this afternoon."
It was that simple.
Lucia's next stop was at a travel agency near the hotel.
There was a large poster in the window advertising Brazil.
It's an omen, Lucia thought happily. She went inside.
"May I help you?"
"Yes. I would like two tickets to Brazil."
There are no extradition laws there.
She could not wait to tell Rubio how well everything was
going. He was in Biarritz waiting for her call. They would be
going to Brazil together.
"We can live in peace there for the rest of our lives,"
she had told him.
Now everything was finally set. After all the adventure
and the dangers… the arrest of her father and brothers and
her vengeance against Benito Patas and Judge Buscetta … the
police looking for her and her escape to the convent… Acoca's
men and the phony friar… Jaime Miró and Teresa and the gold
cross… and Rubio Arzano. Most of all, dear Rubio. How many
times had he risked his life for her? He had saved her from
the soldiers in the woods… from the raging waters at the
waterfall… from the men in the bar at Aranda de Duero. The
very thought of Rubio warmed Lucia.
She returned to her hotel room and picked up the
telephone, waiting for the operator to answer.
There will be something for him to do in Rio. What? What
can he do? He'll probably want to buy a farm somewhere out in
the country. But then what would I do?
An operator's voice said, "Number, please."
Lucia sat there staring out the window at the snow-covered
Alps. We have two different lives, Rubio and I. We live in
different worlds. I'm the daughter of Angelo Carmine.
"Number, please?"
He's a farmer. That's what he loves. How can I take him
away from that? I can't do that to him.
The operator was getting impatient. "Can I help you?"
Lucia said slowly, "No. No, thank you." She replaced the
receiver.
Early the following morning, she boarded a Swissair flight
to Rio.
She was alone.
CHAPTER THIRTY NINE
The meeting was to take place in the luxurious drawing
room of Ellen Scott's townhouse. She paced back and forth
waiting for Alan Tucker to arrive with the girl. No. Not a
girl. A woman. A nun. What would she be like? What had life
done to her? What have I done to her?
The butler walked into the room. "Your guests have
arrived, Madam."
She took a deep breath. "Show them in."
A moment later, Megan and Alan Tucker entered.
She's beautiful, Ellen thought. Tucker smiled. "Mrs.
Scott, this is Megan." Ellen looked at him and said quietly,
"I won't need you anymore." And her words had a finality to
them. His smile faded.
"Good-bye, Tucker."
He stood there a moment, uncertain, then nodded and left.
He could not get over his feeling that he had missed
something. Something important. Too late, he thought. Too
bloody late.
Ellen Scott was studying Megan. "Sit down, please."
Megan took a chair, and the two women sat there inspecting
each other.
She looks like her mother, Ellen thought. She's grown up
to be a beautiful woman. She recalled the terrible night of
the accident, the storm and the burning plane.
You said she was dead… There's something we can do. The
pilot said we were near Ávila. There should be plenty of
tourists there. There's no reason for anyone to connect the
baby with the plane crash… We'll drop her off at a nice
farmhouse outside of town. Someone will adopt her and she'll
grow up to have a lovely life here… You have to choose, Milo.
You can either have me, or you can spend the rest of your
life working for your brother's child.
And now here was the past confronting her. Where to begin?
"I'm Ellen Scott, president of Scott Industries. Have you
heard of it?"
"No."
Of course she would not have heard of it, Ellen chided
herself.
This was going to be more difficult than she had
anticipated. She had concocted a story about an old friend of
the family who had died, and a promise to take care of his
daughter—but from the moment she had first looked at Megan,
Ellen knew that it would not work. She had no choice. She had
to trust Patricia—Megan—not to destroy them all. She thought
of what she had done to the woman seated before her, and her
eyes filled with tears. But it's too late for tears. It's
time to make amends. It's time to tell the truth.
Ellen Scott leaned across to Megan and took her hand. "I
have a story to tell you," she said quietly.
That had been three years earlier. For the first year,
until she became too ill to continue, Ellen Scott had taken
Megan under her wing. Megan had gone to work for Scott
Industries, and her aptitude and intelligence had delighted
the older woman, giving her a fresh outlook and reinforcing
her will to live.
"You'll have to work hard," Ellen had told her. "You'll
learn, as I had to learn. In the beginning, it will be
difficult, but in the end, it will become your life."
And it had.
Megan worked hours that none of her employees could even
begin to emulate.
"You get to your office at four o'clock in the morning and
work all day. How do you do it?"
Megan smiled and thought: If I slept until four o'clock in
the morning at the convent, Sister Betina would scold me.
Ellen Scott was gone, but Megan had kept learning, and
kept watching the company grow. Her company. Ellen had
adopted her. "So we won't have to explain why you're a
Scott," she had said. But there was a note of pride in her
voice.
It's ironic, Megan thought. All those years at the
orphanage when no one would adopt me. And now I'm being
adopted by my own family. God has a wonderful sense of humor.
CHAPTER FORTY
A new man was behind the wheel of the getaway car, and it
made Jaime Miró nervous. "I'm not sure of him," he told Felix
Carpio. "What if he drives off and leaves us?"
"Relax. He's my cousin's brother-in-law. He'll be fine.
He's been begging for a chance to go out with us."
"I have a bad feeling," Jaime said.
They had arrived in Seville early that afternoon, and had
examined half a dozen banks before choosing their target. It
was on a side street, small, not too much traffic, close to a
factory that would be making deposits there. Everything
seemed perfect. Except for the man in the getaway car.
"Is he all that's worrying you?" Felix asked.
"No."
"What, then?"
It was a difficult one to answer. "Call it a premonition."
He tried to say it lightly, mocking himself.
Felix took it seriously. "Do you want to call it off?"
"Because I have the nerves of an old washerwoman today?
No, amigo. It will all go as smooth as silk."
In the beginning, it did.
There were half a dozen patrons in the bank, and Felix
held them at bay with an automatic weapon while Jaime cleared
out the cash drawers. Smooth as silk.
As the two men were leaving, heading for the getaway car,
Jaime called out, "Remember, amigos, the money is for a good
cause."
It was out in the street that it began to fall apart.
There were police everywhere. The driver of the getaway car
was on his knees on the pavement, a police pistol at his
head.
As Jaime and Felix came into view, a detective called out,
"Drop your weapons."
Jaime hesitated for one split second. Then he raised his
gun.
CHAPTER FORTY ONE
The converted 727 was flying thirty-five thousand feet
over the Grand Canyon. It had been a long, hard day. And it's
not over yet, Megan thought.
She was on her way to California to sign the papers that
would give Scott Industries one million acres of timberland
north of San Francisco. She had struck a hard bargain.
It's their fault, Megan thought. They shouldn't have tried
to cheat me. I'll bet I'm the first bookkeeper they've ever
come up against from a Cistercian convent. She laughed aloud.
The steward approached her. "Can I get you anything, Miss
Scott?"
She saw a stack of newspapers and magazines in the rack.
She had been so busy with the deal that she had not had time
to read anything. "Let me see The New York Times, please."
The story was on the front page and it leaped out at her.
There was a photograph of Jaime Miró. Below it the article
read: "Jaime Miró, leader of ETA, the radical Basque
separatist movement in Spain, was wounded and captured by
police during a bank holdup yesterday afternoon in Seville.
Killed in the attack was Felix Carpio, another of the alleged
terrorists. The authorities had been conducting a search for
Miró since…"
Megan read the rest of the article and sat there for a
long time, frozen, remembering the past. It was like a
distant dream photographed through a gauze curtain, hazy and
unreal.
This fight will be over soon. We'll get what we want
because the people are behind us… I would like you to wait
for me…
Long ago she had read of a civilization that believed if
you saved a person's life, you were responsible for him.
Well, she had saved Jaime twice—once at the castle, and again
at the park. I'll be damned if I'm going to let them kill him
now.
She reached for the telephone next to her seat and said to
the pilot, "Turn the plane around. We're going back to New
York."
A limousine was waiting for her at La Guardia Airport, and
by the time she arrived in her office it was two A.M.
Lawrence Gray, Jr., was waiting for her. His father had been
the company's attorney for years and had retired. His son was
bright and ambitious.
Without preamble, Megan said, "Jaime Miró. What do you
know about him?"
The reply was immediate. "He's a Basque terrorist, head of
ETA. I think I just read that he was captured a day or so
ago."
"Right. The government is going to have to put him on
trial. I want to have someone there. Who's the best trial
lawyer in the country?"
"I'd say Curtis Hayraan."
"No. Too much of a gentleman. We need a killer." She
thought for a moment. "Get Mike Rosen."
"He's booked for the next hundred years, Megan."
"Unbook him. I want him in Madrid for the trial."
He frowned. "We can't get involved in a public trial in
Spain."
"Sure we can. Amicus curiae. We're friends of the
defendant."
He studied her a moment. "Do you mind if I ask you a
personal question?"
"Yes. Get on this."
"I'll do my best."
"Larry…"
"Yes?"
"And then some." There was steel in her voice.
Twenty minutes later, Lawrence Gray, Jr., walked back into
Megan's office. "Mike Rosen is on the phone. I think I woke
him up. He wants to talk to you."
Megan picked up the telephone. "Mr. Rosen? What a pleasure
this is. We've never met, but I have a feeling you and I are
going to become very good friends. A lot of people sue Scott
Industries just for the target practice, and I've been
looking around for someone to take charge of all our
litigation. Yours is the one name that keeps coming up.
Naturally, I'm prepared to pay you a large retainer for—"
"Miss Scott—?"
"Yes."
"I don't mind a little snow job, but you're giving me
frostbite."
"I don't understand."
"Then let me put it in legal parlance for you. Cut out the
bullshit. It's two o'clock in the morning. You don't hire
people at two o'clock in the morning."
"Mr. Rosen—"
"Mike. We're going to be good friends, remember? But
friends have to trust one another: Larry tells me you want me
to go to Spain to try to save some Basque terrorist who's in
the hands of the police."
She started to say, "He's not a terrorist—" but stopped
herself. "Yes."
"What's your problem? Is he suing Scott Industries because
his gun jammed?"
"He—"
"I'm sorry, friend. I can't help you. My schedule is so
tight that I gave up going to the bathroom six months ago. I
can recommend a few lawyers…"
No, Megan thought. Jaime Miró needs you. And she was
suddenly seized by a sense of hopelessness. Spain was another
world, another time. When she spoke, her voice sounded weary.
"Never mind," she said. "It's a very personal matter. I'm
sorry for coming on so strongly."
"Hey! That's what CEOs are supposed to do. Very personal
is different, Megan. To tell you the truth, I'm dying to hear
what interest the head of Scott Industries has in saving a
Spanish terrorist. Are you free for lunch tomorrow?"
She was going to let nothing stand in her way.
"Absolutely."
"Le Cirque at one o'clock?"
Megan felt her spirits lifting. "Fine."
"You make the reservation. But I have to warn you about
something."
"Yes?"
"I have a very nosy wife."
They met at Le Cirque, and when Sirio had seated them,
Mike Rosen said, "You're better-looking than your picture.
I'll bet everybody tells you that."
He was very short, and he dressed carelessly. But there
was nothing careless about his mind. His eyes radiated a
blazing intelligence.
"You've aroused my curiosity," Mike Rosen said. "What's
your interest in Jaime Miró?"
There was so much to tell. Too much to tell. All Megan
said was, "He's a friend. I don't want him to die."
Rosen leaned forward in his seat. "I went through the
newspaper files on him this morning. If Don Juan Carlos's
government executes Miró only once, he'll be way ahead of the
game. They're going to get hoarse just reading the charges
against your friend." He saw the expression on Megan's face.
"I'm sorry, but I have to be honest. Miró has been a very
busy man. He holds up banks, blows up cars, murders people—"
"He's not a murderer. He's a patriot. He's fighting for
his rights."
"Okay, okay. He's my hero too. What do you want me to do?"
"Save him."
"Megan, we're such good friends that I'm going to tell you
the absolute truth. Jesus Christ himself couldn't save him.
You're looking for a miracle that—"
"I believe in miracles. Will you help me?"
He studied her a moment. "What the hell. What are friends
for? Have you tried the pate? I hear they make it kosher."
The Fax message from Madrid read: "Have spoken to half a
dozen top European lawyers. They refuse to represent Miró.
Tried to have myself admitted to trial as amicus curiae.
Court ruled against me. Wish I could pull off that miracle
for you, friend, but Jesus hasn't risen yet. Am on my way
home. You owe me a lunch. Mike."
The trial was set to begin the seventeenth of September.
"Cancel my appointments," Megan told her assistant. "I
have some business to take care of in Madrid."
"How long will you be gone?"
"I don't know."
Megan planned her strategy on the plane flying over the
Atlantic. There has to be a way, she thought. I have money
and I have power. The prime minister is the key. I have to
get to him before the trial starts. After that, it will be
too late.
Megan had an appointment with Prime Minister Leopoldo
Martinez twenty-four hours after she arrived in Madrid. He
invited her to Moncloa Palace for lunch.
"Thank you for seeing me so promptly," Megan said. "I know
what a busy man you are."
He raised a hand in deprecation. "My dear Miss Scott, when
the head of an organization as important as Scott Industries
flies to my country to see me, I can only be honored. Please
tell me how I can assist you."
"I really came here to assist you," Megan said. "It
occurred to me that while we have a few factories in Spain,
we're not using nearly enough of the potential that your
country has to offer."
He was listening closely now, his eyes shining. "Yes?"
"Scott Industries is thinking about opening a huge
electronics plant. It should employ somewhere between a
thousand and fifteen hundred people. If it is as successful
as we think it will be, we'll open satellite factories."
"And you have not decided in which country you wish to
open this plant?"
"That's right. I'm personally in favor of Spain, but quite
frankly, Your Excellency, some of my executives are not too
happy with your civil rights record."
"Really?"
"Yes. They feel that those who object to some of the
policies of the state are treated too harshly."
"Do you have anyone in particular in mind?"
"As a matter of fact, I do. Jaime Miró."
He sat there staring at her. "I see. And if we were to be
lenient with Jaime Miró, we would get the electronics factory
and—"
"And a lot more," Megan assured him. "Our factories will
raise the standard of living in every community they're in."
The prime minister frowned. "I'm afraid there is one small
problem."
"What? We can negotiate further."
"This is something that cannot be negotiated, Miss Scott.
Spain's honor is not for sale. You cannot bribe us or buy us
or threaten us."
"Believe me, I'm not—"
"You come here with your handouts and expect us to run our
courts to please you? Think again, Miss Scott. We don't need
your factories."
I've made it worse, Megan thought, despairingly.
The trial lasted six weeks in a heavily guarded courtroom
that was closed to the public.
Megan remained in Madrid, following the news reports of
the trial each day. From time to time, Mike Rosen telephoned
her.
"I know what you're going through, friend. I think you
should come home."
"I can't, Mike."
She tried to see Jaime.
"Absolutely no visitors."
The last day of the trial, Megan stood outside the
courtroom, lost in a crowd of people. Reporters came
streaming out of the building, and Megan stopped one of them.
"What happened?"
"They found him guilty on all counts. He's going to get
the garrote."
CHAPTER FORTY TWO
At five A.M. on the morning scheduled for the execution of
Jaime Miró, crowds began to gather outside the central prison
in Madrid. Barricades set up by the Guardia Civil kept the
swelling mob of onlookers across the wide street, away from
the front entrance to the prison. Armed troops and tanks
blocked the iron prison gates.
Inside the prison, in the office of Warden Gomez de la
Fuente, an extraordinary meeting was taking place. In the
room were Prime Minister Leopoldo Martinez, Alonzo Sebastian,
the new head of the GOE, and the warden's executive deputies,
Juanito Molinas and Pedros Arrango. Warden de la Fuente was a
heavyset, grim-faced middle-aged man who had passionately
devoted his life to disciplining the miscreants that the
government had placed in his charge. Molinas and Arrango, his
hard-bitten assistants, had served with de la Fuente for the
past twenty years.
Prime Minister Martinez was speaking. "I would like to
know what arrangements you have made to ensure that there
will be no trouble in carrying out Miró's execution."
Warden de la Fuente replied, "We have prepared for every
possible contingency, Your Excellency. As Your Excellency
observed when you arrived, a full company of armed soldiers
is stationed around the prison. It would take an army to
break in."
"And inside the prison itself?"
"The precautions are even more stringent. Jaime Miró is
locked in a double security cell on the second floor. The
other prisoners on that floor have been temporarily
transferred. Two guards are stationed in front of Miró's cell
and two guards are at each end of the cell block. I have
ordered a general lock-down, so that all prisoners will
remain in their cells until after the execution."
"What time will that take place?"
"At noon, Your Excellency. I have postponed mess hall
until one o'clock. That will give us enough time to get
Miró's body out of here."
"What plans have you made for disposing of it?"
"I am following your suggestion, Excellency. His burial in
Spain could cause the government embarrassment if the Basques
should turn his grave into some kind of shrine. We have been
in touch with his aunt in France. She lives in a small
village outside Bayonne. She has agreed to bury him there."
The prime minister rose. "Excellent." He sighed. "I still
think a hanging in the public square would have been more
appropriate."
"Yes, Your Excellency. But in that case, I could no longer
have been responsible for controlling the mob outside."
"I suppose you're right. There's no point in stirring up
any more excitement than is necessary. The garrote is more
painful and slower. And if any man deserves the garrote, it
is Jaime Miró."
Warden de la Fuente said, "Excuse me, Your Excellency, but
I understand that a commission of judges is meeting to
consider a last-minute appeal from Miró's attorneys. If it
should come through, what should I—?"
The prime minister interrupted. "It won't. The execution
will proceed as scheduled."
The meeting was over.
At seven-thirty A.M., a bread truck arrived in front of
the prison gate.
"Delivery."
One of the prison guards stationed at the entrance looked
in at the driver. "You're new, aren't you?"
"Yeah."
"Where's Julio?"
"He's sick in bed today."
"Why don't you go join him, amigo?"
"What?"
"No deliveries this morning. Come back this afternoon."
"But every morning—"
"Nothing goes in, and only one thing is going out. Now,
back up, turn around, and get your ass out of here before my
pals get nervous."
The driver looked around at the armed soldiers staring at
him. "Sure. Okay."
They watched as he turned the truck around and disappeared
down the street. The commander of the post reported the
incident to the warden. When the story was checked out, it
was learned that the regular deliveryman was in the hospital,
a victim of a hit-and-run driver.
At eight A.M., a car bomb exploded across the street from
the prison, wounding half a dozen bystanders. Under ordinary
circumstances, the guards would have left their posts to
investigate and assist the wounded. But they had strict
orders. They remained at their stations and the Guardia Civil
was summoned to take charge.
The incident was promptly reported to Warden de la Fuente.
"They're getting desperate," he said. "Be prepared for
anything."
At nine-fifteen A.M., a helicopter appeared over the
prison grounds. Painted on its sides were the words La
Prensa, Spain's prominent daily newspaper.
Two antiaircraft guns had been set up on the prison roof.
The lieutenant in charge waved a flag to warn off the plane.
It continued to hover. The officer picked up a field
telephone.
"Warden, we have a copter overhead."
"Any identification?"
"It says La Prensa, but the sign looks freshly painted."
"Give it one warning shot. If it doesn't move, blow it out
of the sky."
"Yes, sir." He nodded to his gunner. "Put a close one in."
The shot landed five yards to the side of the helicopter.
They could see the pilot's startled face. The gunner
loaded again. The helicopter swooped up and disappeared
across the skies of Madrid.
What the hell is next! the lieutenant wondered.
At eleven A.M. Megan Scott appeared at the reception
office of the prison. She looked drawn and pale. "I want to
see Warden de la Fuente."
"Do you have an appointment?"
"No, but—"
"I'm sorry. The warden isn't seeing anyone this morning.
If you telephone this afternoon—"
"Tell him it's Megan Scott."
He took a closer look at her. So this is the rich American
who's trying to get Jaime Miró released. I wouldn't mind
having her work on me for a few nights. "I'll tell the warden
you're here."
Five minutes later Megan was seated in Warden de la
Fuente's office. With him were half a dozen members of the
prison board.
"What can I do for you, Miss Scott?"
"I would like to see Jaime Miró."
The warden sighed. "I'm afraid that is not possible."
"But I'm—"
"Miss Scott—we are all aware of who you are. If we could
accommodate you, I assure you that we would be more than
happy to do so," he said with a smile. "We Spaniards are
really an understanding people. We are also sentimental, and
from time to time we are not averse to turning a blind eye to
certain rules and regulations." His smile disappeared. "But
not today, Miss Scott. No. Today is a very special day. It
has taken us years to catch the man you wish to see. So this
is a day of rules and regulations. The next one to see Jaime
Miró will be his God —if he has one."
Megan stared at him, miserable. "Could—could I just look
at him for a moment?"
One of the members of the prison board, touched by the
anguish in Megan's face, was tempted to intervene. He stopped
himself.
"I'm sorry," Warden de la Fuente said. "No."
"Could I send him a message?" Her voice was choked.
"You would be sending a message to a dead man." He looked
at his watch. "He has less than an hour to live."
"But he's appealing his sentence. Isn't a panel of judges
meeting to decide if—?"
"They've voted against it. I received word from them
fifteen minutes ago. Miró's appeal has been denied. The
execution will take place. Now, if you'll excuse me—"
He rose, and the others followed suit. Megan looked around
the room at their cold faces and shuddered.
"May God have mercy on all of you," she said.
They watched, silent, as she fled from the room.
At ten minutes before the noon hour, the door to Jaime
Miró's cell was opened. Warden Gomez de la Fuente,
accompanied by his two assistants, Molinas and Arrange, and
Dr. Miguel Anuncion, entered the cell. Four armed guards
stood watch in the corridor.
The warden said, "It's time."
Jaime rose from his cot. He was handcuffed and shackled.
"I was hoping you'd be late." There was an air of dignity
about him that Warden de la Fuente could not help but admire.
At another time, under other circumstances, we might have
been friends, he thought.
Jaime stepped out into the deserted corridor, his
movements clumsy because of the shackles. He was flanked by
the guards and Molinas and Arrange. "The garrote?" Jaime
asked.
The warden nodded. "The garrote." Excruciatingly painful,
inhuman. It was a good thing, the warden thought, that the
execution would take place in a private room, away from the
eyes of the public and the press.
The procession made its way down the corridor. From
outside, in the street, they could hear the chant of the
crowd: "Jaime… Jaime… Jaime…" It was a swelling, bursting
from a thousand throats, growing louder and louder.
"They're calling for you," Pedros Arrange said.
"No. They're calling for themselves. They're calling for
freedom. Tomorrow they'll have another name. I may die—but
there will always be another name."
They passed through two security gates and came to a small
chamber at the end of the hallway that had a green iron door.
From around the corner a black-robed priest appeared.
"Thank heavens I'm in time. I've come to give the
condemned man the last rites."
As he moved toward Miró, two guards blocked his way.
"Sorry, Father," Warden de la Fuente said. "Nobody goes
near him."
"But I'm—"
"If you want to give him his last rites, you'll have to do
it through closed doors. Out of the way, please."
A guard opened the green door. Standing inside, next to a
chair with heavy arm straps that was bolted to the floor, was
a huge man wearing a half-mask. In his hands he held the
garrote.
The warden nodded toward Molinas and Arrango and the
doctor, and they entered the room after Jaime. The guards
remained outside. The green door was locked and bolted.
Inside the room, Molinas and Arrango led Jaime to the
chair. They unlocked his handcuffs, then strapped him in,
pulling the heavy straps against his arms, while Dr. Anuncion
and Warden de la Fuente watched. Through the thick closed
door they could barely hear the chanting of the priest.
De la Fuente looked at Jaime and shrugged. "It doesn't
matter. God will understand what he is saying."
The giant holding the garrote moved behind Jaime. Warden
Gomez de la Fuente asked, "Do you want a cloth over your
face?"
"No."
The warden looked at the giant and nodded. The giant
lifted the garrote in his hand and reached forward.
The guards outside the door could hear the chanting of the
mob in the street.
"You know something?" one of the guards grumbled. "I wish
I was out there with them."
Five minutes later, the green door opened.
Dr. Anuncion said, "Bring in the body bag."
Following instructions, Jaime Miró's body was smuggled out
through a back door of the prison. The body bag was thrown
into the back of an unmarked van. But the moment the vehicle
pulled out of the prison grounds, the crowd in the street
pressed forward, as though drawn to it by some mystic magnet.
"Jaime… Jaime…"
But the cries were softer now. Men and women wept, and
their children looked on in wonder, not understanding what
was happening. The van made its way through the crowd and
finally turned onto a highway.
"Jesus," the driver said. "That was spooky. The guy must
have had something."
"Yeah. And thousands of people knew it, too!"
At two o'clock that afternoon, Warden Gomez de la Fuente
and his two assistants, Juanito Molinas and Pedros Arrango,
appeared at the office of Prime Minister Martinez.
"I want to congratulate you," the prime minister said.
"The execution went perfectly."
The warden spoke. "Mr. Prime Minister, we're not here to
receive your congratulations. We're here to resign."
Martinez stared at them, baffled. "I—I don't understand.
What—?"
"It's a matter of humanity, Your Excellency. We just
watched a man die. Perhaps he deserved to die. But not like
that. It—it was barbaric. I want no more part of this or
anything like it, and my colleagues feel the same way."
"Perhaps you should give this more thought. Your
pensions—"
"We have to live with our consciences." Warden de la
Fuente handed the prime minister three pieces of paper.
"Here are our resignations."
Late that night, the van crossed the French border and
headed for the village of Bidache, near Bayonne. It pulled up
before a neat farmhouse.
"This is the place. Let's get rid of the body before it
starts to smell."
The door to the farmhouse was opened by a woman in her
middle fifties. "You brought him?"
"Yes, ma'am. Where would you like it—er—him?"
"In the parlor, please."
"Yes, ma'am. I—I wouldn't wait too long to bury him. You
know what I mean?"
She watched the two men carry in the body bag and set it
on the floor.
"Thank you."
"De nada."
She stood there watching as they drove away.
Another woman walked in from the other room and ran toward
the body bag. She hastily unzipped it.
Jaime Miró was lying there smiling up at them. "Do you
know something? That garrote could be a real pain in the
neck." ,
"White wine or red?" Megan asked.
CHAPTER FORTY THREE
At Barajas Airport in Madrid, former Warden Gomez de la
Fuente, his former assistants, Molinas and Arrango, Dr.
Anuncion, and the giant who had worn the mask were in the
departure lounge.
"I still think you're making a mistake not coming with me
to Costa Rica," de la Fuente said. "With your five million
dollars, you can buy the whole fucking country."
Molinas shook his head. "Arrango and I are going to
Switzerland. I'm tired of the sun. We're going to buy
ourselves a few dozen snow bunnies."
"Me too," the giant said.
They turned to Miguel Anuncion.
"What about you, Doctor?"
"I'm going to Bangladesh."
"What?"
"That's right. I'm going to use the money to open a
hospital there. You know, I thought about it a long time
before I accepted Megan Scott's offer. But I figured that if
I can save a lot of innocent lives by letting one terrorist
live, it's a good trade-off. Besides, I must tell you, I
liked Jaime Miró."
CHAPTER FORTY FOUR
It had been a good season in the French countryside,
showering farmers with an abundance of crops. I wish that
every year could be as wonderful as this, Rubio Arzano
thought. It has been a good year in more ways than one.
First, his marriage, and then, a year ago, the birth of
the twins. Whoever dreamed a man could be this happy?
It was starting to rain. Rubio turned the tractor around
and headed for the barn. He thought about the twins. The boy
was going to be big and strapping. But his sister! She was
going to be a handful. She's going to give her man a lot of
trouble, Rubio grinned to himself. She takes after her
mother. He drove the tractor into the barn and headed for the
house, feeling the cool rain against his face. He opened the
door and stepped inside. "You're just in time." Lucia smiled.
"Dinner's ready."
The Reverend Mother Prioress Betina awakened with a
premonition that something wonderful was about to happen.
Of course, she thought, enough good things have already
happened.
The Cistercian convent had long since been reopened, under
the protection of King Don Juan Carlos. Sister Graciela and
the nuns who had been taken to Madrid were safely returned to
the convent, where they were allowed to retreat once again
into the blessed solitude and silence.
Shortly after breakfast, the Mother Prioress walked into
her office and stopped, staring. On her desk, shining with a
dazzling brightness, lay the gold cross.
It was accepted as a miracle.
AFTERWORD
Madrid has tried to buy peace by offering the Basques
limited autonomy, allowing them to have their own flag, their
own language, and a Basque police department. ETA replied by
assassinating Constantin Ortin Gil, Madrid's military
governor, and later Luis Carrero Blanco, the man chosen by
Franco to be his successor.
The violence keeps escalating.
In a three-year period, ETA terrorists have killed more
than six hundred people. The slaughter continues and the
retaliation by the police has been equally ruthless.
Not so many years ago, ETA had the sympathy of the two and
a half million Basque people, but continued terrorism has
eroded their support. In Bilbao, the very heart of the Basque
homeland, one hundred thousand people took to the streets to
demonstrate against ETA. The Spanish people feel it is time
for peace, time to heal the wounds.
The OPUS MUNDO is more powerful than ever, but few people
are willing to discuss it.
As for the Cistercian convents of the Strict Observance,
there are in existence today fifty-four convents worldwide,
seven of them in Spain.
Their timeless ritual of eternal silence and seclusion
remains unchanged.